JP2024045533A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the presentation effect. [Solution] The side of the rotating member 810 facing the front is configured to change between a first position and a second position, so that if each side of a single movable means, the rotating member 810, is designed in a different manner, the side that is viewed (the front side) can be changed, and the rotating member 810 can be made to look like a completely different object to the player. Therefore, the rotating member 810 can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the presentation effect. Note that the form of the predetermined presentation is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a motion presentation in which at least a part of the rotating member 810 moves, or a light-emitting presentation that utilizes light irradiated from a light-emitting means possessed by the rotating member 810. [Selected Figure] Fig. 61

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a position-changing member that is pivoted on a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-200914 A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the presentation effect. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be improved in terms of improving the presentation effect.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is provided with a first means capable of executing a predetermined performance, and the first means is capable of changing between a first position for performing a first performance and a second position for performing a second performance as the predetermined performance, and the side facing forward changes between the first position and the second position.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first means includes predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figures can be visually recognized by the emitted light. , a figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is configured to be changeable between the first attitude and the second attitude.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and is visible at the first position. The outer shape of the first means that is visible at the second position is different from the outer shape of the first means that is visible at the second position.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 can be improved in terms of enhancing the presentation effect.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved by changing the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means. .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, since the first means is configured such that the visually recognized external shape changes while moving, it is possible to simply It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize a performance that is difficult to realize with a single member.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line VI-VI in FIG. 2. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. 1A is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. 4A is a front view of the sorting unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 9(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). 12(a) and 12(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit in a range XIIIa of FIG. 12(b). 4A is a front view of the passage unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of the game board and operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the central structural unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central structural unit. 19 is an enlarged front view of the game board in range XXVI of FIG. 18. FIG. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 26. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 19 is an enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXI of FIG. 18. FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. 19 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXV of FIG. 18. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36. FIG. FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operating unit in range XLV of FIG. 44 . 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, the elevating plate member, and the resistance generator in range XLIXa in FIG. 47, and (b) is a front perspective view of the outer member in range XLIXb in FIG. 47. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member, inner member, displacement member, and rotational posture auxiliary member in range La of FIG. 47, and (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member and rotational posture auxiliary member in range Lb of FIG. 47. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the member. This is an exploded front oblique view of the light-emitting action production unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting action production unit. This is an exploded front oblique view of the light-emitting action production unit. 54(a) is a front view of the right-side intermediate connecting member, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in Figure 54(a), (c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVc in Figure 54(a), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member along line LIVd-LIVd in Figure 54(a). FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. (a) to (c) are schematic side views of the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole, and the curved elongated hole, schematically showing the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole, and the curved elongated hole. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a fastening portion of a displacement member, a long hole of a connected hole, and a support hole. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV in Figure 36. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV in Figure 36. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 36. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 36. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 36. 13A is a front view of a sorting unit in a third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a front view of a distribution unit in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged front view of a game board in a fifth embodiment. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 72. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 13A to 13C are schematic side views illustrating a guide portion and an L-shaped slot in a seventh embodiment. 13A to 13C are schematic side views showing the second long hole, the curved long hole, the third long hole, the upper part of the first long hole, and the lower part of the first long hole in the eighth embodiment. 37(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light-emitting action production unit in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 37. 13A and 13B are front views of a rotating member and a posture detection means according to a tenth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 16, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Figure 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown) on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from its front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, whereas when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 4R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of In the high probability state (during certain variation) in this embodiment, the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of variations (in this embodiment, 100 variations), and the probability of winning a second symbol (described later) increases, resulting in a second This includes a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 compared to when the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to a back case fixed to the back of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window (center opening 60b) of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for displaying fluctuations. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gates 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 140, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown in Figure 2).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 648, 820, the solenoid 651, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

With reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the first embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2), etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a that penetrates in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 5) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Figure 6 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line VI-VI in Figure 2. Figure 6 illustrates the arrangement of the winning slot unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 in the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected in a state in which they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in more detail, the first ball throwing section 942g and the inlet 982d are arranged such that the second protrusion 982d1 formed on the inlet 982d is disposed inside the first recess 942g1 formed on the first ball throwing section 942g. In addition, the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b are arranged such that the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall section 981b is disposed inside the second recess 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing section 942c. This makes it easy to align the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 when assembling them to the base plate 60.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 7(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and Figure 7(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. Figure 8(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and Figure 8(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b). ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on one side of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 through the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the sorting unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 9 to 12. Figure 9(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, and Figure 9(b) is a side view of the sorting unit 980. Figure 10 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and Figure 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980. Figure 12(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line XIIa-XIIa in Figure 9(a), and Figure 12(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line XIIb-XIIb in Figure 12(a).

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the sorting unit 980 has a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a rotating unit between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is formed mainly of a distribution section 983 disposed in a possible state, and a cover member 987 disposed on the back side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. be prepared and formed.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a portion of openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 9(b)), and is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 9(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (in the left-right direction in FIG. 9(b)), and its position in the gravity direction (in the vertical direction in FIG. 9(b)) is approximately the same as that of the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

The intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 also have recessed portions 985f4 formed in a direction that is approximately perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball (the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 985f4 are cutouts for disposing the detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside thereof, and are set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. This allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted and disposed from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE3 disposed in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b that controls the detection device SE3 is disposed on one side.

In this embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of a game ball, five prize balls are paid out and a lottery for the first symbol is executed. In response to this lottery, the third symbol display device 81 displays a variable third symbol.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

In addition, the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, making it easier to utilize the weight of the game ball when sending it to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting caught in the connection between the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are formed so as to be continuous with the spaces of the inlet passages 985e1, 985f1 and the outlet passages 985e3, 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. This makes it possible to prevent the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 in the direction of gravity from becoming large. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear base 985 from becoming large in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and the balls can be passed through the spaces and sent to the passage unit 990.

Opening 985g is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) of opening 985d. Also, like opening 985d, opening 985g is formed with the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) sloping downward toward the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll toward the side opposite the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e is cylindrically protruding from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. The protruding portion 986e also has a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on its axis. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw that passes through the cover member 987 described below is screwed, and the cover member 987 can be fastened and fixed to the back base 985 by screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel the magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution portion 983 described later, making it easier to displace the distribution portion 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protruding part 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on its outer peripheral edge, a first guide wall 981f and a second guide wall 981d protruding toward the rear base 985 side, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side of the bulge portion 982 in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed as a pair in the short side direction with a bulge portion 982 (described later) sandwiched between them. The first guide wall 981f is also formed with the semicircular open portion facing approximately the center of the base plate 981a in the short side direction.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the short direction of the base plate 981a. The second guide wall 981d is also formed below the bulge portion 982 (described later) in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. By doing so, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened together.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 9(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed with dimensions such that the erected tip surface abuts the second ball throwing section 942c of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b is formed so that the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is positioned on one side in the direction of gravity than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling section 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (see FIG. 6).

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulge 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to pass through inside it. It is formed with a ball sending passage TR0 through which the game ball flowing in from the inlet 982d passes, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 that branch off from the ball sending passage TR0. The bulge 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity, an erect wall 982a that is bent toward the rear base 985 side at a roughly central position when viewed from the front, and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at multiple locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inlet 982d also has a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes from the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) opposite the rear base 985. The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recess 942g1 of the prize winning port unit 930 described above, and when the prize winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the first recess 942g1.

In addition, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 9(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inlet 982d on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is set to be greater than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) from the inner edge of the first recess 942g1 to the inner edge of the first ball throwing section 942g on one side in the direction of gravity. This makes it possible for the game ball sent to the first ball throwing section 942g through the first winning opening 64 to be less likely to become pinched between the inlet 982d (bulge 982) and the first ball throwing section 942g as it flows into the inlet 982d.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape with a predetermined distance from the outer edge shape of the bulge portion 982 when viewed from the front. The erected wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the direction of gravity, and is formed with an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the erected direction on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

The vertical wall 982a is spaced from the inner edge of the outer periphery of the bulge 982 by a horizontal distance L16 (see FIG. 12(b)) that is greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed between the opposing walls, allowing the game ball to pass through.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed downstream of the distribution section 983 described below, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are sent to one of them. The distribution section 983 is set up so that game balls flowing into the inlet 982d can be sent alternately to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. This makes it possible to prevent the sending of game balls flowing into the first winning port 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c is formed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the erected wall 982a, protruding in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that axially supports the distribution portion 983 described below, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recesses 982e and 982f are recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the bulge 982. In addition, inside the recesses 982e and 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 is formed as a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

The first branch passage BK1 is connected to the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 is connected to the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d, and allows the game balls to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the second passage TR2, and the game balls that have flowed into the second passage TR2 can also flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is possible to downsize the distribution unit 980. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985. .

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the bulge portion 982, and is extended at an angle toward the rear base 985 toward that side in the direction of gravity. The inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985b and the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 to come into contact with the inclined portion 982b, guiding the flowing game balls toward the openings 985b to 985f and making it easier for them to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are connected to the recesses 982h and 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end faces are inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 9(b)). This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to come into contact with the erected end faces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and be guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, making it easier for them to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 side, and collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game balls to flow through the opening 985e. and can easily flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the distance between the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the slope of the slope portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and durability can be improved.

As described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player through the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) disposed on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are difficult to see from the player side due to the front unit 940. Furthermore, when the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are erected on the front side of the openings 985e and 985f, there is a problem in that the thickness of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 makes it difficult for the player to see the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the erected dimensions of the inclined portion 982b can be made small. Therefore, the game balls sent to the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily seen even when passing through the front unit 940. That is, in this embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned toward the rear base 985 as it moves in the direction in which the game ball flows down, so that the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-to-rear direction can be made thin while ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball, and visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution section 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985, and is formed in a roughly T-shape when viewed from the front. The distribution section 983 is mainly formed with an action section 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from approximately the center position in the extension direction of the action section 983a, a through hole 983c penetrating the connecting portion of the action section 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, a contact section 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall section 983e formed by connecting the action section 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side.

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985 facing each other.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed by extending radially outward from the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotation to one side or the other, the distance L17 (see FIG. 12(b)) from its tip to the inside of the intermediate plate 983b is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This restricts the throw of the game ball to one side or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b can be switched from a state in which the throw of the game ball is restricted to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state in which the throw of the game ball is restricted to the other side of the second passage TR2 by rotating the distribution portion 983 around the through hole 983c.

The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the abutment portion 983d is set to one side in the direction of gravity (lower in the direction of gravity) than the connection position with the abutment portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution portion 983 through the inlet 982d is placed in a state in which a load is applied to the action portion 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at a radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical shape inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from getting out of it. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of magnetic body 988b and magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. This prevents the game ball sent inside the sorting unit 980 from being magnetically attracted to magnetic body 988b and magnetic body 988c and from stagnating inside the sorting unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from above, and is disposed on the opposite side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985 from the front base 981. The cover member 987 is also formed with two recesses, a first recess 987a and a second recess 987b, which are recessed side by side in the direction of gravity and have a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b has a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface of the recess for fastening to the rear base 985. The inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recess 987b is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. This allows the cover member 987 to be positioned by accommodating the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e through the through hole 987b1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. 13(a) and 13(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range XIIIa of FIG. 12(b). In addition, below, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from the state which regulates the throwing of a game ball to one side of 1st path|passage TR1 to the state which restricts the throwing of a game ball to the other side of 2nd path|passage TR2. Only the case will be explained, and a description of the case where the throwing of the game ball from the state of regulating the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 to the one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball contacts the action section 983a), as described above, the game ball is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 10), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2 side. Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 13(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first path TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c as an axis, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side. The amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side abutting against the abutment portion 982a1 of the front base 981. In this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c acts toward the second passage TR2 side to a state in which the magnetic body 988c acts toward the first passage TR1 side.

The distribution unit 983 can therefore use the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c to rotate around the through hole 983c. In addition, because the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c changes, the distribution unit 983 can maintain the rotated state. Therefore, each time a game ball is sent, the distribution unit 983 can send the game balls one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 by changing the tilt direction of the intermediate plate 983b.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. 15 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 side, and a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. A second insertion hole 991b that is formed through the second insertion hole 991b (side), a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d that are formed on both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in front view. It is formed mainly by having a plurality of circular through holes 991f formed therethrough.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. This allows the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b to roll toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985e of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

The third insertion hole 991c also has recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both horizontal sides on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 991c1 are portions that house the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed with dimensions that are approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991c1, and also prevents the detection device SE3 from being improperly operated from the outside when combined with the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

Furthermore, when combining the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. This prevents a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding outward, and allows the overall size of the ball throwing unit 970 to be reduced.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2, and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 14(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, with the width dimension in the short direction set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985f of the distribution unit 980 is connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and pass through the opening 985f to be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991d2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 14(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a roughly T-shaped plate with the top and bottom reversed when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with a fifth insertion hole 992b penetrating to the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating to one side in the direction of gravity of the fifth insertion hole 992b (lower side in the direction of gravity), and an erected wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The fifth insertion hole 992b is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the fifth insertion hole 992b is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. This allows a game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 to be received in the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 992b can be rolled toward the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 14(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude from both horizontal sides of the upright wall 992a in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the protruding wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a position where its internal space communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. This allows a game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 to be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

A guide wall 992c1 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c, facing the third passage member 993. The guide wall 992c1 is formed of a first wall portion 992c2 that stands on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) and a second wall portion 992c3 that is connected to the end of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extension direction and extends in the direction of gravity.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces that determine the position of the detection device SE4, and the dimension between the erected wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing portions of the detection device SE4.

The detection device SE4 is also positioned at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular projection 992f that projects toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 14(a)). The annular projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and thereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and pass through the opening 985d to be received by the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. This allows the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a to roll toward the second passage member 992.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and pass through the opening 985g to be received by the second insertion hole 991b.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. This allows the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b to roll toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. It mainly includes an erected wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Moreover, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992. The guide wall 993b is also formed such that the inner surface of one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (downward inclined toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992). This allows the game ball sent to the seventh insertion hole 993a to roll toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992 (the right side in Figure 14 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 14(b)) of the erected wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 14(b)) of the third passage member 993 is open, so that the third passage member 993 can be disposed closer to the erected wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the above-mentioned sorting unit 980 can be brought closer to each other, and the external dimensions of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

The standing wall 993e is such that when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 is equal to the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the shorter side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of SE1a. This allows positioning of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 that is equal to the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distributing unit 980) can be replaced with another unit and a different unit can be installed, the game that flows down the game area can be A different game format can be played without affecting the flow of the ball.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 to 69. In the first embodiment, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the sorting unit 980 are formed as passages that guide the balls backward without allowing them to return forward. However, the sorting unit 300 of the second embodiment is configured to allow the balls to return forward. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 17 to 35, and then the configuration of the operation unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 36 to 69.

FIG. 17 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17, an internal opening is formed in the center frame 86 disposed inside the game board 13, and the player can visually recognize the operating unit 500 through the internal opening of the center frame 86. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, so that the operating unit 500 can be viewed through the base plate 60 located outside the center frame 86, rather than being limited to viewing through the internal opening of the center frame 86.

Figure 18 is a front view of the game board 13, Figure 19 is a rear view of the game board 13, Figure 20 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 21 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Figure 18 also shows the windmill FS1 and nail KG1, which were omitted in Figure 2.

As described below, this embodiment is provided with an upper connecting member 270 that replaces the nail's function of redirecting the ball's flow path, and nails KG1 are not placed in the area where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged.

This makes it possible to prevent the non-transparency of the nail KG1 from acting as a drawback. In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the upper position of the center frame 86 where the upper connecting member 270 is disposed (a position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62), it is possible to prevent light passing through the upper position of the center frame 86 from being reflected in various directions or blocked by the nail KG1, thereby improving the visibility of the light presentation at the upper position of the center frame 86. The manner in which the light presentation is performed at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

In FIG. 19, the shape of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is recessed upward at the left-right center position, and the electrical connection board 251 connected to the illumination board 251 disposed in the recessed portion is shown. A sensor cover 254 is shown that is also used to hold wiring DH1.

As shown in FIG. 19, at a position below the center frame 86, a collecting gutter 480 that forms a path for balls entering the general winning opening 63 to flow down is fastened to the back side of the base plate 60, and a wide decorative member 490 that is disposed above the collecting gutter 480 and is shaped to straddle the rear side of the first winning opening 64.

The collecting gutter 480 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. This prevents the collecting gutter 480 from blocking the light entering from the rear side. It also improves the visibility of the balls that enter the general winning opening 63 and flow down the collecting gutter 480 when viewed from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed from a colored transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. This allows the wide decorative member 490 to stand out to the player who views the gaming area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 has fastening screw insertion holes 491 at the left and right ends. A fastening screw that is screwed into the collecting gutter 480 is inserted into the insertion hole 491, and the wide decorative member 490 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 480 by the fastening screw. This makes it possible to connect attention to the wide decorative member 490 to attention to the ball flowing down the collecting gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 is provided with a pair of left and right inclined forming sections 492 formed at the same inclination angle as the plate-shaped section (ceiling plate section 455) that rolls the balls above the general winning opening 63, behind the plate-shaped section, and a central forming section 493 that extends in the left and right directions on the left and right inner sides of the inclined forming sections 492.

The slope forming part 492 is arranged so that the upper surface of the member is along the plate-like part (ceiling plate part 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning hole 63 when viewed from the front. Therefore, even if the plate-like part on which the ball rolls is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, the ball can appear to be rolling on the slope forming part 492 when viewed from the front, and the ball can be rolled on the slope forming part 492. This makes it easier to understand the flow path.

The central forming portion 493 constitutes the ceiling of the flow path (the inclined extension portion 315 described later) of the ball that enters the first winning opening 64. This prevents the ball from falling off the flow path, and even if the flow path of the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, the central forming portion 493 made of a colored and transparent resin material makes it easier to grasp the flow path of the ball when viewed from the front.

Figure 20 shows resin components such as the upper connecting member 270, which has a portion that protrudes into the play area and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the winning port component 400, located above and below the center frame 86. These resin components have the effect of stably maintaining the flow of the balls, and will be described in detail later. Note that the nail KG1 and the windmill FS1 are omitted from Figure 20.

To give an overview first, a common effect of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the winning hole forming member 400 is that they are easy to repair when cracked or chipped. This effect is not achieved when using commonly used metal nails.

In the case of nails planted in the base plate 60, there is a possibility that the nails will bend or break if a ball collides with them or if an operator accidentally overloads the nails. If it is bent, it may be possible to restore it to its original shape by bending it the same amount to the opposite side, but if it is bent, it is difficult to restore it to its original shape.

To begin with, nails are driven into the base board 60 using an automatic machine, and the general method is to drive the nails into the entire game board all at once, rather than driving them one by one. Therefore, even if only one nail is broken, it is difficult to re-drive the broken nail when other nails are already installed, and the entire base board 60 needs to be replaced. there is a possibility.

In this case, since the rails 61, 62 and the outer edge member 73 are attached to the base plate 60, it is necessary to either reattach these attached members to the new base plate 60 or replace these members altogether, which can easily result in high repair costs.

On the other hand, if a part of the resin member such as the upper connecting member 270 or the winning opening component member 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing it with a new member, and the base plate 60 can be replaced. There's no need to. In addition, since the resin members are independent from the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc., there are no costs associated with the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. when replacing the resin members, so repair costs can be suppressed.

In Figure 21, the illumination board 251 and board holding plate 252, which are placed on the top of the center frame 86, are shown to be positioned so that the board holding plate 252 fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the illumination board 251, which is placed in front of the board holding plate 252, is positioned so that it fits within the inner position of the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, but details will be given later.

As shown in FIG. 21, the base plate 60 has a plurality of fitting portions 60c formed as cylindrical protrusions whose outer shape tapers from the rear surface of the plate toward the rear surface side. The fitting portions 60c have female threads formed on the inner diameter side, and function as portions into which fastening screws are screwed when fastening the operating unit 500 to the base plate 60.

Figure 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in Figures 22 and 23, the game board 13 comprises a base plate 60, a central component unit 240 that is disposed inside the base plate 60 and has a center frame 86, an upper connecting member 270 that connects the upper portion of the central component unit 240 to the base plate 60 and limits the flow direction of balls flowing down the play area, and a thin plate member 290 that is disposed between the upper connecting member 270 and the central component unit 240.

The details of the central component unit 240 will be described later, but as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 22, the central component unit 240 is formed with a fixing portion 244 used for positioning and fixing the thin plate member 290.

Figure 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central component unit 240, and Figure 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central component unit 240. The central component unit 240 is a unit that is assembled into a ring shape when placed in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, and has a center frame 86 that guides the balls as they flow down.

The central structural unit 240 includes an upper structural member 241 that forms the upper side of the center frame 86 and a lower structural member 261 that forms the lower side of the center frame 86 . The upper component 241 and the lower component 261 are made of a light-transmissive resin material and constitute the upper and lower halves of a ring shape, respectively, so that they surround the third symbol display device when viewed from the front in the assembled state (see FIG. 18). A center frame 86 is configured.

In this way, by configuring the center frame 86 in a ring shape by combining multiple members instead of configuring it in a ring shape as a single item, it is possible to reduce the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member. . Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the resin mold can be suppressed.

For example, the shape of the upper edge of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is not a shape recessed upward in the left and right center portions corresponding to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 as in the present embodiment, but a substantially arc shape. When changing the design of the base plate 60 such that As for the component 261), a member designed in accordance with this embodiment can be used.

This eliminates the need to manufacture a new large mold that encompasses the entire center frame 86 when making minor changes such as changing the design of the base plate 60 or changing the shape of the center frame 86 to alter its appearance, thereby reducing mold costs.

The upper component member 241 includes a thin plate portion 242 that is arranged flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-like extension extending from the front side of the thin plate portion 242, so that the glass is not exposed during the game. A band-shaped frame portion 245 is formed with dimensions that do not allow balls to pass between it and the unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and is formed to be able to guide the flow of the ball, and a band-shaped frame portion 245 is arranged below and on the left and right inner sides of the band-shaped frame portion 245. A decorative portion 247 is provided to form a substantially arc shape.

The thin plate portion 242 is used for positioning and fixing the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and the extending portion 243 that extends to the back side for reinforcement at the left and right and upper edges. A fixing portion 244 is provided.

The extension portion 243 is designed so that its front-to-rear width is approximately the same as the thickness of the base plate 60. In other words, the front-to-rear thickness of the thin plate portion 242, which has a shorter front-to-rear width than the extension portion 243, is designed to be thinner than the thickness of the base plate 60. This makes it easier to secure space on the back side of the thin plate portion 242.

The fixing part 244 includes a recessed part 244a that is recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23), and a recessed part 244a that is disposed close to the recessed part 244a and protrudes from the front side. A protruding portion 244b and a fastening portion 244c into which a fastening screw inserted into the upper connecting member 271 from the front side is screwed are provided at symmetrical positions.

The thin plate portion 242 is arranged flush with the base plate 60, and the protruding portion 244b can be formed from any position on the front side. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the positioning with respect to the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) can be improved. The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing part 244 will be described later.

The decorative portion 247 is formed with multiple three-dimensional patterns and figures, and is formed to have lower light transmittance than the thin plate portion 242. This allows the decorative portion 247 to be used as a portion that divides the field of view while still retaining some light transmittance.

So far, the configuration of the front side of the upper component 241 has been mainly described. Next, the configuration arranged on the back side of the upper component 241 will be described. The upper component 241 includes an illumination board 251 fastened to a fastening portion formed on the back side of the thin plate portion 242, a board holding plate 252 fastened together with the fastening screw that fastens the illumination board 251, a dish-shaped member 253 that is sandwiched between the illumination board 251 and the thin plate portion 242 and is formed into a dish shape that flares out toward the front side, and a sensor cover 254 that is fastened to a position on the back side of the decorative portion 247 on one of the left and right sides (the right side in this embodiment) of the upper component 241.

The board holding plate 252 is not symmetrical, and the lower right portion is omitted compared to the left side. This makes it easier to connect the electrical wiring DH1 (see Figure 19) that is passed through from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the illumination board 251 is located on the back surface of the board at the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed to make it easy to connect the electrical wiring DH1 to this position.

Further, the substrate holding plate 252 includes a concave portion 252a formed in a curved shape convex upward at the left and right center position. The recessed portion 252a is a portion formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the operating unit 500, and details will be described later.

The sensor cover 254 has a capacitance sensor (for example, a sensor that can detect that a player has placed his/her hand over the front side of the glass unit 16) disposed therein, and a fixing device for fixing the capacitance sensor. It is a member. In this embodiment, it is used not only for fixing the capacitance sensor but also as a relay part for the electrical wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251.

That is, by fixing the electrical wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the illumination board 251 with a binding band or the like, the electrical wiring DH1 can be held at the rear position of the decorative portion 247. Thereby, the electric wiring DH1 can be hidden from the player's view. In this way, by using the sensor cover 254 to maintain the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, the number of assembly steps can be reduced compared to the case where a dedicated member for maintaining the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 is prepared. Material costs can be reduced.

The lower component 261 includes a thin plate portion 262 that is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-shaped extension portion 263 that extends in a strip shape from the thin plate portion 262 to the back side. , a back cover part 264 that is fastened and fixed to a fastening part formed at the extending end of the band-shaped extension part 263 and covers the back side of the band-shaped extension part 263; A pair of left and right channel front configuration parts 265 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the lower end and constitute a flow path for the balls to flow to the back side between the thin plate part 262 and the back side of the left and right lower ends of the thin plate part 262. A pair of left and right flow channels that are fastened and fixed to the flow channel front structure section 265 and protrude left and right inward from the thin plate section 262 of the channel front structure section 265 to form a flow path that guides the ball to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension section 263. A rear configuration section 266 is provided.

The band-shaped extension portion 263 has an upper surface portion that slopes downward toward the left and right center portions, and functions to return the rolled ball to the front side of the base plate 60. At the left and right center portions of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, there is a center back slope portion 263a that slopes downward toward the back side so that the ball with a reduced speed in the left and right direction can easily flow to the back side, and on both left and right sides of the center back slope portion 263a. A pair of left and right front inclined parts 263b are arranged slightly below the central rear inclined part 263a and are inclined downwardly toward the front so that the ball whose speed in the left and right direction has settled can easily flow to the front side, and a rear side is formed by the central rear inclined part 263a. A ball discharge hole 263c is formed through the base plate 60 so that the ball guided to the front side of the back covering part 264 after flowing down to the side can be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60.

In relation to the band-like extending portion 263, the back covering portion 264 basically closes the ball to prevent it from falling off from the back end of the band-like extending portion 263; In this case, a gap is formed between the ball and the belt-shaped extending portion 263 to allow the ball to flow downward. The ball guided to the front side through this gap is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

Since the ball ejection hole 263c is arranged at the center position on the left and right, and the first prize opening 64 is arranged below it (see FIG. 18), the balls ejected from the ball ejection hole 263c have a high probability of being hit by a nail. The ball enters the first winning hole 64 with a higher probability than the ball approaching the first winning hole 64 while being bounced by KG1. Therefore, when a ball is guided by the belt-shaped extension portion 263, attention to the ball can be improved.

The channel front structure section 265 forms a guide path that guides the ball flowing down the front side of the thin plate section 262 to the back side, and the channel rear structure section 266 forms the rear end surface of the guide path to guide the ball. is guided to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263. In other words, the channel front configuration section 265 and the channel rear configuration section 266 form a tunnel-shaped section that discharges the balls that have flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension section 263 .

Referring back to Figures 22 and 23, the upper connecting member 270 is a member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a thin plate-like portion 271, protruding portions 272-277 that protrude from the plate-like portion 271 as if being pushed out from the rear side to the front side, a thin portion 278 formed partially thin on the rear side of the plate-like portion 271, and a protruding portion 279 formed on the thin portion 278 so as to protrude toward the rear side.

The plate-like portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical arch shape that is long in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion follows the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86 . In addition, the upper edge of the plate-shaped portion 271 is curved, and in detail, the tangent at a specific point on the upper edge of the plate-shaped portion 271 is the outer rail disposed close to the specific point. The shape is parallel to the tangent line of the corresponding point of 62.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 are spaced apart from each other by approximately the diameter of a ball (game ball) (see FIG. 18). This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 collides with the plate-shaped portion 271 and its momentum is attenuated.

That is, the ball introduced into the play area is configured to leave the outer rail 62 before colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271. In other words, as long as the ball is in contact with the outer rail 62, it will not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271, so it is possible to prevent a ball launched with maximum launch strength (for example, a ball that rolls in contact with the outer rail 62 until it collides with the return rubber 69) from colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271 and losing momentum.

Thereby, unnecessary attenuation of the ball can be avoided, and it is also possible to avoid cracking or chipping of the plate-like part 271 due to a ball with the maximum firing strength colliding with the plate-like part 271.

Note that the distance between the outer rail 62 and the plate-like portion 271 is not limited to a distance approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere, and various forms may be exemplified. For example, considering the shape of the sphere, the interval may be changed in the front-rear direction (the interval becomes wider as the distance from the base plate 60 increases) so as to avoid collision between the sphere and the plate-like portion 271. In this case, since the distance between the plate-shaped portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side closer to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, when decoration is applied to the plate-shaped portion 271, the formation area of the decoration can be expanded. .

The overhanging parts 272 to 277 have a symmetrical shape with respect to the left-right center of the plate-like part 271 from positions that are symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the plate-like part 271, and extend from the back side of the plate-like part 271 to the front. These are the parts that extend out to the sides, and each one replaces the function of a nail.

From the left and right center, they will be described as the first overhang portion 272, the second overhang portion 273, the third overhang portion 274, the fourth overhang portion 275, the fifth overhang portion 276, and the sixth overhang portion 277.

The first protrusion 272 and the second protrusion 273 are arranged in front of the central component unit 240 via the thin plate member 290. The third protrusion 274 is arranged to straddle the central component unit 240 and the base plate 60. The fourth protrusion 275, the fifth protrusion 276, and the sixth protrusion 277 are arranged in front of the base plate 60.

As such, each of the protrusions 272 to 277 differs in which component it is placed on in front of, which may result in differences in function and design concept, but more details will be given later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion that is formed thinly by shifting the back surface of the plate toward the front side by the thickness of the thin plate member 290 or an amount slightly exceeding the thickness in order to arrange the thin plate member 290. In this embodiment, instead of a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by applying a pressing force to the thin plate member 290 from the thin portion 278, a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by the fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 22) is adopted. are doing.

The offset dimension of the back surface of the plate toward the front side in the thin portion 278 is not limited to being greater than or equal to the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the offset dimension of the back surface of the plate toward the front side may be designed to be less than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the thin plate member 290 is formed to be expandable (compressible) in the thickness direction, which makes it easier to fix the position of the thin plate member 290 while avoiding excessive pressure being applied to the thin plate member 290.

Also, for example, the shift of the back surface of the thin portion 278 toward the front side may be reduced only in the portion corresponding to the edge of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the range in which pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge of the thin plate member 290.

The protruding portion 279 is a portion that is inserted into a positioning hole 291 drilled in the thin plate member 290, and is a protruding portion for positioning the thin plate member 290. Because a recess (depression) corresponding to the shape of the protruding portion 272, 273 is formed on the back side of the position of the first protruding portion 272 or the second protruding portion 273 in the thin portion 278, the protruding portion 279 cannot be protruded from this position. In other words, the protruding portion 279 protrudes from a position of the thin portion 278 that avoids the position of the first protruding portion 272 or the second protruding portion 273.

The thin plate member 290 is a member formed in a thin plate (sheet) shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a number of positioning holes 291 drilled for positioning during assembly, and a number of insertion holes 292 drilled as holes for inserting fastening screws that fasten the upper connecting member 270 to the central structural unit 240.

The positioning holes 291 include a hole 291a that is drilled on the left and right outer sides and through which the protrusion 244b of the central component unit 240 is inserted, and a hole 291b that is drilled on the left and right inner side and through which the protrusion 279 of the upper connecting member 270 is inserted. , is provided. That is, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning with both the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270.

In this embodiment, the left and right outer sides refer to the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the left and right inner sides refer to the left and right central sides of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the protruding portion 244b is formed at a position facing the recessed portion on the back side of the second projecting portion 273. As shown in FIGS. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the protruding portion 244b is hidden by the second protruding portion 273. Thereby, the protrusion 244b can position the thin plate member 290 (position stabilizing) while reducing the visibility of the protrusion 244b.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, by forming the portion of the upper connecting member 270 as a protrusion 279 rather than a hole, a positioning portion can be formed without any problems even in the narrow area of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273. In other words, when forming a through hole or recess in a narrow area, the thickness of the member may become excessively thin, resulting in insufficient strength, but this situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily avoid restricting the positioning of the overhanging portions 272, 273 and reducing their strength due to the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290. That is, when forming a positioning hole at the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272, 273, it is necessary to make the width of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272, 273 equal to or greater than the width of the hole (or equal to or greater than the diameter if the hole is circular), and there is a possibility that the strength of the overhanging portions 272, 273 will be reduced due to the amount of material removed by the hole. However, according to this embodiment, these problems can be easily solved.

On the other hand, as described above, since the back surfaces of the projecting parts 272 and 273 are recessed, the projecting part 279 cannot be formed; however, as shown in FIG. This can be achieved by protruding the protruding parts 244b, so the positioning portions of the thin plate member 290 (protruding parts 244b, 279) can be arranged without being restricted by the arrangement of the protruding parts 272, 273. .

In this way, according to this embodiment, by forming the protrusions 244b, 279 for positioning the thin plate member 290 on both the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, it is possible to avoid restricting the placement of the positioning parts of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining a high degree of design freedom and strength of the upper connecting member 270, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the position of the thin plate member 290.

Furthermore, the protrusion 279 inserted into the thin plate member 290 is designed to be insertable into the recessed portion 244a of the central component unit 240, so that the thin plate member 290 can be positioned relative to the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270 while simultaneously positioning the upper connecting member 270 relative to the central component unit 240.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that can be seen by the player via the upper connecting member 270. Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters are painted on the front of the thin plate member 290, and the colors and brightness seen through the thin plate member 290 change in various ways depending on the differences in the emission modes of the light (differences in color and brightness) emitted by the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 251 of the central component unit 240.

Unlike the case where a pattern, figure, character, or character is drawn directly on the base board 60, according to this embodiment, if the thin plate member 290 is removed, the pattern, figure, character, or character drawn on the thin plate member 290 can be removed from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when changing the gameplay characteristics (so-called different specifications) while keeping the same shape of the game board 13, the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the game board 13, or the colors, etc. may be changed to make it easier for the player to understand the gameplay.

If patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, it will be necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, which essentially means replacing the entire game board 13, which can easily increase costs when changing gameplay.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 with a different drawn pattern, figure, character, character, color, etc., so there is no need to replace the entire game board 13. None. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the gameplay.

Figure 26 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXVI of Figure 18, Figure 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVII-XXVII of Figure 26, and Figure 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII of Figure 26.

As shown in FIG. 26, while the projections 272-277 are each formed with a different shape, they all share the common purpose of slowing down the momentum of a ball introduced into the play area and causing the ball to flow down to the left or right side of the center frame 86 when it collides with the ball.

The extensions 272-277 are formed as replacements for nails that have traditionally been installed in a similar arrangement. That is, each extension 272-277 is designed to surround the multiple nails that are installed when viewed from the front.

As can be seen in common among the first overhang portion 272, the second overhang portion 273, and the third overhang portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other side surfaces. This allows the ball to flow in the same direction along the slope of the upper surface, regardless of the position on the upper surface. As a result, even if the adjustment of the firing force is slightly off, the ball can be easily flowed down a similar path, and the stress of the player who wants the ball to flow down a similar path can be alleviated during the game.

Since the third projecting portion 274 and the fourth projecting portion 275 are arranged adjacent to each other, a slight deviation in the adjustment of the ball's launch force will change which direction the ball will reach. The slope of the upper surface is significantly different. That is, the upper surface of the third projecting portion 274 is a descending slope that gently slopes toward the left and right inwards, whereas the upper surface of the fourth projecting portion 275 slopes sharply toward the left and right inward. It is formed as a descending slope.

As a result, balls that reach the upper surface of the fourth protrusion 275 and flow down will bounce upwards when they collide with the center frame 86, and will likely lose momentum. As a result, they will tend to flow down toward the outlet 71 or toward the general winning opening 63 without reaching the first winning opening 64 downstream of the play area.

On the other hand, the ball that reaches the upper side of the third projecting portion 274 and flows down collides with the center frame 86 in the left and right directions, and the load in the rebound direction can also be used as the momentum of the ball to flow down, so that the ball flows down the downstream side of the gaming area. It is easy to reach the first prize opening 64.

In other words, the shapes of the protrusions 272-276 are designed so that the way the ball flows downstream of the play area changes depending on which of the protrusions 272-276 the ball reaches. This allows players to be proactive in adjusting the force with which they launch the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the base plate 60 and the extension portion 243 of the central component unit 240 are spaced apart from each other with gaps CL1 and CL2 approximately equal to the thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240. It is designed to be placed in

That is, the design concept is not that the central component unit 240 is positioned in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but rather a gap is left between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central component unit 240, and the upper connecting member 270 is It is designed based on the design concept of simultaneously aligning the central component unit 240 with respect to the base plate 60 when fastening and fixing (connecting).

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the thin plate member 290 and the central component unit 240 are arranged on the back side of the first overhang part 272, while the base plate 60 is placed on the back side of the third overhang part 274. is placed. In this way, the members arranged on the back surfaces of the overhanging parts 272 to 277 are not all the same and may be different.

As shown in FIG. 27, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 is formed with a thin wall, for example, when a load is applied to the first overhang portion 272, the first overhang portion 272 undergoes bending deformation. In this case, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 can also be flexibly deformed, the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 can be absorbed. Thereby, the possibility that the first projecting portion 272 will be broken or chipped can be reduced.

Therefore, for example, when a ball collides with the first projecting portion 272, even if the force of the ball is very large, the first projecting portion 272 may be bent and deformed, and a thin plate portion caused by the bending deformation may be caused. The deflection of the ball 242 can sufficiently reduce the momentum of the ball, so that the ball can flow down after colliding with the first projecting portion 272.

As described above, the thin plate portion 242 is more likely to flex due to the adoption of a configuration in which gaps CL1 and CL2 are provided between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, rather than a configuration in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are fitted together. In other words, in this embodiment, by providing gaps CL1 and CL2 between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, the central structural unit 240 is flexibly deformed, thereby dissipating the load applied to the first protrusion portion 272.

A similar effect can be expected for the second protrusion 273. Note that the load applied to the first protrusion 272 may be a load caused by the collision of game balls, a load applied by a game machine store employee when clearing a ball jam in the game area, or a load applied by a worker performing maintenance work.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the base plate 60 is formed thick enough that it does not deflect. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the third overhang 274, it is not possible to expect the base plate 60 to deflect and dissipate the load. However, since the height position of the third overhang 274 is lower than the overhangs 272 and 273, the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small. Therefore, even if the third overhang 274 is disposed in front of the base plate 60, the possibility of the third overhang 274 cracking or chipping can be reduced.

Furthermore, if the momentum of the ball that collides with the third overhang 274 is excessively reduced at a location where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the ball may stop flowing down, so this book has been In the embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the third projecting portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60.

In addition, since the third protrusion 274 is prevented from bending and is in a stable state, the ball can be guided more stably in the left and right areas and the lower area of the center frame 86, which are the play areas where the nails are planted, and the ball can be guided more stably. This makes it possible to stabilize the correspondence between the ball's launch strength and the way the ball flows down.

To reliably prevent the third overhang 274 from cracking or chipping, it is preferable to design the impact angle with the ball and the shape of the third overhang 274 so that the load applied to the third overhang 274 is small (so that the load can be easily dissipated). It is preferable to adopt a similar design concept for the fourth overhang 275 to the sixth overhang 277.

The advantages of using the protrusions 272-277 as substitutes for the nails KG1 that are planted in the base plate 60 are explained below. In particular, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. That is, in the case of the protrusions 272-277 that are made of a light-transmitting resin material, there are fewer areas that are hidden from the player compared to the nails KG1 that are made of metal.

For example, even in a configuration in which the illumination board 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the back side of the protruding portions 272, 273 as in this embodiment (see FIG. 27), the protruding portions 272, 273 transmit light, making it easier for the player to see the light emitted from the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 251, and the patterns, figures, letters, or characters drawn on the thin plate member 290.

The illumination board 251 is equipped with a central light-emitting means 251b consisting of four LEDs located in the center of the lower part, a surrounding light-emitting means 251c consisting of seven LEDs arranged to surround the left, right and top of the central light-emitting means 251b, and a distant light-emitting means 251d consisting of two LEDs arranged near each of the left and right ends, and the arrangement in this embodiment is shown by hidden lines in Figure 26. The light-emitting means 251b, 251c, 251d do not necessarily have the same direction of light irradiation, and each is intended to illuminate a different target.

The central light emitting means 251b emits light in the front direction (the optical axis is in the front-rear direction), and illuminates the symbol mark (shown in white in FIG. 26) at the left and right center portions of the decorative portion 247 of the central component unit 240. In order to cause the entire symbol mark to emit faint light, it is designed so that the width angle of the light emitted from the central light emitting means 251b in the irradiation direction with respect to the optical axis is large.

The surrounding light emitting means 251c is positioned so that the light irradiation direction is forward (the optical axis is in the front-to-rear direction) and introduces light to parts that have width in the front-to-rear direction, such as the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the edges of the protrusions 272 and 273. In order to ensure that the light perceived by the player does not become weak after passing through a part with a long width in the front-to-rear direction, the width angle of the irradiation direction based on the optical axis of the light irradiated from the surrounding light emitting means 251c is designed to be small in order to concentrate the energy of the light on the optical axis.

This allows the light path (the path of light passing through the belt-shaped frame portion 245 and the protruding portions 272, 273) to be directly highlighted by changing the brightness and color of the light, and allows for a performance that differentiates how the light is highlighted. For example, by creating a difference in brightness between the left and right, it is possible to create a lighting performance that implicitly suggests the direction in which the ball will be launched.

For example, the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c, which is disposed behind the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272, is positioned to guide light from the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272 to the left and right outer edges 272b. This allows the player to easily shoot a ball using the light of the first overhang 272 as a marker to make the ball reach the left and right outer edges 272b of the first overhang 272. The optical axis of the light passes through a position where the front-to-back width of the first overhang 272 is long, making it easier for the light to be totally reflected inside the first overhang 272.

In addition, the internal shape of the first protrusion 272 is curved so that the rear end protrudes inward, so that light that travels inside the first protrusion 272 is repeatedly reflected inside the first protrusion 272, making it easier to collect the light inside the first protrusion 272. This makes it possible to make the first protrusion 272 emit light brighter than the surrounding area when viewed from the front.

As illustrated in FIG. 27, an illumination board 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240. In this embodiment, on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the ball is guided on the front side, the thickness of the thick part of the base plate 60 (thick part required for driving the nail KG1) is within the thickness dimension (in the front-back direction). The illumination board 251 is arranged within the dimensions. That is, the front and rear positions of the illumination board 251 are set closer to the front side than the front and rear positions of the back surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60.

This is an impossible board arrangement insofar as nails KG1 as parts for guiding the ball are driven into the base plate 60. In other words, in the range where the nail KG1 is driven, the base plate 60 must be formed sufficiently thick, so that It is not possible to secure a space for arranging the illumination board 251 on the front side).

In contrast, in this embodiment, a thin upper connecting member 270 is used instead of the nail KG1 as the part for guiding the ball, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is placed on its back surface, and the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240 is placed in place of the base plate 60, ensuring space for placing the illumination board 251 on the back side of the area where the ball is guided.

This allows for greater design freedom in the placement of the illumination board 251 compared to when the illumination board 251 must be placed on the back side of the base plate 60, and also allows the illumination board 251 to be placed closer to the front.

By shifting the arrangement of the illumination board 251 toward the front side, it is possible to easily shift the arrangement of the rotation performance device 800 (see FIG. 17) of the operation unit 500 disposed on the back side of the game board 13 toward the front side, and also Since the central light emitting means 251b and the surrounding light emitting means 251c arranged on the decorative board 251 and the light sources arranged on the rotating production device 800 are arranged on the front side, the light that is visible to the player can be made brighter. can do.

The far-field light emitting means 251d is arranged so that the light irradiation direction (optical axis direction) intersects with the front-rear direction (the direction shown by the arrow in FIG. 26), and irradiates light onto the extensions 274-276 arranged on the left and right outer sides, the belt-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, etc.

As a result, even with a configuration like the present embodiment in which a thick portion of the base plate 60 is formed to ensure strength and overhanging portions 274 to 276 are arranged in front of the thick portion, it is possible to achieve long-distance light emission. The overhangs 274 to 276 can be sufficiently illuminated using the light irradiation from the means 251d.

In particular, in this embodiment, the illumination board 251 is positioned closer to the front end than the rear end of the base plate 60 (arranged within the plate thickness dimension), making it easier for the light emitted from the distant light emitting means 251d in a direction intersecting the front-to-rear direction to reach the fifth protrusion 276 located on the left and right outer sides.

The shapes of the overhanging parts 274 to 276 that receive light from the far-field light emitting means 251d are devised so that the amount of light can be easily ensured. That is, for example, in the third projecting portion 274, a side surface 274a (left and right inner and upper side surfaces) on the side of the far light emitting means 251d is formed to be wide, and is formed to receive light from the far light emitting means 251d on the surface. .

In addition, on the opposite side (the outer left and right sides and the lower side) of the far-field light emitting means 251d, a corner 274b is formed at the joining position between the faces, and the cut formed in the protruding portion 274 is formed in a shape that concentrates light at this corner 274b. This makes it possible to ensure the light emission intensity even at the corner 274b that is far from the far-field light emitting means 251d.

The sixth protrusion 277 is illuminated not by light from the illumination board 251, but by light that passes through the thin plate sections 242 (thin plate sections 242 on the outer left and right, not the center left and right) located on the inner left and right sides of the sixth protrusion 277 when viewed from the front, toward the front side.

The illumination effect of the sixth protrusion 277 is also achieved by the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800, which will be described later. The configuration for directing the light emitted from the rotating member 810 toward the front side and the settings for the intensity of the light will be described later.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 20. As shown in FIG. 20, the winning holes 63, 64, etc. arranged below the center frame 86 are formed as part of a winning hole forming member 400 made of a light-transmissive resin material.

FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIGS. 29 and 30, a state in which the winning a prize opening constituent member 400 is disassembled is illustrated.

The winning opening component 400 includes a central component 410 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 at the left and right center portions of the game board 13, and a covering member 430 configured to cover the lower part of the central component 410 from the front side. a left component member 450 that is arranged on the left side of the central component member 410 and fastened to the base plate 60; a right component member 470 that is arranged on the right side of the central component member 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60; Equipped with. Note that the right component 470 is formed to have a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape with the left component 450.

The central component 410 includes a flat main body plate 411 that is fastened and fixed in surface contact with the base plate 60, a horizontally long opening 412 that is formed as an opening that constitutes the specific winning opening 65a, and the horizontally long opening. A pair of left and right distribution parts 413 are formed on the left and right side parts of 412 so as to be able to distribute the falling paths of the balls upwardly, and the upper side surface is formed in a curved plate shape above the distribution parts 413. A pair of left and right curved protrusions 414 protrude toward the front side so as to distribute the falling path of the balls, and a pair of curved protrusions 414 large enough to discharge the balls to positions spaced outward from the left and right ends of the oblong opening 412. A pair of left and right outlet ports 415 are provided.

The main body plate portion 411 includes seat placement recesses 411a that are recessed from the back side on both left and right sides so as to reduce the plate thickness. The seat arrangement recess 411a is recessed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the production sheet member (thin plate member 380), and is formed with a recess depth that is approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

The gap between the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. This allows the ball to flow down through the gap between the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414, increasing the randomness of the ball's flow and improving attention to the ball.

The distribution section 413 has multiple ridges 413a protruding from the left and right inner side (the second winning opening 140 side). The ridges 413a are shaped to slow down the speed at which the balls flow down by contacting them, and the deceleration effect of the ridges 413a can reduce the impact force applied from the balls to the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. This can prevent damage to the opening/closing plate 65b.

The tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 31) of the curved surface that passes through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved protrusion 414 is designed to pass through the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces on the first winning opening 64 side) of the distribution section 413. Therefore, it is easy for a ball that has rolled down the curved surface of the curved protrusion 414 to the lower end to reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution section 413.

The covering member 430 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body plate 431 formed in a thin plate shape, a pair of left and right belt-shaped portions 432 extending from the left and right side ends of the main body plate 431 toward the left and right inner parts toward the rear side in a belt shape, a pair of left and right vertical plate portions 433 connected to the left and right inner ends of the belt-shaped portions 432 and extending toward the rear side in a vertically long plate shape, a pair of left and right inclined plate portions 434 extending toward the rear side in a long plate shape that inclines upward from the upper end of the vertical plate portion 433 toward the left and right inner parts, and an erect portion 435 formed on the lower side of the electric role 140a from the main body plate portion 431 toward the rear side so as to regulate the rotation angle of the electric role 140a.

The strip portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the upright portion 435 have their tips connected to the main body plate portion 411 of the central component member 410 when the covering member 430 is fastened and fixed to the central component member 410. It is formed with a length that allows it to come into contact with. That is, the belt-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the upright portion 435 change the downward flow path of the ball, and also distribute the downward flow path of the ball.

The strip portion 432 is disposed along the left and right outer sides and the lower side of the out port 415, and the balls that roll onto the strip portion 432 and flow down are guided to the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The inclined plate part 434 is arranged closer to the specific winning opening 65a than the out port 415, but since the inclination direction of the upper surface is a downward slope toward the out port 415 side, the falling water that has rolled onto the inclined plate part 434 The ball is also guided to the out port 415 and ejected from the gaming area.

The upright portions 435 are arranged on the left and right inner sides of the distribution portion 413 of the central component 410 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere when the central component 410 and the covering member 430 are assembled (see FIG. 17). Ru. This allows the ball to flow down between the distribution section 413 and the upright section 435.

The left component 450 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and includes a flat main body plate 451 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 while in surface contact with the base plate 60, a protruding portion 453 that is formed over a wide area of the left side of the main body plate 451 and protrudes toward the front side, a plate-like portion whose left end is positioned between the protruding portion 453 and the left end with a gap large enough for a ball to pass through, a ceiling plate 455 that is formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the right side, and a number of ball guides 457, 459 that are formed below the ceiling plate 455 in a shape that can guide a ball to the general winning opening 63.

The ceiling plate part 455 is not separated in the middle so that only the balls that have passed through the gap between the overhanging part 453 and the ceiling plate part 455 can flow down the ball guide parts 457 and 459. It is formed into a plate shape.

The rear side of the left component 450 and the rear side of the right component 470 are formed with sheet installation recesses 451b, 471b that are recessed to thin the plate thickness from the rear side. The sheet installation recesses 451b, 471b are recessed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the sheet member (not shown) used for performance, and are formed with a recess depth approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member. Note that an example of the decoration of this sheet member is substituted for the explanation of the thin plate member 380.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXI of FIG. 18. Balls that do not pass through the gap between the projecting portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 and roll down the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 are not guided to the guide portions 457 and 459 and are not guided to the central configuration. It flows down so as to be guided toward the member 410 side. The flow path of the ball from the upstream side of the left component 450 and the center component 410 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31, multiple nails KG1 are planted into the base plate 60 and are arranged along a straight line that slopes downward toward the inside in the left-right direction, with gaps less than the diameter of the ball between them, forming a path (main path FL1) for the ball to flow down toward the center on the left and right. However, by leaving gaps in places that exceed the diameter of the ball, paths FL2 and FL3 are formed for the ball to pass through and deviate from the main path.

The ceiling plate part 455 is formed so that a ball can roll on the upper surface, but the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the ceiling plate part 455 differs depending on the timing of dropping downward from the main path FL1. To explain in detail, when the path of the ball changes from the main path FL1 to the falling path FL2, the falling velocity of the ball is switched from a state in which it mainly faces in the left-right direction to a state in which it mainly faces in the vertical direction.

Then, after reaching the ceiling plate part 455, the speed is switched again to the state in which the ball faces the left and right directions, so the sooner the ball reaches the ceiling plate part 455 (the more upstream it is on the downstream path), the more The rolling speed (momentum) of the ball when flowing down the portion 455 increases, and it is easier to reach the left and right inside of the gaming area (specific winning opening 65a side).

In addition, since the left and right inner ends (lower ends) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate part 455 are arranged above the upper ends of the adjacent curved protrusions 414, the ceiling plate part 455 can be rolled left and right. It is easy to prevent the balls passing inward from being blocked by the left and right outer side surfaces of the curved protrusion 414.

If the rolling speed of the ball when flowing down the ceiling plate part 455 is increased and it reaches the specific prize opening 65a at that speed, the opening/closing plate 65b will be damaged due to the large impact force being transmitted from the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b. Although this may be a concern, in the present embodiment, a protrusion 413a is provided on the downward flow path of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby reducing the downward speed of the ball.

In addition, upright portions 435 are disposed opposite to each other on the left and right inner sides of the protruding portion 413a to prevent the plurality of balls from flowing down side by side. This makes it possible to avoid clogging of the balls between the protrusion portion 413a and the upright portion 435 (rectification effect), and also makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time. Therefore, damage to the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily prevented (improved durability).

In this way, the ball's flow speed is reduced and the ball's flow path is restricted. This reduces the impact force that occurs when the ball collides with the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby preventing the opening/closing plate 65b from being damaged.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the protrusions 413a are arranged at bilaterally symmetrical positions with respect to the upright part 435, in the pair of flow paths formed by the pair of left and right protrusions 413a and the upright part 435. If the balls flow down at the same time, a plurality of balls may land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, hitting the balls to the left and right makes it easier to get multiple balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same time. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the progress of the special game state becomes too slow.

Since the upper surface of the ceiling plate section 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface on the left and right sides, the ceiling panel section 455 can receive multiple balls at the same time. It can be flowed to the winning a prize opening 65a side).

The balls that are diverted to the left and right inner sides pass through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413 (the side where the protrusion section 413a is formed) in order, and reach the open opening and closing plate 65b in order. In this way, according to this embodiment, the path of the balls that reach the opening and closing plate 65b is consolidated into a path that passes through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which balls collide with each other upstream of the opening and closing plate 65b and deviate from the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, by designing so that the left and right ends of the specific prize opening 65a and the opening/closing plate 65b are located on the left and right outer sides of the position where it flows down while contacting the protrusion 413a of the distribution part 413 and reaches the opening/closing plate 65b. Even if the balls collide with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b and bounce from side to side, the state in which the balls rest on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b can still be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball spills from the opening/closing plate 65b.

Even if multiple balls are closely packed together at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b, in this embodiment, a space is formed below the inclined plate section 434, allowing the balls to flow to the outside left and right of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the path of the balls passing through the inside left and right of the distribution section 413 can be prevented from becoming clogged.

In this embodiment, a gap larger than the diameter of the ball is provided between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414, allowing the ball to flow down through this gap. For example, when a ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 collides with a ball flowing down through the inner drop path FL3, the ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 has its left-right speed reduced, making it easier for it to enter the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414.

The frequency with which the balls flowing down the main path FL1 flow down the outer falling path FL2 and the frequency of flowing down the inner falling path FL3 may vary depending on the condition of the nail KG1 (adhesion of dirt, production lot). Therefore, without countermeasures, gaming efficiency and gaming profits will be affected by the condition of the nail KG1, making it impossible to provide games under equal conditions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the balls that pass through the outer falling path FL2 and roll on the ceiling plate part 455 occur more frequently than the balls that flow down the inner falling path FL3, the ball reaches the first prize opening 64. This is disadvantageous in game states (normal state, time-saving state, high-probability state, etc.) in which the goal of receiving a lottery and aiming for a jackpot is that fewer balls will reach the target. The possibility of balls entering the gap between the section 455 and the curved protruding section 414 can be reduced, and most of the balls that have reached the ceiling plate section 455 can be guided to the specific prize opening 65a, thereby improving gaming efficiency. (For example, the time required for jackpot games can be shortened).

On the other hand, if balls that flow down the inner drop path FL3 occur more frequently than balls that pass through the outer drop path FL2 and roll on the ceiling plate portion 455, more balls will reach the first winning hole 64, which is advantageous in a game state (normal state, time-saving state, high probability state, etc.) in which a lottery is drawn to aim for a jackpot, but in a jackpot game state in which the specific winning hole 65a opens and closes, balls that flow down from the inner drop path FL3 collide with the path of balls that roll down the ceiling plate portion 455, and balls that fall into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414 or pass through the gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved protruding portion 414 and flow to the out hole 415 side frequently occur. As a result, more balls will deviate from the specific winning hole 65a, and the game efficiency of the jackpot game will decrease.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the magnitude relationship between the frequency of balls rolling along the outer drop path FL2 and the ceiling panel portion 455 and the frequency of balls flowing down the inner drop path FL3 changes, the game state changes between an advantageous state and an unfavorable state, and the game is designed so that the player is not unilaterally advantageous or unilaterally disadvantaged.

In other words, while allowing the state of nail KG1 to differ, no matter what state of nail KG1 is, a relationship is maintained that is advantageous to the player in some states and disadvantageous to the player in other states. By doing so, we aim to provide gaming under equal conditions.

The following describes the path of the ball that flows down the outer drop path FL2 between the extension plate portion 455a that extends upward at the left end of the ceiling plate portion 455 and the side wall portion 453a that is curved downward and outward on the left and right inner sides of the protrusion portion 453 that is arranged opposite the extension plate portion 455a.

The rate at which the balls are guided to this downstream path varies depending on the condition of the adjacent nails KG2 (the spacing at the positions where the balls flow down). The condition of the nail KG2 may change due to a collision with a ball or being touched by an employee at a gaming machine store.

Further, the rate at which the ball reaches just before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453. Whether the ball reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 varies depending on the state of the wind turbine FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453. Since the rotating shaft of the windmill FS1 is also driven into the base plate 60 in the same way as the nail KG2, its condition may change due to a collision with a ball or being touched by an employee at a gaming machine store.

The first ball guide section 457 is disposed directly below the flow path between the extension plate section 455a and the side wall section 453a, so that the ball that flows down is normally discharged from the game area through the first ball guide section 457. The first ball guide section 457 constitutes the general winning opening 63, and when a ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457, a prize ball is paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, when a ball flows directly downward between the extension plate part 455a and the side wall part 453a, the ball will enter the first ball guide part 457 with an 80% probability, and with a 10% probability. It is configured so that it will deviate to the left with a probability of 10%, and deviate to the right with a 10% probability. Note that this ratio can be designed differently depending on the shape (inclination, interval, etc.) of the extended plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, and the arrangement of the first ball guide portion 457.

In contrast, for example, if a ball that has reached the first ball guide section 457 is still remaining in the first ball guide section 457 and the next ball arrives at the first ball guide section 457, the next ball will tend to deviate to the left or right of the first ball guide section 457 and flow down. Also, for example, if multiple balls flow toward the first ball guide section 457 in a gathered state, some of the multiple balls will tend to deviate to the left or right of the first ball guide section 457 and flow down.

When the ball deviates from the first ball guide part 457 to the right and left sides, no winning opening is provided on the downstream side thereof, and the ball is discharged from the out opening 415. On the other hand, if the ball deviates from the first ball guide part 457 to the left and right inside, it can reach the second ball guide 459 by rolling on the inclined guide part 458 that projects from the first ball guide part 457 to the left and right inside. The second ball guide section 459 constitutes the general prize winning opening 63, and when a ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459, a prize ball is paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457 and the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459 can be set arbitrarily. Although this is possible, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to be larger when the ball is guided to the downstream side.

In other words, the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459 is greater than the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457. It is set to increase.

This allows the player to enjoy the game in the way that, if a ball flows down to the left of the left end of the ceiling slope section 455, it will not enter the first ball guide section 457 but will instead deviate to the right (towards the second ball guide section 459), which is desirable for the player, and can increase attention to the left component member 450.

For example, if it is set up so that one prize ball is paid out when a ball is guided to the first ball guiding section 457, then if the ball heading towards the first guiding section 457 deviates to the outside left or right (left side of Figure 31), the number of balls held by the player will decrease, if the ball is guided to the first guiding section 457 the number of balls will remain the same (one prize ball for each ball shot), and if the ball deviates to the inside left or right (right side of Figure 31), the ball will be guided to the second ball guiding section 459 and prize balls (more than one, typically 2 to 15) will be paid out, potentially increasing the number of balls held.

This makes it possible to easily associate the flow of balls near the first guide section 457 with the amount of profit the player can obtain, thereby increasing the attention paid to the flow of balls near the first guide section 457.

Since the inclined guide part 458 extending to the right of the first guide part 457 is made of a resin material, it easily breaks when bent. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to understand changes in condition. If the broken state can be determined, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped until the part is replaced, thereby preventing the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

In this embodiment, various design ideas have been implemented to ensure that the ball that rolls in the inclined guide section 458 is guided to the second ball guide section 459 with a high probability. First, a bulge section 456 that bulges out toward the underside of the ceiling plate section 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide section 459.

When the ball starts to roll on the top surface of the inclined guide section 458 and has not yet fully stopped bouncing up and down, it comes into contact with the bulge section 456 in the left-right direction, and the ball's direction of speed is redirected downward. This makes it possible to prevent the ball, which has rolled on the top surface of the inclined guide section 458, from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide section 459 due to its momentum.

Secondly, the inclined guide portion 458 protrudes toward the second ball guide portion 459 to a position where the left-right distance between it and the second ball guide portion 459 is shorter than the radius of the ball, and the up-down distance between it and the second ball guide portion 459 is shorter than the diameter of the ball (it is formed with a dimensional relationship that does not allow the ball to pass between the inclined guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459), so that the inclined guide portion 458 makes it easier to prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide portion 459.

The winning slot component 400 is a resin molded component, and is attached to the base plate 60 by fastening screws, so replacement in the event of a defect is easier than replacing (re-driving) the nail KG1.

For example, if nail KG1 breaks, there is a high possibility that the game machine will stop operating for a long period of time, but normally, nails KG1 are driven in in large numbers rather than one by one. Since the nails KG1 are driven by an automatic machine, it is not easy to re-drive the nails KG1 even if some of the nails KG1 break.

Therefore, in order to repair it, it is often necessary to replace the entire game board, but if it is determined that the replacement cost cannot be covered, even if there is no broken part other than the nail KG1, However, there is a possibility that the equipment will be stored in a warehouse without being restarted. That is, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintenance efficiency and improvement of the operating period of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent defects in the nail KG1 as much as possible, balls falling in the vertical direction are caught by the overhanging part 453 of the left component 450, and the received balls are caught by the overhanging part 453. By rolling left and right on the upper surface of 453, the force in the vertical direction is reduced, and then the nail KG1 on the downstream side is brought into contact with the nail KG1. Thereby, the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1 can be reduced, and the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1 can be suppressed.

Further, when focusing on the nails KG1 arranged on the right and left sides of the outer falling path FL2, since the right and left sides are covered with the overhanging portions 453, the ball does not collide with these nails KG1 from the left and right sides. Therefore, compared to the case where the nail KG1 receives loads from random directions, it is possible to lengthen the period until the nail KG1 breaks.

The balls that flow down the front side of the left component 450 pass through the outlet 415 and are discharged to the rear side of the base plate 60. At this time, the vertical plate portion 433 restricts the balls from passing to the inside on the left and right (the side closest to the opening and closing plate 65b), so it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing to the opening and closing plate 65b side without passing through the outlet 415.

As a result, the pivot axis of the opening/closing plate 65b can prevent balls from flowing in from the left component 450 side, so there is no need to always leave a gap between the opening/closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 so that balls can pass through as a countermeasure against ball clogging, and the vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the pivot axis (lower edge) of the opening/closing plate 65b can be set to less than the diameter of the ball.

Even if configured in this way, if a ball on the opening/closing plate 65b falls to the left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate portion 433 and the opening/closing plate 65b, and when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the opening/closing plate 65b, which was blocking the ball's flow path, moves away from the ball's flow path, and the temporarily placed ball will flow down toward the outlet 71. This reduces the possibility of ball clogging.

Figure 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in Figure 31. The main body plate 451 of the left component 450 has extensions 451a extending in a thin plate shape (thinner than the thickness of the main body plate 451) from the left and right inner edges along the front surface of the base plate 60, and the main body plate 411 of the central component 410 has covering extensions 411b extending from the left and right outer edges along the front side surfaces.

In this embodiment, the extending portion 451a is held between the covered extending portion 411b and the base plate 60. As a result, the fastening screws for fixing can be removed from the left and right inner ends of the left component 450, which is the side to be held, so the presence of the fastening screws can be avoided when decorating the left component 450. This makes it easy to prevent the problem of deterioration of the performance effect due to conspicuousness. In addition, since the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, the number of assembly steps and material costs can be reduced.

When the extension 451a is sandwiched between the base plate 60, the front end of the covering extension 411b is located behind the front end of the main body plate 451. This prevents a ball flowing down the front side of the main body plate 451 from colliding with the front end of the covering extension 411b and bouncing off to the left or right when the ball flows toward the front side of the main body plate 411.

Figure 33 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 300, and Figure 34 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 300. As shown in Figures 33 and 34, the sorting section 983 described above is rotatably arranged inside the sorting unit 300, and is configured so that balls guided through the first winning opening 64 into the inside of the sorting unit 300 are sorted alternately to the left and right.

The distribution unit 300 is a member arranged in such a manner that the distribution section 983 can rotate from the rear side, and is composed of a first component member 310 that constitutes a flow path that distributes balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 to the left and right and flows down, a ceiling component member 330 that constitutes the ceiling of the path along which balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 flow backwards, a first auxiliary member 340 that supports the shaft member 988a of the distribution section 983 at both ends together with the first component member 310 and abuts against the distribution section 983 to prevent the flowing balls from falling off to the rear side, and a first configuration The first component 310 includes a second component 350 that forms a discharge path for balls discharged rearward from the downstream side of the first component 310, a pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 that are fastened to the first component 310 and are arranged to cover the rear and upper part of the discharge path formed by the second component 350 and are fastened to the first component 310, and a pair of left and right thin plate members 380 that are arranged on the front side of the first component 310 and are arranged between the first component 310 and the main plate portion 411 of the central component 410.

The first component 310 is made of a colorless, translucent resin material and includes a plate-shaped central plate 311 formed along a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction, an extension plate 313 extending from the upper end of the central plate 311 to the front side, a pair of inclined extensions 315 extending from the rear side of the central plate 311 and extending in a band-like manner in a direction that slopes downward toward the left and right outside, a pair of direction switching parts 317 connected to the left and right outer ends of the inclined extensions 315 and switching the flow direction of the balls (switching 90 degrees from the left-to-right direction to the front-to-rear direction in this embodiment), and a pair of left and right opening forming parts 320 in which multiple openings large enough for the balls to pass through are arranged on the left and right sides of the front side of the central plate 311.

The central plate portion 311 is provided with a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 directly below the rear end portion of the extension plate portion 313 into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted. The bearing portion 312 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate part 313 has a protrusion part 313a which is formed as a protrusion whose upper end surface slopes downward toward the rear along the left and right center parts and forms a rolling path for the ball, and a protrusion part 313a which is erected from the left and right edges and which is formed as a protrusion 313a that slopes downward toward the rear. and a pair of left and right wall-shaped parts 314 that guide the rearward direction.

The ball flowing down the inclined extension part 315 is prevented from falling off to the back side by the front plate part 371 of the second auxiliary member 370, and flows down to the left and right outside. Note that the second auxiliary member 370 is also used as a member for preventing the detection device SE3 from coming off.

The direction switching section 317 is provided with an inclined surface section 318 which is formed as a plate surface on which the ball can roll at a position one step lower than the inclined extension section 315 on the left and right outer sides of the left and right ends of the inclined extension section 315 and slopes downward toward the front side, and an erect curved section 319 which is erected from the rear edge and the left and right outer edges of the inclined surface section 318 and curved toward the front side in a shape that can guide the ball to the front side.

The opening forming section 320 includes a sensor placement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the rear side, a pair of left and right support extensions 322 that extend along the left and right sides of the sensor placement opening 321 toward the front side and support the left and right ends of the detection sensor SE3, a winning opening 323 that is opened between the support extensions 322 to allow the ball to pass through, a pair of discharge openings 325 that are opened on the left and right opposite sides of the winning opening 323 based on the support extensions 322 to allow the ball to pass through, a bottom surface forming section 327 that has a bottom portion curved toward the rear in a shape that can receive balls that have passed through the winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 and guide them to the rear side, and a pair of partition wall sections 328 that extend from the lower edge of the support extensions 322 toward the bottom surface forming section 327 to partition the upper surface side of the bottom surface forming section 327.

When the detection device SE3 is inserted into the sensor placement opening 321, the detection hole SE1a is designed to be positioned inside the winning opening 323. The positioning protrusion 322a protruding from the front edge of the support extension 322 comes into contact with the front end of the detection device SE3, making it easy to position the front and rear of the detection device SE3.

The ball that passes through the direction switching section 317 and reaches the opening forming section 320 passes through either the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, rolls on the upper surface of the bottom forming section 327, and goes to the back side. You will be guided. Since each rolling path is divided by the partition wall portion 328, the possibility that the balls will intersect or collide on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming portion 327 can be reduced. As a result, the flow of the balls can be rectified, so that clogging of the balls and stagnation of the balls can be prevented.

Of the balls rolling on the top surface of the bottom component 327, those that pass through the winning opening 323 are detected by the detection device SE3. On the other hand, those that pass through the discharge opening 325 are not detected by the detection device SE3. In either case, the balls that roll on the top surface of the bottom component 327 are detected by a detection device (not shown) that detects the discharge of balls, and are then guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

To reach the ball discharge passage (not shown), the ball rolls inward on the rolling surface 351 of the second component 350 to the left and right while being prevented from falling out to the rear side by the second auxiliary member 370, and is guided through the common drop flow paths 352 arranged on both the left and right sides.

The second auxiliary member 370 includes a front plate portion 371 that covers the space open on the rear side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the balls from falling out, a rear plate portion 372 that blocks the upper and rear sides of the flow path of the balls that flow down along the rolling surface 351 and common fall flow path 352 of the second component member 350 to prevent the balls from falling out, an insertion hole 373 drilled in the front plate portion 371 to allow the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 329 of the first component member 310 to be inserted, and an insertion hole 374 drilled in the rear plate portion 372 to allow the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 353 of the second component member 350 to be inserted.

The materials from which the second component 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 are made can be set as desired, but in this embodiment, the second component 350 is made from a colored, opaque resin material, and the second auxiliary member 370 is made from a colorless, transparent resin material.

This reduces the visibility of the balls flowing through the common drop flow path 352, lowering attention to the discharged balls, and also allows light to be taken in from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370, so that the light taken in can brightly illuminate the first component member 310 arranged in front, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the first component member 310.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being accommodated in the sheet placement recess 411a (see FIG. 30) of the main body plate portion 411. With the plate member 380 positioned in this manner, the game board 13 is assembled, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched in the front-rear direction between the main body plate portion 411 and the first component member 310.

The following describes the forward/backward/left/right displacement (change in position) of a ball that enters the first winning opening 64 as it flows downstream. First, the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is displaced backward along the extension plate portion 313. After that, it is distributed left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 described in the first embodiment, and displaces outward to the left and right along the inclined extension portion 315.

Then, the direction of the ball is switched to the front side by the direction switching section 317, and the ball is displaced forward. If a guide section with a curved surface for switching the direction of the ball's flow were placed on the front side of the ball, the guide section would likely block the line of sight to the ball, reducing visibility; however, in this embodiment, the upright curved section 319 serving as a guide section is placed on the back side of the ball, so that the upright curved section 319 is unlikely to block the line of sight to the ball. This makes it easier to ensure the visibility of the ball.

Thereafter, the ball flowing directly below the winning opening 323 is detected by the detection device SE3, and then is displaced backward along the bottom surface forming part 327. In addition, the ball that is displaced to the left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaches directly above the ejection opening 325 passes through the ejection opening 325 and is displaced backward along the bottom component 327. do.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the ball that enters the first prize opening 64 is placed toward the rear when it first enters the ball, flows to the left and right, and is brought to the front just before passing through the detection device SE3. ing. As a result, compared to the configuration of the first embodiment, the distribution section 983 can be placed closer to the rear, and a space can be left below the extension plate section 313.

This free space can be used to place a drive mechanism for operating the electric device 140a of the second winning opening 140. As a result, in this embodiment, the second winning opening 140 can be positioned closer to the first winning opening 64 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, by configuring the path along which the balls flow after being sorted to switch between forward and backward directions, the vertical width of the flow path when viewed from the front can be reduced compared to when the flow paths are consistently arranged in a vertical direction (for example, in the configuration described above for sorting unit 980). This allows for greater freedom in designing the vertical positioning of detection device SE3 relative to first winning opening 64.

Figure 35 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXV of Figure 18. In Figure 35, the central component member 410 and the thin plate member 380 are illustrated semi-transparently, allowing the distribution unit 300 to be seen. For ease of explanation, Figure 35 also illustrates the external shapes of the electric role device 140a in both the closed and open states. Note that Figures 33 and 34 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figure 35.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate (sheet) shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that can be seen by the player through the central component member 410. Although not shown in the figures, in this embodiment, colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters are painted on the front of the thin plate member 380, and the colors and brightness seen through the thin plate member 380 change in various ways depending on the state of the light that is irradiated (differences in color and brightness).

Unlike the case where patterns, figures, characters, or characters are drawn directly on the base board 60, according to the present embodiment, by removing the thin plate member 380, the patterns, figures, letters, or characters drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be removed from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when changing the gameplay characteristics (so-called different specifications) while keeping the same shape of the game board 13, the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the game board 13, or the colors, etc. may be changed to make it easier for the player to understand the gameplay.

If patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, it will be necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, which essentially means replacing the entire game board 13, which can easily increase costs when changing gameplay.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 that has a different pattern, figure, letter, character, color, etc., drawn on it, so there is no need to replace the entire game board 13. Therefore, it is easy to suppress the cost of changing the gameplay.

The manner of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, a colorless and transparent area may be formed above the detection device SE3 to improve the visibility of the ball rolling on the inclined surface portion 318, and other parts may be densely decorated with figures and patterns. Also, for example, numbers or other marks may be drawn at the locations corresponding to the winning opening 323 and the ejection opening 325 when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to understand the profit he or she can obtain depending on which mark the ball falls close to.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to be large enough to extend outward beyond the through hole 60a to the left and right, and is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main plate portion 411 of the central component member 410.

In this embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 is positioned so as to abut against the front end of the first component member 310 (e.g., the front end of the support extension portion 322). In other words, since the detection device SE3 is positioned close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be moved closer to the player. This improves the visibility of the ball passing through the detection device SE3, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a ball passing through the detection device SE3 is overlooked.

Moreover, the detection device SE3 is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the electric accessory 140a when viewed from the front, and is not hidden by the electric accessory 140a. As a result, compared to the case where the downward path of the ball is hidden by the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 5), the ball passes through the detection device SE3 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 140a (open state, closed state). visibility can be improved.

In addition, because the detection device SE3 is positioned behind the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410, it does not affect the way the balls flow down the front side of the main body plate portion 411. In other words, the design freedom of the play area can be improved compared to when the detection device SE3 is positioned protruding forward of the main body plate portion 411 (forward of the front end surface of the base plate 60).

Due to strength considerations, nails are not provided on the main body plate 411, but in this embodiment, the balls are diverted using the distribution parts 413 and the curved protrusions 414 as substitutes for nails. This makes it possible to prevent the balls from flowing down a monotonous path on the front side of the main body plate 411.

Both balls that pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 and are detected by the detection device SE3 (balls that pass through the winning opening 323) and balls that pass through the ejection opening 325 follow a path that rolls along the inclined surface portion 318 and displaces toward the front. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of balls that reach the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of balls detected by the detection device SE3.

Although the inclined surface portion 318 can improve the visibility of the ball by displacing the ball towards the player, the configuration makes it difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, which can lead to dissatisfaction among players as they are unable to determine whether the ball has actually not passed through the detection device SE3 or whether it has passed through the detection device SE3 but there is a detection error.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a ball passing from the inclined surface portion 318 through the winning opening 323 is seen to flow downward when viewed from the front along the winning flow path FL31, whereas a ball passing from the inclined surface portion 318 through the ejection opening 325 flows along the non-winning flow path FL32, with the flow direction when viewed from the front being switched 90 degrees from downward to left or right.

In other words, whether the ball passes through the detection device SE3 can be determined based on whether there is a left-right component in the direction of the ball's downward flow, which reduces the possibility of misjudging the location where the ball passed. This makes it easier to determine whether the ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Both the game balls flowing down along the winning flow path FL31 and the game balls flowing down along the non-winning flow path FL32 flow down near the distribution part 413 and the curved protrusion 414 when viewed from the front. , the downstream path is visually recognized to overlap with the downstream path of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Therefore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 can be made to appear to the player as if they are flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a. The player often visually checks the number of game balls that reached the top of the opening/closing plate 65b but did not enter the specific winning opening 65a (game balls that passed when the opening/closing plate 65b was closed) by checking the game balls rolling on the inner rail 61 toward the outlet 71. However, since the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 flow down the winning flow path FL31 or the non-winning flow path FL32 and then flow backward along the bottom surface component 327 (see FIG. 34), the game balls do not appear in front of the outlet 71.

As a result, the game balls that enter the first winning hole 64 during the execution of the jackpot game can be added to the number of game balls that appear to be flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a. Regardless of the number of game balls entering the opening 64, it is possible to create an illusion that most of the fired game balls are entering the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game balls actually flowing down towards the specific winning opening 65a are separated in front and back by the thin plate member 380, so that they do not collide with each other. None. Thereby, the above-mentioned illusion can be created without obstructing the flow of the game balls flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the non-winning flow path FL32 is formed as a flow path flowing in the left-right direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening is formed in the main body plate part 411 and the thin plate member 380 in the front-rear direction in the path through which the ball flows down the inclined surface part 318 toward the detection device SE3, and by passing through this opening, The winning flow downward path FL32 may be formed as a flow path through which the ball flows toward the front side.

That is, the ball flowing down the flow path FL32 during non-winning time may return to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 and flow down toward the out port 71. In this case, if the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that has flown down the non-winning flow path FL32 can be picked up by the opening/closing plate 65b and enter the specific winning hole 65a.

That is, after the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 returns to the front side of the main body plate part 411, it is possible to create a game in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. 64 (particularly during a jackpot game in which the opening/closing board 65b operates to open and close) can be improved.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 17) that is fastened to the rear side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is fastened to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

36, 37, 38, and 39 are front views of the operating unit 500. 36 shows a retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 of the operating unit 500, FIG. 37 shows an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 38 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600, In FIG. 39, one operation error limit state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the retracted state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 of the internal operation unit 600 is positioned at the upper end position of its vertical operation range, the intermediate state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned at the lower end position of its operable range while maintaining its forward/backward tilting posture from the retracted state, and the extended state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned at the lower end position of its vertical operation range and the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation performance device 800 faces in the forward/backward direction.

In the state change from the intermediate state to the extended state, a posture change (tilting motion) of the light emitting action production unit 700 in the front and rear direction occurs. This posture change is executed as a rotational movement around a predetermined rotational axis (center axis J1 to be described later).

In the present embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the horizontal tilt allowed by the design of the light emitting operation unit 700 has reached its limit. In FIG. 39, for convenience, the right side of the light emitting operation unit 700 is shown in the same position as in the retracted state, and the left side is shown shifted downward. In this embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light emitting operation unit 700 can be operated in the vertical direction while maintaining the tilt angle of one operation error limit state, but the details will be described later. do.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 is in a posture with the decorative plate 811 on which decorative figures and patterns are formed facing the front side.

The figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, as shown in FIG. 37, and are visually recognized as one unit in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600 (the straight lines extending radially and the wavy patterns formed on the left and right outer sides are visually recognized when formed on the rotating member 810, including the straight lines).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the rotating member 810 can be adjusted depending on the size of the rotating member 810. It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns that can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is tilted in the forward rotation direction, and the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 are Visible from the front.

These figures and patterns are also formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and are integrally recognized in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 (radially extending straight lines). Among the shapes and the wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and the wave pattern is visually recognized on the main body member 710).

In other words, the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as part of a figure that is visually recognized as one with the bottom wall portion 511, so that the size of the main body member 710 does not limit the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710.

As the light-emitting action production unit 700 moves up and down from the retracted state to the extended state, in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the rotating member 810 start to shift from a state in which the figures and patterns are viewed as a single unit in the retracted state.

This shift becomes more noticeable as the amount of displacement in the vertical direction increases. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted and displaced in the extended state to switch the surface visible to the player, and new figures and patterns that are visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511 are created. It can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall part 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the light emitting operation production unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) that is displaced in the vertical direction can be changed to the retracted state and the extended state. It can be configured so that it can be visually recognized in an integrated manner.

During the vertical displacement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 described here, the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed from the front changes. Thereby, a single performance unit can be made to appear as if it were a plurality of different performance units, and the degree of freedom in designing motion performance can be improved.

40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIGS. 40 and 41, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) disposed in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, it is possible to divide the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The rear case 510 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a number of positioning protrusions 513a that protrude in an annular shape toward the front side and are shaped to fit into fitting recesses (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled in the center of the positioning protrusions 513a so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex part 513a into the fitting part 60c (see FIG. 21) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the fitting part By screwing into the female screw 60c, the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, so that the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be improved.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be an annular protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60 (circular in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape that increases the fitting gap (large-diameter ring shape) in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and has a light emitting means and an operation unit disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 that is inserted into the rear case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed, an internal operation unit 600 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510, and a light emitting performance unit 518 disposed on the lower inside of the rear case 510.

The light emitting production unit 518 is a unit that irradiates light from behind to the front of the distribution unit 300 and the winning hole component 400 (see FIG. 29), and is formed by the distribution unit 300 and the winning hole component 400. It functions to brightly illuminate the path of the ball.

The decorative fixing member 520 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-like members that are arranged symmetrically on both the left and right positions and can be divided into vertical parts, and is arranged on the upper left side. a first fixing member 530 disposed on the lower left side, a third fixing member 550 disposed on the upper right side, a fourth fixing member 560 disposed on the lower right side, and a second fixing member 540 disposed on the lower left side; A left illumination board 570 disposed on the back side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, a right illumination board 580 disposed on the back side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560, Equipped with. The configuration and role of each part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

42 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 43 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. 42 and 43, the decorative fixing member 520 is disassembled from the back case 510 and placed at the front, and the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled from the back case 510 and placed between the back case 510 and the decorative fixing member 520. The state shown in FIG.

The first fixing member 530 includes a thin plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the front-rear direction, a front plate portion 534 extending rightward from the front side of the insertion plate portion 531, and a front plate portion 534 extending from the front side of the insertion plate portion 531. An outer plate portion 537 extending to the left.

The insertion plate portion 531 includes a plurality of insertion protrusions 532 that protrude from the extending tip toward the back side and have a shape and arrangement that allow insertion into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600. It has the role of preventing outward tilting displacement of 610. The relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be described later.

The front plate 534 is a plate-like portion that is disposed in front of the left side illumination board 570 and is formed from a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570), and has a light diffusion treatment formed on the back side to diffuse light from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side of the left side illumination board 570. In addition, it has an insertion hole 535 drilled so that a fastening screw that is fastened to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted.

The outer plate portion 537 is a portion that can abut against the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, and has an insertion hole 538 drilled therein to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 512a formed in the outer wall portion 512.

That is, the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 when the operating unit 500 is assembled (see FIG. 36).

The second fixing member 540 is a plate-shaped part disposed at the same front-back position as the front plate part 534 of the first fixing member 530, and is a front plate part disposed at a slight distance from the lower end of the front plate part 534. 541, a fastening extension part 544 extending rightward from the lower right side part of the front plate part 541, and an outer plate part 547 extending leftward from the left end part of the front plate part 541. Be prepared.

The front plate 541 is a plate-like portion that is disposed in front of the left side illumination board 570 and is formed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570), and has a light diffusion treatment formed on the back side to diffuse light from light-emitting means such as LEDs that are disposed on the front side of the left side illumination board 570.

Furthermore, the insertion hole 542 is formed so that a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted therethrough, and the fastening screw fastened and fixed to the inner member 670 of the internal movement unit 600 can be inserted therethrough. An insertion hole 543 is provided. That is, by fastening and fixing via the front plate part 541, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be connected and fixed.

The connecting extension part 544 includes an insertion hole 545 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 518a of the light emitting production unit 518 can be inserted. The outer plate part 547 is a part that can come into contact with the front part of the outer wall part 512 of the rear case 510, and is bored through so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 512b formed on the outer wall part 512 can be inserted therein. An insertion hole 548 is provided.

In other words, when the operating unit 500 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 36), the second fixing member 540 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600, and the light-emitting performance unit 518.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560, and the right side illumination board 580 are arranged on the back side and are covered by the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600. 530, the shape is slightly different from the second fixing member 540 and the left side illumination board 570, but basically they are formed laterally symmetrically with the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and the configuration and the role of each configuration. are the same, so a description of the overlapping parts will be omitted, and the reference numerals mentioned above in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540 will be illustrated for convenience.

The following describes the order in which the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative fixing member 520 are assembled to the rear case 510. When assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510, first assemble the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510 (see Figure 40), and then assemble the decorative fixing member 520 to the rear case 510.

In summary, the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510 is performed in the following order: first, the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670 are fastened to the rear case 510, then the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is inserted from the front side inside the rear case 510 and positioned between the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670, the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is positioned at the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and the members (screws, collars, etc.) to prevent it from falling off are attached to the fastening part 682 from the front side.

In this embodiment, when assembling the light-emitting operation production unit 700, there is no need to attach the decorative fixing member 520 to the rear case 510, so the front side of the rear case 510 can be left wide open, and the movement of the worker's hands can be prevented from being blocked by the decorative fixing member 520. This improves work efficiency.

Furthermore, since the work of inserting the fastening screws into the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, and 548 of the decorative fixing member 520 and fastening and fixing them can be performed from the front side of the back case 510, the light emitting operation can be produced. After completing the work of assembling the unit 700 to the displacement member 680, the work of fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be continued without changing the posture of the back case 510. Thereby, work efficiency can be further improved. Next, details of the assembly work will be explained.

44 is a sectional view of the operating unit 500 taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36, FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLV in FIG. - XLIV is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500.

In FIGS. 44 and 45, the light emitting action production unit 700 is disassembled from the back case 510, and illustration of the decoration fixing member 520 is omitted because it shows a state before the decoration fixing member 520 is assembled. On the other hand, FIG. 46 shows a state in which the light emitting action producing unit 700 and the decorative fixing member 520 are assembled to the back case 510 (see FIG. 36).

In this embodiment, the fastening positions are designed so that the internal operating unit 600 and the rear case 510 are not simply fixed together to provide sufficient rigidity (for example, the fastening positions are located only at one of the upper and lower ends), and the internal operating unit 600 is configured to bend outward (change its posture) to the left and right relative to the rear case 510 (see the imaginary lines in Figure 45).

Utilizing this bending deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting action production unit 700. That is, the assembly of the light emitting action producing unit 700 is performed by inserting the fastening part 682 into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 and then screwing a fastening screw into the fastening part 682. By bending and deforming the light-emitting motion production unit 700 to the left and right outward, the dimensions of the path through which the light-emitting action production unit 700 enters toward the fastening portion 682 can be expanded from the fixed width W1 to the deflected width W2, making it easier to assemble. Work efficiency can be improved.

At this time, as the internal operation unit 600 is deflected and deformed to the left and right sides, the direction of entry of the fastening screws into the fastening part 682 is in an inclined direction (the front side spreads outward to the left and right) as it goes toward the back side. direction).

In this case, compared to the case where the fastening screw is inserted in the front-back direction, the driver for screwing in the fastening screw is separated (avoided) from the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 (with respect to the front-back direction). The fastening screw can be inserted into the rear case 510 in an inclined direction).

This makes it possible to facilitate fastening work and improve the design freedom of the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting action production unit 700, the shape of which is designed with the aim of avoiding contact with the driver. In other words, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the assembly work of the light-emitting action production unit 700 and improve the design freedom of the decorative member 750.

To achieve this effect, in this embodiment, the left-right dimension of the long hole 764a of the connected hole 764 through which the fastening screw is inserted is designed to have a dimension (sufficient left-right length) that can accommodate misalignment of the fastening portion 682 due to flexural deformation of the internal operating unit 600.

Note that the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 inward to the left and right is less likely to occur compared to the bending deformation to the left and right, since the cylindrical member 695 comes into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 and resistance is generated. It is composed of

In this embodiment, the decorative fixing member 520 is attached to suppress outward bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right. This effect is achieved by the fact that there are more fastening positions between the internal operation unit 600, the decorative fixing member 520, and the rear case 510 (fastening positions located on the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 or the front side of the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions located closer to the front side) than there are fastening positions between the internal operation unit 600 and the rear case 510 (fastening positions located on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, fastening positions located closer to the rear side), and by the ingenious shape of the decorative fixing member 520.

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513, and the support plate portion 513, which is integrally configured with the outer wall portion 512, is attached to the base plate 60. It is fastened and fixed (see Figure 42). That is, the decorative fixing member 520 is restricted from being displaced by the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513. Thereby, the rigidity of the decorative fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600 can be improved by using the rigidity of the base plate 60, so that it is possible to suppress the deflection deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right sides.

Second, the insertion plate portions 531 of the decorative fixing member 520 are placed in contact with the left and right outer sides of the internal operation unit 600 . That is, the insertion plate portion 531 can suppress the deflection deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right sides.

These first and second configurations can prevent the internal operation unit 600 from being bent and deformed to the left and right in a state where the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled.

In addition, the decorative fixing member 520 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, so that the assembly work can be performed in a single sequence, with the light-emitting operation production unit 700 being assembled first, followed by the decorative fixing member 520, without changing the position of the rear case 510. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work.

On the other hand, if the work of removing the light emitting operation producing unit 700 from the fastening part 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decorative fixing member 520, the number of maintenance work can be reduced and efficiency is improved.

Here, the illumination boards 570 and 580 are disposed on the back side of the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 42), and it is better to configure the illumination boards 570 and 580 to protrude inward from the left and right for better light emission. The range of performance can be expanded and the performance effect can be improved.

On the other hand, if the illumination boards 570 and 580 are arranged so as to protrude to the left and right inside as in this embodiment, when the maintenance worker moves the light emitting action producing unit 700 to the front side, the light emitting action producing unit 700 There is a possibility that the connecting plate portions 765 formed at the left and right end portions of 700 collide with the illumination substrates 570, 580, and the illumination substrates 570, 580 may be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a protective extension 677b is extended from the front edge of the extension wall 677 of the inner member 670 (described later) toward the left and right inward in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illumination boards 570 and 580 (see FIG. 42).

The left and right inner ends of the protective extension portion 677b are formed in the same shape as the shape line S51 (see FIG. 42) corresponding to the shape of the left and right inner edges of the upper side parts of the illumination boards 570 and 580, and the shape line It is extended to the position corresponding to S51.

As a result, the area for supporting the illumination boards 570, 580 from the back side can be increased, and the back surfaces of the upper parts of the illumination boards 570, 580 can be protected by the protective extension part 677b, so maintenance work can be carried out. It is possible to avoid contact between the illumination boards 570, 580 and the light emitting operation producing unit 700 at times.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, regardless of the shape of the illumination boards 570, 580, the formation of the extending portions inward to the left and right is omitted. Therefore, when removing the light emitting action production unit 700 at this position, there remains a possibility that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the illumination boards 570, 580 will come into contact with each other.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light-emitting action production unit 700 is configured to change its posture as it is displaced downward (see Figures 37 and 38). The posture change causes the orientation of the fastening portion 682 to change from front-to-back to up-to-down, making it impossible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw, so the operation of removing the light-emitting action production unit 700 is configured to be performed before the posture of the light-emitting action production unit 700 changes. Therefore, it is sufficient for the protective extension portion 677b to be formed in a position where it will be placed before the posture of the light-emitting action production unit 700 changes, and this embodiment is designed in this way (see Figure 37).

In this way, rather than forming the protective extension 677b over the entire vertical range, it is possible to narrow the range of formation of the protective extension 677b by limiting its formation to the minimum necessary range to avoid contact between the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the illumination boards 570 and 580.

In other words, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 from which the work of removing the light emitting action producing unit 700 can be performed is limited to the arrangement between the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 and the intermediate state. By configuring this, the formation range of the protective extension portion 677b is reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the light emitting operation production unit 700 after removing the decoration fixing member 520 from the back case 510. In this case, as in the assembly work, by bending and deforming the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outward, it is possible to widen the horizontal width of the path for taking out the light emitting action producing unit 700. can be prevented from coming into contact with the protective extension portion 677b.

47 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. 47 and 48 mainly show the internal operation unit 600 in an exploded state, and illustration of the decorative fixing member 520 is omitted.

As shown in Figures 47 and 48, the internal operation unit 600 includes an outer member 610 fastened to the bottom plate portion 511 of the rear case 510, a lifting plate member 630 supported by the outer member 610 so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction and positioned inside in the left-right direction, a drive motor 648 fastened to the outer member 610 as a device that generates a driving force for lifting and lowering the lifting plate member 630, a transmission gear 649 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 648 and transmitting the driving force to the lifting plate member 630, and a coil spring SP1 that applies an upward biasing force (load in the pulling direction) to the lifting plate member 630.

Further, the internal operation unit 600 is arranged inside in the left-right direction so that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed between the outer member 610 and a resistance generating device 650 that is configured to be able to generate a resistance force for the movement of the elevating plate member 630. an inner member 670 that is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw that is inserted through the outer member 610 in the left-right direction; and a displacement member 680 that is movably supported by the inner member 670 and disposed inside the left-right direction. , a rotational posture assisting member 690 that is fastened and fixed from the left and right sides on the rear side of the upper end of the inner member 670, and a light emitting operation production unit 700 that is connected at both ends to the displacement member 680.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit that is roughly symmetrically configured, with the light-emitting operation production unit 700 positioned in the center on the left and right, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is supported for operation by a roughly common configuration that is fixed to the rear case 510 side on both the left and right sides of the light-emitting operation production unit 700.

Details of each configuration of the internal operation unit 600 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, which are enlarged views of each range of FIG. 47. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 49 and 50, FIGS. 47 and 48 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 49(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610, lifting plate member 630, and resistance generator 650 in range XLIXa of Figure 47, Figure 49(b) is a front perspective view of the outer member 610 in range XLIXb of Figure 47, Figure 50(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting plate member 630, inner member 670, displacement member 680, and rotation posture assist member 690 in range La of Figure 47, and Figure 50(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 680 and rotation posture assist member 690 in range Lb of Figure 47.

As shown in FIGS. 49(a) and 49(b), the outer member 610 includes a plate-shaped portion 611 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 (back case 510, which is adjacent to the outer wall portion 512 in the assembled state), and an extended wall portion 621 that extends in a wall shape and is formed so as to partition the left and right outer areas of the plate portion 611. , is provided.

The plate-shaped portion 611 has a pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 that are elongated in the vertical direction and is elongated and wide (wider than the elongated hole 612) at the rear of the upper elongated hole 612. It includes a wiring through hole 613 formed in an oval shape, and a pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614 that protrude outward from the left and right in a cylindrical shape at the rear of the lower elongated hole 612.

The long holes 612 are long holes for restricting the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 630, and a pair are arranged on the upper and lower sides. The front-to-rear width of the long holes 612 is formed slightly wider than the diameter of the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the lifting plate member 630 through which it is inserted, so that the displacement of the lifting plate member 630 in the front-to-rear direction is small. The pair of long holes 612 are intentionally formed with a staggered front-to-rear arrangement. In other words, the lower long hole 612 is arranged further forward than the upper long hole 612.

As a result, the support position of the upper side of the elevating plate member 630 is on the rear side compared to the supporting position of the lower side of the elevating plate member 630, so that the elevating plate is suspended from the upper side of the elevating plate member 630. The lower portion of member 630 is biased rearward by gravity.

This allows the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 to be moved closer to the transmission gear 649, preventing the rack gear portion 634 from falling off the transmission gear 649 and optimizing the meshing relationship.

The wiring through hole 613 is an electrical wiring that is connected inside the light emitting operation production unit 700, and is passed through the irregularly shaped opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 and located on the left and right outer sides of the inner member 670, and is connected to the outside. This is an opening for discharging the member 610 to the left and right outside.

The guide protrusion 614 functions as a part that guides the displacement of the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650. In other words, it guides the front-rear displacement member 653 so that it can displace in the front-rear direction, and also functions to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from tilting forward or backward and changing its posture, as will be described in detail later.

The extension wall 621 is provided with a number of fastening parts 622 arranged at the front end and configured to receive fastening screws inserted into the decorative fixing member 520, and a pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623 arranged on the rear side and formed to receive the insertion protrusions 532 (see FIG. 43) of the insertion plate part 531 of the decorative fixing member 520. The fastening parts other than the fastening part 622 arranged at the front end are mainly used to fasten and fix the illumination boards 570, 580 (see FIG. 40).

The elevating plate member 630 includes an elongated main body portion 631 whose elongated direction is oriented in the up-down direction, and is formed to protrude from the elongated main body portion 631 to the left and right outside, and is inserted into and fastened to the elongated hole 612 on the upper side of the outer member 610. A pair of upper fastening parts 632 are formed into which a screw can be screwed, and a pair of upper fastening parts 632 are formed to protrude left and right outward from the elongated main body part 631 and are inserted into the elongated hole 612 on the lower side of the outer member 610 and into which a fastening screw can be screwed. A rack gear portion 634 is provided on the rear side of the elongated main body portion 631 and is formed in a gear tooth shape and meshed with a transmission gear 649.

Further, the elevating plate member 630 is configured to be able to detect the position of the elongated main body 631 by extending from the lower end of the elongated main body 631 to the back side and disposed in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown). a detected portion 635 that is located between the pair of upper fastening portions 632; A drop-off prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the upper fastening part 632 by fastening screws arranged and inserted therein, and a fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the lower fastening part 633 by fastening screws arranged on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like part 611 and passed through. The ring member C1 is assembled to the upper fastening part 632 and the lower fastening part 633 in order to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are arranged corresponding to the front-back arrangement of the elongated hole 612 of the outer member 610. Therefore, the lower fastening section 633 is arranged on the front side of the upper fastening section 632.

The front-rear long hole 636 is a long hole that guides the front-rear movement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 inserted into the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 of the inner member 670, and is formed with a front-rear length equal to or greater than the front-rear width of the range in which the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 are formed.

The fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the upper fastening part 632 with the upper fastening part 632 of the elevating plate member 630 inserted into the upper long hole 612, and the lower fastening part 633 is inserted into the lower long hole 612. 612 and the abutted plate 638 is fastened and fixed to the distal end side of the lower fastening part 633, so that the elevating plate member 630, which is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be movable up and down, can fall off from the outer member 610. can be easily prevented.

The abutment plate 638 has locking portions on the left and right outer sides for locking the lower end of the coil spring SP1. The upper end of the coil spring SP1 is locked to locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610. In other words, the coil spring SP1 generates a biasing force (pulling force) that biases the abutment plate 638 upward.

While the anti-fall plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, the abutment plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape. This allows the abutment area with the resistance generating device 650 to be increased, and the load per unit area generated during a collision to be reduced; more details will be given later.

The resistance generating device 650 includes a solenoid 651 with a plunger extending in the forward and backward directions, a fixed cover 652 for housing the solenoid 651 and fixing it to the left and right outside of the outer member 610, and a forward and backward displacement member 653 that is engaged with the plunger of the solenoid 651 and is configured to be displaceable in the forward and backward directions by being guided by the guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610.

The fixed cover 652 has a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which fastening screws screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651, and a guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610. It is provided with a pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b that are recessed with dimensions that allow the tip portions to fit.

The longitudinally displacing member 653 includes a pair of guided elongated holes 653a, which are elongated in the front and back, and are formed on both upper and lower sides as elongated holes through which the guide projections 614 are inserted. With the guided elongated hole 653a inserted into the guide protrusion 614, the fitting part 652b of the fixed cover 652 is fitted to the tip of the guide protrusion 614, so that the guide protrusion of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is fitted. Falling off from the installation part 614 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 50(a) and 50(b), the inner member 670 includes a plate-shaped portion 671 arranged to face the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and It includes an extending wall portion 677 that extends outward in the form of a wall, and a rectangular projecting portion 678 that projects rectangularly inward from the left and right at the rear portion of the upper end of the plate portion 671 .

The plate-like portion 671 has a first elongated hole 672 formed as a long elongated hole in the vertical direction on the back side of the elevating plate member 630 than the front-back position, and a first elongated hole on the front side of the first elongated hole 672. A second elongated hole 673 is bored as an elongated hole that extends parallel to the first elongated hole 672 from an upper end that is shifted above the upper end of the first elongated hole 672; A curved long hole 674 bored as a connected curved long hole is provided.

In FIG. 48, the fastening portion is shown only on the upper end rear side of the left inner member 670 as the connection portion between the plate-shaped portion 671 and the rear case 510, and no other fastening portions are shown on the rear side of the inner member 670. As can be seen from this, the position of the plate-shaped portion 671 is fixed not mainly by direct fastening to the rear case 510, but by fastening via the outer member 610 and decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40) which are fastened to the rear case 510. In other words, the plate-shaped portion 671 generates a fixing force with the rear case 510 by indirectly fastening to the rear case 510.

The plate-shaped portion 671 has multiple fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws are inserted from the left and right outside in the left-right direction into the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610, and the inner member 670 is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by screwing in the fastening screws.

The first long hole 672 is formed to be wider than the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674. As a result, in this embodiment, the first long hole 672 can be used as a through hole for electrical wiring, and the electrical wiring connected to the light-emitting operation production unit 700 can be prevented from being exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670, as will be described in detail below.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed with the same width. The curved shape of the curved elongated hole 674 is an arc with the center of the cylindrical portion 684 as an axis when the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided to the first elongated hole 672 is located at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672. formed as a shape.

The extension wall 677 includes a partition wall 677a that is formed from the plate-shaped portion 671 to the left and right outside and surrounds the first long hole 672, and a protective extension 677b that extends from the front edge to the left and right inside in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illumination board 570, 580.

The displacement member 680 is made up of a box-shaped main body 681 formed in a generally rectangular box shape with the left and right inner sides open, a pair of fastening parts 682 formed by protruding outward from the short side wall parts of the box-shaped main body 681, an extension part 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-shaped main body 681, a tubular part 684 protruding cylindrically in the left and right outer directions from the corners of the box-shaped main body 681, a fall prevention collar member 685 fastened and fixed to the tip side of the tubular part 684, and the extension part It is equipped with a metal rod-shaped member 686 that is fitted and fixed into a fitting recess 683a formed as a circular recess on the base end side of 683, a plurality of ring members 687 that are arranged in the gap between the relatively displaceable members and through which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted, a large-diameter ring member 688 through which the cylindrical portion 684 is inserted, and front and rear ring members 689 that are inserted into the fastening portion 682 while being arranged to sandwich the light-emitting action production unit 700 from the front and rear (see FIG. 46).

The fastening portion 682 has a female threaded portion into which a fastening screw is screwed into the connecting hole 764 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is connected to the displacement member 680 by this fastening screw.

The extending portion 683 functions as a portion that protects the light emitting action producing unit 700 from coming into contact with the inner member 670 when the light emitting action producing unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (the extending portion 683 and the light emitting action producing unit (See FIGS. 45 and 46 for the arrangement relationship of 700).

The cylindrical part 684 has an irregularly shaped opening 684b formed to pass through the box-shaped single part 681 in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential side, and drop-off prevention collars at both positions sandwiching the central axis passing through the irregularly shaped opening 684a. A fastening portion 684a is formed into which a fastening screw inserted into the member 685 can be screwed.

The cylindrical portion 684 is inserted into the first long hole 672 of the inner member 670, and the fall-prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684. An irregular opening 685a is formed in the center of the fall-prevention collar member 685, and is an opening of approximately the same size as the irregular opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684.

In other words, when the fall-prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the tubular portion 684, an opening penetrating in the left-right direction is formed on the inner periphery of the tubular portion 684 and the fall-prevention collar member 685. This opening functions as a through hole for electrical wiring connected to the light-emitting operation production unit 700. This will be explained here.

The other end of the electrical wiring, one end of which is connected to the light emitting action production unit 700, is brought out through the wiring through hole 762 (see FIG. 48) of the light emitting action production unit 700, and is connected to the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680. It passes through the irregularly shaped opening 684b and the irregularly shaped opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 to the left and right outer side than the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670, and further passes through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 to the plate-shaped wire. It is brought out to the left and right outside of the portion 611.

The irregular opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protruding portion (a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted) that protrudes inward from the diameter position of the circle, and when the irregular opening 685a rotates in the circumferential direction, the protruding portion catches the electrical wiring, displacing the electrical wiring in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to suppress friction that occurs between the irregular opening 685a and the electrical wiring, making it easier to prevent breakage of the electrical wiring.

The other end of the electrical wiring is routed to the back side of the back case 510 from the left and right outside of the plate-shaped portion 611, and is connected to an individual relay board. The regions on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 are at least hidden by the decoration fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40).

At one end of the electrical wiring, there is a possibility that the electrical wiring will be exposed at a position between the light emitting action producing unit 700 and the displacement member 680, but in this embodiment, the box-shaped main body 681 covers the electrical wiring. The extension plate part 763 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 extends in front of the wiring through hole 762 so as to cover the electrical wiring in a front view (see FIG. 48). ). Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being exposed at a position between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the displacement member 680.

By passing the electrical wiring in this way, it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring being exposed in the left and right inner areas of the pair of left and right inner members 670. This solves problems that tend to arise when the electrical wiring is visible to the player, such as the electrical wiring being placed in front of the third pattern display device 81 and hiding the display, thereby reducing visibility, or the electrical wiring being placed in a disorganized manner, which makes it look messy and reduces the presentation effect. In other words, it is possible to improve the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 while hiding the electrical wiring from the player.

At this time, the partition wall 677a can restrict the arrangement of electrical wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670, so the elevating plate member 630 is disposed on the front side of the partition wall 677a. It is possible to avoid a situation where the electrical wiring and the electrical wiring come into contact with each other.

The metal rod member 686 has E-rings fitted into its left and right outer ends to form a rod shape with a flange, preventing the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. The metal rod member 686 is inserted in the following order: the left and right inner ends are inserted through the ring member 687, the front and rear long hole 636 of the lift plate member 630, the ring member 687, the second long hole 673 (curved long hole 674) of the inner member 670, the ring member 687, and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680, and is fitted and fixed in the fitting recess 683a of the extension portion 683.

In this way, the metal rod member 686 is a member that is inserted into the lift plate member 630 and the inner member 670, and its vertical arrangement depends on the change in arrangement caused by the lift plate member 630's lifting and lowering action, and its front-rear arrangement depends on the arrangement of the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674. The metal rod member 686 is configured so that the arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light-emitting action production unit 700 to which the metal rod member 686 is fitted and fixed changes depending on the change in arrangement and posture, but the changes in the arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light-emitting action production unit 700 will be described later.

The front and rear ring members 689 are comprised of a plate-shaped ring member 689a arranged on the box-shaped main body 681 side, and a flanged ring member 689b that has a flange that extends outward from the end of the cylinder.

The plate-like ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 is sandwiched between the respective plate-like parts arranged in front and back, and the cylindrical part 689b1 of the flanged ring member 689b serves as an intermediate connection described later. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the connected hole 764 of the member 760.

The rotational posture assisting member 690 is disposed on the left and right inner side of the rectangular protrusion 678 of the inner member 670, and is fastened to the rectangular protrusion 678 by inserting fastening screws from the left and right inner side into the fastening portions of the rectangular protrusion 678.

The rotational posture auxiliary member 690 includes a box-shaped main body part 691 that is formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides open and fastened and fixed to the rectangular projecting part 678, and a box-shaped main body that is arranged on the left and right inner sides of the box-shaped main body part 691. A cylindrical member 695 rotatably supported by the portion 691 is provided.

The box-shaped main body part 691 includes an extension part 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends of the back side, and a cylindrical member 695 is supported by a rotating shaft extending in the left and right direction on the left and right inner sides of the extension part 692. has been done. That is, the cylindrical member 695 is placed at the rear end and lower side of the box-like main body 691, and is placed away from the player, so that the cylindrical member 695 is prevented from being excessively conspicuous. be able to.

The light emitting operation production unit 700 is a unit connected to the fastening portions 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides, and its arrangement and attitude change as the arrangement and attitude of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides change.

Figure 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, Figure 52 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, and Figure 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting action performance unit 700. Note that Figure 53 shows an exploded view of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 as viewed from the direction looking up. Also, in addition to the light-emitting action performance unit 700, Figure 53 shows the displacement member 680 in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting action production unit 700 includes a main body member 710 on which a rotation production device 800 is disposed, a lower plate member 730 arranged below the main body member 710 and fastened to the main body member 710, and a lower plate member 730 that is connected to the main body member 710 and the lower part. An intermediate plate member 740 disposed between the plate member 730 and closing the front side of the space, a plurality of decorative members 750 fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and a plurality of decorative members 750 disposed on the left and right sides of the main body member 710, It includes a pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 by fastening screws inserted from the outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape with the bottom and front sides open, and includes a number of fastening parts 711 formed so that fastening screws can be inserted from below into the lower plate member 730, a front edge part 712 extending downward from the front edge of the top plate, a number of clamping parts 713 arranged opposite the front edge part 712 with a size that allows the intermediate plate member 740 to be clamped between the front edge part 712, and a pair of left and right fixed plate parts 720 formed to connect the top plate and the rear side wall part on both the left and right sides.

The plate portion 720 to be fixed is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right axis so as to be able to support the intermediate connecting member 760 on its surface. It includes a plurality of fastening parts 721 that are formed so that the intermediate member 760 can be inserted and used for fastening and fixing the intermediate member 760, and a recessed part 722 that is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end on the back side.

The recessed portion 722 is formed so that the central axis of the semicircular shape is aligned with the central axis of the wiring hole 762 drilled in the intermediate connecting member 760. This allows the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring hole 762 to be aligned in a straight line from side to side, making it easier to pass electrical wiring through the wiring hole 762.

The lower plate member 730 has a number of insertion holes 731 for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portions 711 of the main body member 710, and a number of protrusions 732 that are arranged facing each other in the front and rear directions near the front edge.

The lower plate member 730 has a light diffusion process applied to the left and right outer portions of the lower surface, and is formed so as to reduce visibility when looking at the back side through the member. As a result, even when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is viewed from the lower plate member 730 side when looking upward (see FIG. 53), it is difficult to see the electric wiring, drive device, etc. arranged inside the light emitting operation production unit 700. be able to.

Furthermore, a pattern, figure, etc. may be drawn on the left and right inner sides of the lower surface of the lower plate member 730 (the approximately circular white painted portions in FIG. 53). As a result, even in a situation where the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is placed above the front of the third symbol display device 81 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 36), the lower surface is visible to the player. By allowing the player to visually recognize the patterns and figures of the light emitting action production unit 700, the production effect can be maintained.

The protrusions 732 are formed to perform the same function as the front edge 712 and the clamping portion 713 of the main body member 710. In other words, they are arranged side by side in a front-to-back manner with dimensions that allow them to clamp the intermediate plate member 740.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed into a thin plate shape whose left and right center portions are curved toward the front side along the shape of the front edge of the lower plate member 730, and a plurality of illumination boards 741 are fastened and fixed to the back side. be done.

The intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. That is, the upper edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the front edge portion 712 and the sandwiching portion 713 of the main body member 710, and the lower edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the protrusion portion 732 of the lower plate member 730. Therefore, the number of fastening screws for assembly can be reduced compared to when the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened to the main body member 710 or the lower plate member 730.

The illumination board 741 is arranged in the center on the left and right, and on both the left and right sides, and is configured to be able to irradiate light to the front side from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side. This allows for the creation of a lighting effect that makes the decorative member 750 glow.

The light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 741 only emits light toward the front side, and there is no light emitting means disposed downward (on the lower plate member 730 side), but the lower plate member 730, the light emitting action production unit 700 is placed diagonally above and in front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 36), so that the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is directed toward the lower board. The member 730 will be irradiated. That is, since the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be ensured by the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the presentation effect of the lower plate member 730 will be reduced can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 is a decorative member that is placed in the left-right center of the intermediate plate member 740 and is provided with a central decorative member 751 that is made of a thin resin material and has a three-dimensional shape, and a pair of left and right fastening members 755 that are placed on both the left and right sides of the central decorative member 751 and fastened to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing fastening screws that are inserted into the intermediate plate member 740 from the back side.

The member to be fastened 755 includes a plurality of fastening parts 756 into which fastening screws are screwed, and the central decorative member 751 has a hole at a position corresponding to the fastening part 756 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening part 756. A plurality of position holding holes 752 are provided.

The central decorative member 751 is fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751, but by inserting a fastening portion 756 for fastening and fixing the fastened member 755 to the intermediate plate member 740. It is being done. Therefore, the number of work steps for assembling the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 can be reduced, and the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, the plurality of fastening portions 756 are connected by a plate-like portion 757 having a curved cross section. The plate-like portion 757 has a shape corresponding to the proximal contact surface portion 753 that is the edge of the central decorative member 751 and abuts the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740.

As a result, in a state where the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 756 and the fastened member 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740, the proximal contact surface portion 753 is connected to the plate-like portion 757 and the intermediate plate member. Since the center decorative member 751 can be supported by being sandwiched between the central decorative member 740 and the central decorative member 740, the arrangement of the central decorative member 751 can be stabilized.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d). In addition, in the description of FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d), FIGS. 51 to 53 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 54(a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member 760, Figure 54(b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in Figure 54(a), Figure 54(c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVc in Figure 54(a), and Figure 54(d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 along the line LIVd-LIVd in Figure 54(a).

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a plate-shaped portion 761 that faces the fixed plate portion 720 of the main body member 710 and has a plurality of insertion holes 761a through which fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portion 721 are inserted, a wiring hole 762 that is drilled in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the plate-shaped portion 761, an extension plate portion 763 that extends in the left-right direction from the plate-shaped portion 761 in a flat plate-like manner, a connection hole 764 that is drilled in the widthwise outer part of the extension plate portion 763, a pair of connection plate portions 765 that extend to connect with the plate-shaped portion 761 at the widthwise center of the extension plate portion 763, and a shielding extension plate 766 that extends from one widthwise end (lower plate member 730 side end) of the extension plate portion 763 to the front side (intermediate plate member 740 side).

The angle between the straight line connecting the two insertion holes 761a arranged in the front and rear in the substantially central part of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the vertical direction and the horizontal straight line HL71 facing horizontally is designed as an inclination angle θ71. Although the angle of the inclination angle θ71 is not limited at all, in this embodiment, the inclination angle θ71 is approximately 5 degrees.

The plane on which the extended plate portion 763 is formed is arranged on the vertical line VL71 (facing in the direction perpendicular to the horizontal line HL71) facing the direction of gravity (the angle is 0). By arranging the extension plate portion 763 on the vertical straight line VL71, it is possible to facilitate the work when assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700 to the displacement member 680 from the front side, as described above.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 when the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is attached to the displacement member 680. Therefore, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 55) in which the initial position of the rotation performance device 800 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is inclined while maintaining the ease of assembling the intermediate connecting member 760 to the displacement member 680.

In this case, even when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted or intermediate state, the optical axis of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 can be directed diagonally forward. This allows the light emitted from the rotating member 810 to illuminate areas near the periphery of the game board 13 (for example, areas where the light from the third pattern display device 81 has difficulty reaching), making the entire game board 13 brighter and easier to see.

The connecting holes 764 are formed in two locations on each of the extended plate portions 763, but are formed so that the left and right holes have different shapes. That is, in the left intermediate connecting member 760, long holes 764a are formed on both sides of the width of the extended plate portion 763. On the other hand, in the right intermediate connecting member 760, long holes 764a are formed on one side of the width of the extended plate portion 763 (upper side in Figure 36), and a support hole 764b that is drilled in a substantially circular shape is formed on the opposite side of the width (lower side in Figure 36) (see Figure 36).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing the plate portion 761 and the extended plate portion 763 so that the angular relationship (positional relationship) can be maintained. In the posture shown in FIG. 53, the width direction of the extended plate part 763 supporting the plate part 761 is along the vertical direction (direction of gravity), so the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700 causes the extended plate part 763 to move against the plate part 761. The portion 763 is hard to break.

On the other hand, as will be described later, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be able to be tilted, and when the intermediate connecting member 760 is tilted forward approximately 90 degrees, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 is tilted in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity). , the extension plate portion 763 is likely to break with respect to the plate portion 761 due to the weight of the light emitting production unit 700.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the connecting plate part 765 is used for reinforcement, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate part 763 from breaking with respect to the plate part 761. That is, it is possible to easily avoid problems (occurrence of breakage) caused by the change in the posture of the intermediate connecting member 760.

The shielding extension plate 766 has the function of blocking the view of the connecting hole 764 when viewed from above (see FIG. 53) and the function of expanding the decorative presentation area by forming a decorative pattern on the outer surface (bottom surface in FIG. 53).

As shown in FIG. 53, in the same way that a decorative pattern is formed on the lower side of the shielding extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760, a striped pattern is also formed on the lower side of the box-shaped main body 681 of the displacement member 680. It is formed. Therefore, the lower surface of the shielding extension plate 766 and the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 can be easily seen as one unit, so the area where the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed can be easily seen. You can spread it out and make it visible.

Thereby, in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36), it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 when viewed in the direction looking up at the light emitting operation presentation unit 700.

Therefore, when looking up, the performance effect using the light-emitting action performance unit 700 can be improved not only when the left and right central parts of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 are visible, but also when the left and right ends are visible.

The rotation performance device 800 includes a rotating member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotating and displacing the rotating member 810, and a posture detection means 830 that rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810 and detects the posture of the rotating member 810.

The rotating member 810 is rotatably supported on the main body member 710 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700, and a low-friction bearing is used for the support. This makes it possible to reduce the degree to which the load caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 is transmitted to the light-emitting operation production unit 700, even when the rotating member 810 is driven to rotate.

The rotating member 810 includes a decorative plate 811 on which the decoration is formed, a heat sink plate 812 formed with an outer shape corresponding to the decorative plate 811 and arranged opposite the decorative plate 811, a rotating base member 813 to which the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink plate 812 are fastened and formed with a circular cross section and supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross section, and an arch-shaped transparent member 814 arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink plate 812.

The decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 are similarly shaped components made of a colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and the decorative plate 811 is decorated mainly with figures and patterns, while the heat sink 812 has intake openings 812a drilled in a row from the rotating base member 813 side, which acts as the base end of the rotation, to the tip end of the rotation (the longitudinal end of the rotating member 810).

The arch-shaped transparent member 814 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and has an arch shape that follows the curved surfaces of the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812, and is fixed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812. Light emitted from a light-emitting means such as an LED arranged on an illumination board (not shown) disposed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 passes through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 and travels in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating member 810.

The light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board are arranged in a row along the curved shape of the rotating member 810, similar to the intake opening 812a, and the intervals between the rows are set narrower than those of the intake opening 812a. By turning on and off these multiple LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotating light emission performance), it is possible to perform an afterimage display (afterimage display due to the afterimage effect) in which a specific display is visually recognized by the afterimage of light.

The light emitted from each LED is configured to travel through each passage that is partitioned into adjacent passages in the rotational radial direction inside the rotating member 810 and extends in a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and does not enter other passages. It is formed so that it is not. As a result, the traveling path of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement locus of the LED light in the rotating light emission effect) can be made clear, so that the afterimage display can be visually recognized as a clear display.

A roughening process (diffusion process) is formed on the concave side surface of the arch-shaped transparent member 814. This allows the LED light to be diffusely reflected and diffused, so that glare can be suppressed compared to when the LED light is directly viewed.

The following describes the intake opening 812a of the heat sink 812. The intake opening 812a is drilled in the tangential direction of the rotational circumference of the rotating member 810, and acts to draw air between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotated and displaced.

In the configuration of the position between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, the opposite side of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 (the lower side in Fig. 51) is open, making it possible to exhaust air. In addition, between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, a recess that extends continuously along the arch shape extending in the radial direction of rotation is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotating member 810 rotates, the air taken in from the intake opening 812a flows outward in the rotational radial direction through the concave portion along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814, and is discharged to the back side. , the air can be exhausted to the atmosphere. Due to this air flow, the heat inside the rotating member 810 can be dissipated (radiated) to the outside, so that problems caused by the illumination board becoming high temperature can be easily avoided.

The arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 allows air to be sent smoothly to the rear side, preventing the generation of vortexes. This allows air to be smoothly taken in from the rear side of the rotating base member 813, allowing cooling to be performed near the rotating shaft.

In other words, when air is allowed to flow outward in the radial direction, the air pressure on the inner side in the radial direction decreases, so that air can be taken in from the back side, and the air flow can be circulated during rotation. Thereby, the heat dissipation effect can be continuously produced.

The cooling effect of the air flow is not only expected when the rotating light-emitting performance is being performed, but various other modes are exemplified. For example, when the rotating member 810 is swivelled back and forth while the internal operating unit 600 is in a retracted or intermediate state, air circulates through the intake opening 812a, and the illumination board can be cooled.

In this embodiment, in consideration of decorativeness, the decorative plate 811 is not formed with an intake opening 812a (see FIG. 37). The intake of air through the intake opening 812a acts to take in air in the direction of travel of the intake opening 812a, so if the rotation direction is fixed in one direction, the side that takes in the air will be biased to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, which may reduce the cooling effect of the illuminated board by half.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 is not fixed in one direction, but is controlled so that it rotates in one direction in a first performance mode and in the other direction in a different second performance mode. This makes it possible to prevent the air intake side from being biased toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect for the illumination board can be expected.

The attitude detection means 830 includes a detection gear 831 that rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810 by meshing with a gear portion supported by the rotation shaft of the rotation member 810, and a detection gear 831 that rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810, and a detection gear 831 that rotates in the axial direction from the radially outer side of the detection gear 831. A detection groove is disposed at a position where an extending portion extending in parallel can enter, and a detection sensor 832 is capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extending portion has entered the detection groove. , is provided.

The attitude detection means 830 can be designed to detect which attitude the rotating member 810 is in, but in this embodiment, the rotating member 810 has a decorative plate 811 on the decorative member 750 side. At least detecting that in the arranged state, the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is in a posture along the left-right direction, and the decorative plate 811 is placed on the front side (appropriate posture, see FIG. 51). The position at which the extending portion of the detection gear 831 is formed is designed so that the detection gear 831 can be formed at a position where the extension portion of the detection gear 831 is formed.

Figures 55 to 57 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along line LV-LV in Figure 36. While the game board 13 is not shown in Figure 36, Figures 55 to 57 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled position. Figures 55 to 57 chronologically illustrate how the internal operating unit 600 changes from a retracted state to an extended state.

That is, in FIG. 55, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the retracted state, in FIG. 56, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the intermediate state, and in FIG. 57, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the internal operation unit 600 is configured such that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are displaced during the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the extended state. The displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 is configured such that the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction occur in stages, the details of which will be described later.

In the configuration of this embodiment, the positioning of the rotation performance device 800, which is particularly eye-catching, will be described. Because the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 change position in the forward rotation direction, the forward/backward positioning of the rotation performance device 800 in the extended state is located closer to the front than the forward/backward positioning of the rotation performance device 800 in the retracted state and intermediate state.

As a result, by positioning the rotation performance device 800 on the rear side in the retracted state, space can be secured on the front side of the rotation performance device 800, making it possible to position the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 closer to the front to improve the performance effect, while in the extended state, the position of the rotation performance device 800 when performing a rotational light-emitting performance in which the rotation performance device 800 rotates can be moved closer to the player, increasing the impact of the rotational light-emitting performance. Therefore, the performance effect in both the retracted state and the extended state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the irradiation direction LD81 of light from the rotation effect device 800 is set to the front side in the extended state. On the other hand, considering that the intermediate state and the retracted state are also used for light production, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set not directly above but diagonally forward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid an extreme decrease in the utility value of the rotating effect device 800 as a light effect means in the intermediate state and the retracted state. Note that details of the light effects will be described later.

With the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 set diagonally forward when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the extended state. The posture change angle in the forward roll direction required for this is smaller than 90 degrees. As a result, the time and space required for changing the posture can be shortened compared to the case where the posture changing angle is 90 degrees.

In the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation production unit 700 supporting the rotation production device 800 is in a posture inclined in the forward rotation direction, so that the longitudinal width increases slightly. Therefore, normally, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is placed closer to the back side, or the light emitting action producing unit 700 is designed so that its displacement is suppressed inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. , a collision between the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the base plate 60 is avoided.

However, if the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is placed toward the back side, the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 will be farther away from the player, and the impact of the presentation may be halved. Also, if the displacement of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is restricted to the inside of the central opening 60b, the movements tend to be smaller, and the impact of the presentation may be halved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, space is secured on the rear side by using a central structural unit 240 that is thinner than the base plate 60. Furthermore, the front-to-rear arrangement of the illumination board 251 to improve the presentation effect is contained within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and a recess 252a is formed in the board holding plate 252 to form a gap between the light-emitting action presentation unit 700. This allows for greater freedom in the position and placement of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700, while preventing the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 from colliding with the structure of the game board 13.

The posture change in the forward rotation direction of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 does not start in the retracted state, but descends while maintaining the same posture until the intermediate state, and the posture change starts from the intermediate state. The starting position of this posture change is defined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, as described later, and is determined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, and It is configured not to be changed depending on the control mode.

In the intermediate state, as can be seen from the fact that the rotation effect device 800 is located below the vertical position H1 (see FIG. 56) of the lower edge of the decorative portion 247 in the horizontal center cross section, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 The central opening 60b is located in front of the rotating performance device 800, and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not provided, so there is no possibility of collision.

By starting the change in posture of the light-emitting action production unit 700 in the forward rolling direction from this state where there is no possibility of collision, the possibility of the light-emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 colliding with the game board 13 can be reduced.

Thereby, the space for arranging the illumination board 251 and the decoration part 247 can be avoided from being limited by overlapping with the displacement trajectory of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement positions of the illumination board 251 and the decorative portion 247 can be improved.

Next, we will explain the configuration for gradually dividing the displacement modes of the light-emitting action production unit 700 and the rotational performance device 800. In this embodiment, the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is configured to be guided by two long holes of different shapes.

Figures 58(a) to 58(c) are schematic side views of the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674, which are schematic views of the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674.

58(a) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state, FIG. 58(b) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the intermediate state, and FIG. 58(c) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state. , the arrangement of the components in the extended state of the internal working unit 600 is illustrated.

In FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), for ease of understanding, the external shapes of the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the box-shaped main body portion 681 of the displacement member 680, and the extension portion 683 are shown as imaginary lines. The outlines of the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 and the metal rod member 686 (the outlines of the portions surrounded by the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674) are shown as solid lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), in this embodiment, the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed from different shapes, and the light emitting operation is produced. The light emitting production unit 700 is configured to be displaced in stages by changing the way in which the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal bar-shaped member 686 are guided in accordance with the vertical position and posture of the unit 700 depending on the arrangement. The details will be explained below.

The driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 680 holding the light emitting production unit 700 via the elevating plate member 630. That is, in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the front and rear elongated holes 636 are the most upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 (see FIG. 47).

That is, as the elevating plate member 630 moves up and down in the vertical direction, the metal rod member 686 disposed inside the front and rear elongated holes 636 is displaced in a permissible direction, and the displacement of the metal rod member 686 causes other parts to move upward and downward. follows and is displaced.

First, the first elongated hole 672 and the second elongated hole 673 are arranged so that their elongated directions match the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673 and the cylindrical part 684 is guided to the first elongated hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the metal rod member 686 is connected to the displacement member 680. The forward displacement of the light emitting production unit 700 is suppressed, and the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in parallel in the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod member 686 is guided into the curved long hole 674, which is formed along an arc with the center axis J1 being the center of the cylindrical portion 684 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600 (the state in which the cylindrical portion 684 is in contact with the lower end of the first long hole 672), and is connected to the lower end of the second long hole 673.

Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided into the curved elongated hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the extended state), the vertical position of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained, and the metal rod member 686 is centered about the central axis J1. By the rotational displacement, the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction about the central axis J1.

When moving the elevating plate member 630 upward from the state shown in FIG. No direct drive force transmission from 630 occurs.

Therefore, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state (see FIG. 58(b)). When the internal operation unit 600 moves from the intermediate state to the retracted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the cylindrical part 684 is moved through the box-shaped main body part 681 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fixed. The cylindrical portion 684 moves upward while being lifted up by the elevating plate member 630.

That is, the displacement of the displacement member 680 due to the lowering of the elevating plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a), through the state of FIG. 58(b), and then to the state of FIG. 58(c). The displacement of the displacement member 680 as the elevating plate member 630 rises is designed as a displacement from the state shown in FIG. 58(c), through the state shown in FIG. 58(b), and then to the state shown in FIG. 58(a). be done.

The driving force for these displacements is transmitted through the longitudinal elongated hole 636, whose direction of displacement is defined as the vertical direction (linear direction), and whose longitudinal length is determined by the length of the metal rod member 686 passing through the curved elongated hole 674. is set to be long enough to allow. That is, since there is no need to switch the displacement direction of the front and rear elongated holes 636 in accordance with changes in the displacement mode of the light emitting production unit 700, the design of the elevating plate member 630 can be simplified.

Note that the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotational presentation device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotational presentation device 800 in the extended state is set forward, so that the light emitting presentation unit The displacement angle of 700 in the forward rotation direction is designed to be slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the first elongated hole 672 is formed wide at the irregularly shaped opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 50(a)). One purpose is to form a gap large enough to pass the electrical wiring, since it functions as a wiring through-hole for the electrical wiring to pass through.

As another object, a larger diameter shaft supported when the light-emitting performance unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction can increase the support area (area of the peripheral surface). This reduces the load (frictional force) generated per unit area of the support part (first long hole 672) when the displacement is accompanied by a change in posture, thereby preventing localized wear and improving the durability of the tubular part 684 and the first long hole 672. This allows for greater freedom in designing the material of the components, and for example, even if the tubular part 684 is made of a resin material, it can have sufficient durability.

The second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 are long holes for guiding the displacement of the metal rod member 686, and are narrower than the first long hole 672. The driving force generated by the drive motor 648 is transmitted to the metal rod member 686 via the lift plate member 630. Although the metal rod member 686 has a small diameter, it is made of metal, and there is no need to run electrical wiring inside, as the inside is filled, providing sufficient strength.

By forming the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 to have a narrow width, the clearance between them and the metal rod member 686 can be reduced, thereby stabilizing the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 700.

Therefore, the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which displacement in the vertical direction and displacement in the forward rotation direction are switched) can be reduced. Thereby, stepwise switching of the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be smoothly performed.

We will explain in what direction the weight of the light-emitting action production unit 700 acts during the displacement process. Figures 58(a) to 58(c) show the center of gravity position G1 of the light-emitting action production unit 700.

The lift plate member 630 regulates the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, but the tubular portion 684 is not directly supported by the lift plate member 630. Therefore, the tubular portion 684 is suspended from the lift plate member 630 via the box-shaped main body portion 681, the extension portion 683, and the metal rod-shaped member 686, and the position is maintained by the first long hole 672 restricting the displacement.

Therefore, from the retracted state to the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the load (metal rod-shaped Since a load in the backward rotation direction centering on the member 686 is generated, the cylindrical portion 684 is biased forward and diagonally downward by the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700.

This allows the cylindrical portion 684 to abut against the front side of the first long hole 672 and the large diameter ring member 688 (see FIG. 50(a)) to roll in one direction, which reduces wear on the cylindrical portion 684, the large diameter ring member 688, and the first long hole 672 compared to when they slide without a fixed rotational direction.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the cylindrical portion 684 is supported from below by the first long hole 672 (downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 maintains the position of the cylindrical portion 684 at the lower end of the first long hole 672, and generates a load that displaces the metal rod member 686 downward along the direction of the cylindrical portion 684 as the axis of rotation (load in the forward rotation direction centered on the cylindrical portion 684), so that the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 urges the metal rod member 686 in a direction along an arc centered on the central axis J1.

Therefore, when the internal operating unit 600 starts to change state from the intermediate state to the extended state, the load is generated by its own weight, so the displacement can be generated smoothly. In this embodiment, the center of gravity position G1 is disposed between the metal rod member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 in the front-rear direction, so that the distance from the axial metal rod member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 to the center of gravity position G1 can be prevented from becoming excessively long.

This allows the load in the rotational direction around the metal rod member 686 and the load in the rotational direction around the cylindrical portion 684 to be prevented from becoming excessive, and can be generated at an appropriate magnitude.

During the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, the metal rod member 686 is configured to overtake the tubular portion 684. With this configuration, the tubular portion 684 can be stopped and only the metal rod member 686 can be displaced vertically.

Compared to the case where the cylindrical portion 684 is also displaced upward when the metal rod member 686 starts to displace upward from the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the driving force required to start the upward displacement of the displacement member 680 can be reduced. This allows the drive motor 648 to be made smaller.

Moreover, by shortening the vertical displacement width of the cylindrical portion 684, the vertical displacement width of the electrical wiring inserted through the cylindrical portion 684 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of disconnection of the electrical wiring.

The following describes how the light-emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 look when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the light-emitting action production unit 700 is configured to perform different types of light-emitting performances by displacing it in the forward rotation direction.

59 to 61 are front views of the operating unit 500. 59 to 61, for convenience of explanation, the external shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the illumination board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 are shown. Illustrated in white.

In Figures 59 to 61, the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illuminated board 251 are painted white to express their low light transmittance. In reality, the illuminated board 251 is made of an opaque material and blocks the player's view, but the decorative part 247 is made of a light-transmitting material, so the player can see through it even though it has low light transmittance (it is possible to see the configuration on the back side through the decorative part 247).

Figure 59 illustrates the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, Figure 60 illustrates the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, and Figure 61 illustrates the extended state of the internal operation unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the rotation performance device 800 is positioned behind the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251, and most of it is hidden when viewed from the front. This reduces the visibility of the rotation performance device 800 itself. In this state, the detectable part 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown) and is detected by the detection device, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines that the lifting plate member 630 is positioned at the upper end of the vertical displacement.

Furthermore, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are visually recognized as being separated by the decorative portion 247. Therefore, the light emitting operation unit 700 executes a front-facing light effect performed by applying light emitted from the illumination board 741 (see FIG. 51) to the decorative member 750, and the rotation effect device 800 When performing an upward light effect in which light is radiated toward the user, each light effect can be viewed separately, so each light effect can be highlighted.

In this embodiment, the bow-shaped surface that is the part that emits light from the rotating performance device 800 (the surface that is arranged opposite the outer rail 62 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front) and the outer rail 62 are designed to have a similar shape as an upwardly convex curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotation performance device 800 is in a position different from the position for performing the rotation light-emitting performance described below, the rotation performance device 800 can be visually recognized as if it were a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. This increases the utility value of the rotation performance device 800 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, and improves the appearance of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state.

As an effective effect of the light irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 to the outer rail 62, a right-hit suggestion effect is envisaged, in which the light is visually perceived as moving along the path of the ball. For example, the order of irradiating light from the rotation effect device 800 can be changed so that the leftmost LED irradiates range E1 of the outer rail 62 located above, and the next LED to the right irradiates range E2 of the outer rail 62, and then ranges E3, E4, and so on. At the same time, the LED that irradiated the light is set to a first light emission control mode in which it is turned off a certain time (for example, 1 second) after the irradiation timing, so that it appears as if the light is moving to the right along the outer rail 62, thereby informing the player that it is time to hit to the right.

In this case, in order to perform a right-handed playing suggestion, the game board 13 (see FIG. 18) may be dotted with illuminated boards, or the third symbol display device 81 may design figures and pictures to display the right-handed playing suggestion. You can save the effort of

Note that the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is not limited to the case where it is executed only by the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light-emitting effect by the rotating effect device 800, the light-emitting means arranged on the illumination boards scattered on the game board 13 may be made to emit light, or in addition to the light-emitting effect by the rotating effect device 800. , the third symbol display device 81 may display figures or pictures for suggesting right-handed hitting.

Since the arrangement position of the rotation performance device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, no nails are arranged in front of the rotation performance device 800. As a result, the light emitted from the rotating performance device 800 can be easily seen by the player since it is not affected by reflection from the nails.

In addition, as described below, the rotation effect device 800 can perform a rotation light-emitting effect when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, but can also be used as a device that can perform a right-hit suggestion effect by shining light on the outer rail 62 when the internal operation unit 600 is in a retracted state, which has a different posture from the extended state. In other words, the rotation effect device 800 can be used for effects with different purposes.

Note that the light effect executed by the rotation effect device 800 is not limited to the right-handed hitting suggestion effect. For example, as a preview performance in which the central light emitting means 251b of the illumination board 251 as a performance device executes a light emission performance, a light performance such as making an upward arrow visible to the player may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state, the rotation performance device 800 is positioned below the decorative part 247. This increases the visibility of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 by the amount that is not blocked by the decorative part 247, compared to the retracted state.

Furthermore, compared to the retracted state, it is easier to grasp that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 are integrally configured, and the vertical distance between the outer rail 62 and the rotation performance device 800 is wider.

Therefore, the role of the rotational performance device 800 can be easily recognized not as a component for illuminating the outer rail 62, but as a component that performs light performance in conjunction with the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700.

This gives the player the illusion that what was a small presentation object in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, where the central decorative member 751 was just barely visible, has transformed into a large presentation object that includes not only the central decorative member 751 but also the rotating presentation device 800 in the intermediate state.

As shown in FIG. 61, the rotation performance device 800 is in a posture in which the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. In this state, when irradiating light from the rotation effect device 800 in the above-described first light emission control mode, the light can be visually recognized as moving to the right along the left-right direction. With this method as well, it is possible to make the player understand that it is a right-handed playing suggestion effect.

Note that, unlike the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a in the game area in this embodiment (see FIG. 31), if the specific winning opening 65a is arranged on the lower right side of the game area, the attitude of the rotation presentation device 800 may be changed so that the longitudinal direction of the rotation presentation device 800 is inclined downward to the right, and light may be emitted in this attitude in the first light emission control mode described above. In this case, since the specific winning opening 65a is located at the destination of the light, it is easy for the player to understand that the ball should be fired toward the specific winning opening 65a.

The rotation performance device 800 is arranged so as to be able to perform a rotation operation of one rotation or more when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. Although there are no particular limitations on the operating speed of the rotation operation, for example, when rotating at high speed, by finely controlling the blinking of the light irradiated from the rotation production device 800 for each arrangement, figures and patterns can be displayed while rotating. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized (it may be configured as a so-called versatile writer device).

In FIG. 61, the detection device (not shown) detects that the lift plate member 630 is positioned at the lower end of the up-down displacement by the detection target portion 635 entering the detection groove of the detection device, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is facing in the forward-backward direction.

This detection may be used as a flag to control the rotating member 810 so that the rotational light-emitting effect can be executed. In other words, the detection device that detects the end of the movement of the lifting plate member 630 can also be used as a detection device that detects the timing when the rotating member 810 can start the rotational light-emitting effect.

FIG. 62 is a front view of the operating unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the illumination board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 are painted white. Illustrated in the state shown below. In FIG. 62, the outline of the afterimage in a state where the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state and the rotary member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is rotating at high speed is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The high-speed rotation speed of the rotating member 810 is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the rear side becomes difficult to see due to an afterimage, or the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the rear side can be seen through a position where the rotating member 810 is not located, although an afterimage is generated.

Figure 62 shows the light effect (rotating light emission effect) of the rotation effect device 800, in which the rotating member 810 rotates at a rotational speed that makes it difficult to see the structure on the rear side due to an afterimage, and an example of a figure (a large arrow pointing to the right) that is controlled to be visible during rotation is shown.

In FIG. 62, for ease of understanding, the possible positions of the rotating member 810 are shown shifted by 45 degrees, but in reality, only an afterimage is visible, and the rotating member 810 rotates at a speed that makes it difficult to clearly see its outer shape. By making the figure visible as shown in FIG. 62, it is possible to notify the player (allowing him to know that it is time to hit to the right).

A specific method for implementing the rotational light-emitting effect will now be described. Inside the rotating member 810, multiple LEDs are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and are arranged so that light travels toward the front side through an arch-shaped transparent member 814. Therefore, the diameter of the trajectory (circular path) that the LEDs move along when the rotating member 810 is rotated around the rotation axis RJ1 varies depending on the distance from the rotation axis RJ1.

In FIG. 62, each LED is moved according to the high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810, depending on whether it is inside or outside the figure to be displayed (the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 62). When the LED is turned on and off, the afterimage of the light seen through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is seen as an integral part, allowing the player to see a specific figure (the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 62). .

The displayed figures can be varied in a variety of ways by switching the timing of on/off control of each LED in response to the rotation of the rotating member 810, which improves the degree of freedom in producing light emitting effects using the rotating member 810. be able to.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the rotation effect device 800 can be used to perform a notification effect (right hit suggestion effect) for the same purpose in various ways. That is, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, it can be performed in a manner in which light is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, and when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, it can be performed in both a manner in which the rotation effect device 800 does not rotate and a manner in which it rotates.

Therefore, compared to a case where there are only a few variations in the notification performance (for example, only one), it is possible to make it difficult to predict the performance. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, although the present embodiment has been described as an example of a notification effect suggesting a right-handed hit, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and various effects may be exemplified. For example, it may be possible to create a notification that suggests switching the direction of the light or the direction of the arrow alternately between left and right, or to switch the direction of the ball to the left or right. It is also possible to perform a notification effect suggesting a return.

Further, for example, by performing a light emitting effect so as to display an arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during high speed rotation in the rotating light emitting effect in the extended state, the outer rail 62 can be The light emitting effect that matches the shape of the can be continued even in the extended state. This makes it possible to provide consistency in the light emission effect.

As shown in FIG. 62, the rotational performance device 800 can rotate at high speed when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, but the rotational light-emitting performance is designed on the assumption that the rotational axis of the rotational performance device 800 is maintained, so this embodiment employs a structure that supports the rotational performance device 800 so that it does not become displaced by the load generated perpendicular to the rotational axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, we will explain the regulation of left-right displacement of the rotational performance device 800. The light-emitting action performance unit 700 is held by connecting the connecting holes 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680. Of the pair of connecting holes 764 on the left and right, only the lower right one is formed as a roughly circular support hole 764b rather than an elongated hole, and the others are formed as elongated holes 764a.

Here, by making the connecting hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected an elongated hole 764a, it is possible to allow for vertical positional deviation of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides when the light-emitting action production unit 700 is displaced in the vertical direction (see FIG. 39). On the other hand, if it is configured with only elongated holes 764a, there is a possibility that the rotation production device 800 will shift in position in the horizontal direction when the rotation production device 800 rotates at high speed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by making at least one hole a support hole 764b, the support hole 764b can restrict the left-right movement of the fastening portion 682, so that even if the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed during a rotational light-emitting performance, the positional deviation in the left-right direction of the rotation performance device 800 can be suppressed.

Figures 63(a) to 63(c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680 and the long hole 764a and support hole 764b of the connected hole 764. In Figures 63(a) to 63(c), the longitudinal direction (left-right width direction) of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is illustrated as a schematic straight line 700L.

In other words, in FIG. 63(a), the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the left-right direction, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is kept in a horizontal position, in FIG. 63(b), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted upward to the left, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is tilted at the maximum allowable tilt angle, and in FIG. 63(c), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted upward to the right, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is tilted at the maximum allowable tilt angle. Note that the state shown in FIG. 63(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, and the state shown in FIG. 63(c) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 39.

As shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(c), the inclination of the schematic straight line 700L is caused by a rotational displacement with the support hole 764b as the fulcrum. Figure 63(b) shows the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the left end of the long hole 764a located in the upper left of the drawing, and up to this state, rotation (clockwise rotation when viewed from the front) of the schematic straight line 700L (corresponding to the light-emitting action production unit 700) is permitted.

Figure 63 (c) shows the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the right end of the long hole 764a located at the top right of the drawing, and up to this state, rotation (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front) of the schematic straight line 700L (corresponding to the light-emitting action production unit 700) is permitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where the support holes 764b are employed at a plurality of positions, it is possible to allow the positional deviation of the fastening portions 682 arranged on the left and right sides in the direction of the straight line UD71 along the up-down direction. Therefore, in a configuration in which the elevating and lowering operations of the light emitting operation production unit 700 are performed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right sides, a shift in the operation timing of the drive motors 648 and variations in rotational speed occur. can be tolerated.

When the opening direction of the support hole 764b is in the front-to-rear direction as shown in FIG. 63 (when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted or intermediate state), the rotation of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is permitted as a displacement in the movement direction of the lift plate member 630 (the direction along the straight line UD71, the up-down direction).

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted and the opening direction of the support hole 764b is set to be approximately vertical (in this embodiment, the angle with respect to the vertical direction is 5 degrees), that is, when the internal operation In the case of the extended state of the unit 600 (see FIG. 62), the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane substantially perpendicular to the straight line UD71 (in this embodiment, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is 5 degrees), and intersects the straight line UD71 at a substantially right angle.

The elevating plate member 630 is guided by the elongated hole 612 (see FIG. 49) to be displaced in the direction of the straight line UD71, but since the longitudinal displacement is regulated, the longitudinal displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is suppressed. has been done. Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane substantially perpendicular to the straight line UD71, the allowable range of rotation of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

In other words, even when the long hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 relative to the lift plate member 630 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

In this case, as described above, by controlling the rotational light-emitting performance in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed to be performed in the extended state of the internal operating unit 600, it is possible to prevent the position of the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 from shifting during the rotational light-emitting performance. This makes it possible to omit the provision of a separate member for fixing the position of the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810.

In addition, in this embodiment, the support hole 764b is positioned on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (the rear side in the state shown in Figure 62), which makes it easier to limit misalignment caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (misalignment occurring on the front side of the light-emitting action production unit 700) compared to when the support hole 764b is positioned closer to the rotating member 810.

When the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted and displaced, a load in the rotational direction causes a load on the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction away from the displacement member 680 (in the direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 50) extends) (see FIG. 53). Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the fastening portion 682 will be overloaded and damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by setting the light emitting operation production unit 700 to a slightly tilted position (see FIG. 55) as the initial position, the intermediate connecting member 760 is moved to the lower edge side of the displacement member 680 before the tilting displacement. It is urged in the direction of approaching. That is, since the intermediate connecting member 760 is disposed close to the displacement member 680 on the side closer to the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 50(a)) serving as the rotation axis of the displacement member 680, the displacement member A load generated in a direction away from 680 can be easily generated as a load in the rotational direction of displacement member 680, and the load applied to fastening portion 682 can be reduced.

Next, the regulation of the vertical displacement of the rotation performance device 800 will be described. In this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the abutment plate 638 of the lift plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generating device 650, and this regulation can be performed when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

64 to 66 are cross-sectional views of the operating unit 500 taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. The LXIV-LXIV line is set as a line passing through the center of the plate thickness of the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating plate member 630. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 64 to 66 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled state.

Figure 64 illustrates the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, Figure 65 illustrates the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, and Figure 66 illustrates the extended state of the internal operation unit 600.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 66, the solenoid 651 is not energized, and the state in which the solenoid 651 is de-energized is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 65, a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and excited is partially cut out and illustrated for reference.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 66, when the solenoid 651 is de-energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 of the resistance generator 650 is located on the front side and enters the moving path of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630. .

Both upper and lower side surfaces of the abutted plate 638 and both upper and lower side surfaces of the longitudinal displacement member 653 are formed into a planar shape orthogonal to the up-down direction. Thereby, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the abutted plate 638 can be matched with the direction of the load that the abutted plate 638 receives from both the upper and lower side surfaces of the longitudinal displacement member 653 in the moving direction.

As a result, the load applied from the abutment plate 638 to the front-rear displacement member 653 does not have a rearward component, so the front-rear displacement member 653 is prevented from being pushed out toward the rear side. Therefore, the front-rear displacement member 653 is maintained in a state in which it is positioned on the front side.

In the state shown in FIG. 64, the longitudinal displacement member 653 abuts the abutted plate 638 in the vertical direction and functions to prevent the abutted plate 638 from moving downward. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 can prevent the elevating plate member 630 from moving downward due to its own weight, so the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

In this embodiment, an upward biasing force is generated by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 47) on the lifting plate member 630. By designing the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 to be large enough to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state, it is possible to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state without functioning the front-rear displacement member 653.

In this case, however, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 becomes large, and the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 to displace the lift plate member 630 downward becomes large, so it may be necessary to enlarge the drive motor 648. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which the front-to-rear displacement member 653 maintains the internal operation unit 600 in a retracted state as in this embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as a purely auxiliary force, and the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutment plate 638 in the up-down direction, and functions to prevent the abutment plate 638 from being displaced upward. In other words, even without energizing the drive motor 648, the front-rear displacement member 653 can prevent the lift plate member 630 from being displaced upward, so the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the extended state.

The load that causes the elevating plate member 630 to move upward is assumed to be a load due to the inertia of the rotating effect device 800 (see FIG. 62) during the rotating light emission effect. That is, when the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed, there is a possibility that the rotation performance device 800 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but displacement in the vertical direction can be prevented by the longitudinal displacement member 653.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the longitudinal displacement member 653 not only allows the downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, but also the upward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state. can also be prevented.

The state shown in FIG. 65 corresponds to a non-excited state in which the lift plate member 630 is displaced downward when the solenoid 651 is energized and excited (see the cut-out area in FIG. 65), and then the solenoid 651 is de-energized.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-to-rear displacement member 653 moves away from the displacement trajectory of the abutted plate 638, thereby allowing the lifting plate member 630 to move up and down. Even if the solenoid 651 becomes de-excited during the up and down displacement of the lifting plate member 630, the up and down displacement of the lifting plate member 630 is not immediately restricted, but the up and down displacement can continue with the abutted plate 638 sliding against the front side of the front-to-rear displacement member 653.

In other words, the modes of the load that the elevating plate member 630 receives during vertical displacement include two modes in which the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the abutted plate 638, so it does not receive any load from the front-rear displacement member 653, and a front-rear displacement member 630 that receives no load from the front-rear displacement member 653. It is possible to configure a mode in which the solenoid 653 receives a frictional force by contacting the solenoid 653, and these modes can be switched depending on whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

Although the shape of the front side surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 that contacts the abutted plate 638 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the shape is a planar shape that is perpendicular to the front-rear direction across the pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614. It has a curved surface shape that curves away from the abutted plate 638 at upper and lower outer sides than the guide protrusion 614 .

This makes it possible to widen the vertical width of the contact surface with the abutted plate 638, whose back side surface has a planar shape perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and to secure the contact area, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 can The frictional force that the elevating plate member 630 receives can be increased, and the degree to which the elevating plate member 630 is braked can be increased in both the up and down directions.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the elevating plate member 630 that is being vertically displaced can be braked (or stopped) by the longitudinal displacement member 653. That is, the longitudinal displacement member 653 includes a member for maintaining the arrangement of the elevating plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (in the retracted state and extended state of the internal operation unit 600), and a member for braking the elevating plate member 630 during displacement. It can also be used as a member.

The driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 via the transmission gear 649 that meshes with the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630, and as described above, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 is urged rearward by its own weight. As a result, the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is optimized, and the transmission efficiency of driving force is improved.

In contrast, when braking the lift plate member 630, the load applied from the front-rear displacement member 653 to the abutment plate 638 is a load toward the front side, which acts to move the rack gear 634 away from the transmission gear 649.

Therefore, when the longitudinal displacement member 653 comes into contact with the abutted plate 638, not only the effect of deceleration due to braking due to the frictional force generated at the abutment position but also the meshing state of the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 are achieved. It is possible to produce a deceleration effect by reducing the degree of meshing (lowering the degree of meshing and reducing the transmission efficiency of driving force). Thereby, the elevating plate member 630 can be efficiently braked (decelerated).

An example of switching control of energization of the solenoid 651 will be described. The description will be made based on the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. First, before starting to drive the drive motor 648, the solenoid 651 is energized to retreat the longitudinal displacement member 653 from the displacement locus of the abutted plate 638.

As a result, the lift plate member 630 becomes displaceable in the up and down direction, and the drive motor 648 starts to drive, displacing the internal operation unit 600 downward toward the extended state. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 in a state prior to the extended state (e.g., when the internal operation unit 600 is in an intermediate state), the front-to-rear displacement member 653 is pressed against the abutment plate 638 (see FIG. 65), and the lift plate member 630 can be braked by frictional force.

When the internal operation unit 600 reaches the extended state in this state, the abutted plate 638 is placed below the displacement locus of the longitudinal displacement member 653, so that the longitudinal displacement member 653 is moved forward by the return spring of the solenoid 651. (See Figure 66).

Therefore, the action exerted by the front-rear displacement member 653 on the abutment plate 638 can be smoothly changed from braking to position regulation without switching between energizing and de-energizing the solenoid 651.

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced upward from the extended state, the solenoid 651 is kept energized while the lift plate member 630 is displaced in the up and down direction, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 can be kept out of contact with the abutment plate 638. This prevents frictional resistance from being generated between the front-rear displacement member 653 and the abutment plate 638, so the driving force required for the lift plate member 630 to be displaced upward can be reduced, and the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

The following describes how the manner of rotational motion of the rotational performance device 800 changes in response to a change in the state of the internal operation unit 600. In this embodiment, the posture of the rotational performance device 800 also changes when the posture of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 changes to a forward or backward rotation direction, and the rotational motion (rotation angle) allowed for each posture changes.

Figures 67 to 69 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 36. Line LXVII-LXVII corresponds to a line passing through the center of the width of the cylindrical member 695 (see Figure 37) of the rotational posture assist member 690. The game board 13 is not shown in Figure 36, but Figures 67 to 69 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled position.

67 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600, FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b) show an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b) ), the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated. That is, FIGS. 67 to 69 illustrate in chronological order how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state and then to the retracted state.

Note that Figures 68(a) and 69(a) show the rotating member 810 in the correct position, with its longitudinal direction aligned with the left-right direction, and Figures 68(b) and 69(b) show the rotating member 810 in a state in which its end on the front side of the drawing has reached the end of its permitted movement toward the rear side.

That is, FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 abuts against the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (although not in contact in FIG. 68(b), the abutment is to the right of the cross section shown (the front side of the paper in FIG. 68(b))), and FIG. 69(b) shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 abuts against the cylindrical member 695 of the rotational attitude assisting member 690 (although not in contact in FIG. 69(b), the abutment is to the right of the cross section shown (the front side of the paper in FIG. 69(b))).

In the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in FIG. 67, the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 is configured to be able to rotate more than once (more than 360 degrees) in the rotation direction RD1 centered on the rotation axis RJ1, as an example of a rotational light-emitting performance. In other words, the decorative parts 247 and the like arranged on the center frame 86 are positioned so as not to enter the movement trajectory of the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800.

In FIG. 68, the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 810 of the rotational performance device 800, so that the rotational angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotational performance device 800 is limited to the angle at which the rotating member 810 is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and comes into contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 68(b)).

Basically, before the internal operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the intermediate state, the posture of the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 is controlled so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is aligned with the left-right direction (controlled to the correct posture), and then the state is controlled to change to the intermediate state, so there is a low possibility of the rotating member 810 colliding with the bottom wall portion 511.

In this embodiment, even if erroneous control causes the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 to collide with the bottom wall portion 511, the rotating member 810 is positioned so that it collides with the bottom wall portion 511 above the upper edge of the opening 511a of the bottom wall portion 511, so that it is possible to avoid the rotating member 810 colliding with the third pattern display device 81.

In FIG. 69, since the cylindrical member 695 of the rotation posture auxiliary member 690 is arranged on the back side of the rotation member 810 of the rotation production device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation production device 800 is 810 is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and is limited to an angle until it comes into contact with the cylindrical member 695. That is, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is smaller in the retracted state (see FIG. 69(b)) than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 68(b)).

In this embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotated and displaced until it abuts against the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, even if the state change continues until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the retracted state, the rotating member 810 abuts against the cylindrical member 695 during the state change (upward displacement of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700) and is pushed forward, so that the posture of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the posture difference from the correct posture of the rotating member 810 is reduced.

Since the rotating member 810 has a symmetrical shape in its proper posture (see FIG. 61), and the cylindrical member 695 is arranged in a symmetrical position, it is possible to determine whether a difference in posture of the rotating member 810 occurs on the left or right side. The attitude of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the attitude difference from the proper attitude of the rotating member 810 becomes small (regardless of which direction of rotation about the rotation axis RJ1 occurs).

Since the rotating member 810 rotates around the rotation axis RJ1, the rotating member 810 comes close to the base plate 60 on the opposite side (the other left or right side) to the side (one left or right side, see Figure 69) where the rotating member 810 displaces toward the rear side and abuts against the cylindrical member 695. If the position is significantly deviated from the correct position, the rotating member 810 may wear out due to friction between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60, or may be damaged by a collision.

On the other hand, as the cylindrical member 695 functions as described above, the attitude of the rotating member 810 changes to return to the proper attitude in the process of the state change of the internal operation unit 600 toward the retracted state. The rotation members 810 on the other left and right sides can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60. Thereby, contact between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 can be avoided.

As described above, the cylindrical member 695 is a member that functions to push the rotating member 810 forward by contacting the rotating member 810, and is formed in a rollable, true circular cylinder shape to prevent wear on the rotating member 810. In other words, the cylindrical member 695 is configured to rotate when in contact with the rotating member 810, so as not to leave scratches on the rotating member 810.

To maintain this functionality, it is preferable to eliminate decorative shapes as much as possible, but when the tubular member 695 is viewed by the player, its shape may be too simple when viewed together with other decorative parts, creating a sense of incongruity.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 is positioned closer to the retracted position (upper and rearward) than the position of the rotating member 810 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, so that attention to the cylindrical member 695 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be positioned on the rear side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 36), so that the visibility of the cylindrical member 695 can be reduced by the rotating member 810.

Therefore, while the shape of the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be an optimal shape to avoid wear of the rotating member 810, by lowering the visibility of the cylindrical member 695, it is possible for the cylindrical member 695 to be seen by the player. This allows the user to continue playing the game without feeling uncomfortable.

A description will be given of the light production that is possible due to the change in attitude of the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. As described above, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, making it possible to make the outer rail 62 emit light.

In addition, by changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1, one of the rotational ends of the rotating member 810 can be displaced forward. For example, in FIG. 69(b), since the rotating tip on the back side (left side) of the paper can be moved toward the front side, the left side of the outer rail 62 can be made to emit brighter light, and the right side can be made to emit light slightly darker. Furthermore, by reversing the direction of attitude change of the rotating member 810, the difference in brightness between the left and right sides can be reversed.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emission intensity of the outer rail 62 is changed for each part. For example, by repeatedly changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 so as to reciprocate in the rotational direction about the rotation axis RJ1 without changing the intensity of the light irradiated from the rotating member 810, the light irradiated to the left and right of the outer rail 62 can be irradiated to the left and right of the outer rail 62. The apparent brightness of the light can be switched alternately between the left and right sides.

The following describes the light effects that are possible due to the positional changes permitted for the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state. As described above, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state, the rotating member 810 can change position at an angle that is greater than the positional change angle when in the retracted state. Therefore, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, and the arrival position of the light in the effect of illuminating the outer rail 62 can be positioned closer to the front.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 equipped with a light emitting device such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the position where the light is reflected on the outer rail 62 is changed to the front side (the player's side). Changes in the intensity of irradiated and reflected light can be made unnoticeable to the player.

Furthermore, the reachable range of the light is not limited to the outer rail 62, and the light can also be applied to portions located away from the outer rail 62, such as the sixth projecting portion 277 of the upper connecting member 270 (see FIG. 26). can be reached.

By swinging the rotating member 810 around the rotating shaft RJ1 disposed at the center position in the left and right positions, the longitudinal ends disposed on the left and right sides can be moved toward the front one side at a time, so that the base plate 60 In terms of strength, it is possible to assist the light production in a range (left and right outer positions) that is difficult to cover with the illumination board 251 designed to be arranged at the left and right center position.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is limited, the performance of the light performance in areas where the illumination board 251 is not arranged can be improved by the rotation performance device 800 disposed in the operation unit 500. This can be improved by lighting effects.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the first embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the sorting unit 3980 of the third embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed in front of the bulge 3982 that forms the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 70(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 3980 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 70(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 3980. As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b), the distribution unit 3980 is configured to be able to discharge the balls to the front side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3981 of the sorting unit 3980 has a pair of openings 3982k formed through the bulging part 982, and the balls that have passed through the openings 3982k and are discharged to the front side of the bulging part 982, to the left. It is equipped with a discharge gutter 3982l for discharging water to the rear side.

The opening 3982k is disposed on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed in a rectangular shape that is sized to allow the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass therethrough. .

In the discharge gutter 3982l, the left and right long portions are inclined downwardly toward the left, and the longitudinally long portions formed at the left end thereof are downwardly inclined toward the rear. Therefore, the ball that passes through the opening 3982k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and rides on the discharge gutter 3982l is flown to the left along the discharge gutter 3982l, and at the left end position, the flowing direction is switched to the rear side, being swept backwards.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive the balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3982k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing component cost. A gutter 3982l may be provided. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l disposed on the front side of the left opening 3982k slopes downward toward the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l disposed on the front side of the right opening 3982k descends toward the right. By configuring it to be inclined, the length of the discharge gutter 3982l alone can be shortened.

The following describes how the sphere appears after passing through the inlet 982d. The front base 3981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and the sphere that passes through the inlet 982d and flows down the back side of the bulge 982 can be seen through the bulge 982.

On the other hand, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the balls flow are formed to extend to the rear of the electric prop 140a, so in the area behind the electric prop 140a, the electric prop 140a acts as a shield, reducing the visibility of the balls.

If the difference between whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 is due to the direction in which the ball flows in the area behind the electric device 140a, the player will need to pay attention to the ball in an area with poor visibility, which may cause fatigue to the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, balls that deviate from the path toward detection device SE3 flow toward the front through opening 3982k, so not only do they appear to approach the player at eye level, but the flow toward the front occurs above the area hidden by electric device 140a, ensuring visibility of balls that pass through inlet 982d and flow in a direction that deviates from detection device SE3.

As a result, if a ball passes through the inlet 982d but no special symbol is drawn, it can be easily understood that this is the result of the ball missing the detection device SE3.

Other design features of the sorting unit 3980 will now be described. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 3982k to ensure a path for discharging the balls, the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) in the rear base 3985 of the rear base 985 in the first embodiment are omitted, and the left-right width near the bottom end of the bulge 982 is correspondingly shortened.

This allows the left-right width of the sorting unit 3980 to be shortened, and the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 to be made smaller, ensuring the area of the thick portion of the base plate 60 (the portion where nails can be planted). This allows for greater freedom in arranging the nails.

In addition, since it is now possible to place nails near the electric device 140a, it is possible to improve the freedom of placement of nails for guiding the ball to the electric device 140a.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. In the first embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the sorting unit 4980 of the fourth embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed on the rear side of the rear base 4985 that forms the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 71 (a) is a front view of the sorting unit 4980 in the fourth embodiment, and Figure 71 (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 4980. As shown in Figures 71 (a) and 71 (b), the sorting unit 4980 is configured to be able to discharge balls to the rear side upstream of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the rear base 4985 of the sorting unit 4980 is provided with a pair of openings 4985k formed on the left and right sides, and a discharge gutter 4985l that allows balls that pass through the openings 4985k and are discharged to the rear side of the rear base 4985 to flow down to the left and be discharged to the rear side.

The opening 4985k is disposed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed as a rectangular through hole large enough to allow the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through.

The discharge gutter 4985l has a long horizontal section that slopes downward toward the left, and a long front-to-back section formed at its left end slopes downward toward the rear. Therefore, a ball that passes through the opening 4985k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and enters the discharge gutter 4985l is swept leftward along the discharge gutter 4985l, and at the left end the flow direction changes to the rear side, causing the ball to be swept backward.

The discharge gutter 4985l is placed on the back side of the back base 4985, and is placed away from the player, but the front base 981 and the back base 4985, which are placed on the near side thereof, are made of a translucent resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the discharge gutter 4985l and the balls rolling in the discharge gutter 4985l through the front base 981 and the rear base 4985.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive balls on both sides of a pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing component costs, but each opening 4985k may be provided with a discharge gutter 4985l. In this case, the balls can be discharged by flowing them at least to the rear side from each opening 4985l, so it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985l long on both sides. This allows the shape of the discharge gutter 4985l to be simplified.

According to the configuration of this embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985l is formed on the back side, the discharge gutter 4985l can be avoided from being conspicuous, so that the design of the base plate 60 near the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) can be improved. It is possible to avoid the influence of the discharge gutter 4985L on the Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Other design features of the sorting unit 4980 will now be described. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 4985k to ensure a path for discharging the balls, the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) in the rear base 4985 of the rear base 985 in the first embodiment are omitted, and the left-right width near the bottom end of the bulge 982 is correspondingly shortened.

This allows the left-right width of the sorting unit 4980 to be shortened, and the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 to be made smaller, ensuring the area of the thick portion of the base plate 60 (the portion where nails can be planted). This allows for greater freedom in the placement of the nails.

In addition, since it is now possible to place nails near the electric device 140a, it is possible to improve the freedom of placement of nails for guiding the ball to the electric device 140a.

According to the configuration where the opening 4985k is formed on the back side, compared to the configuration where the opening is formed on the front side (see FIG. 70), the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k can be arbitrarily designed without depending on the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a. It becomes possible. Therefore, the probability that a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will be detected by the detection device SE3 (pass through the detection hole SE1a) without deviating can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be equal to the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will not pass through the opening 4985k and will be detected by the detection device SE3. It will pass through hole SE1a.

On the other hand, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will pass through the opening 4985k, and the remaining About 80% of the amount of light passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. That is, by arbitrarily designing the vertical width of the opening 4985k, the probability of detection by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that reaches the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided left and right, but in the upper connecting member 5270 of the fifth embodiment, smooth guidance of the ball in the left and right direction is suppressed. Various improvements have been made. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 72 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and Figure 73 is a partially cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper component 5241 constituting the center frame 86 has left and right protrusions 5246 that protrude from the band-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second protrusion 5273. The second protrusion 5273 has deceleration protrusions 5273a that protrude from the lower end toward the left and right positions of the deceleration protrusions 5246.

According to this embodiment, when a ball that flows down between the pair of left and right first protrusions 272 or between the first protrusion 272 and the second protrusion 5273 reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 and rolls left and right, it flows down as if being ejected outward to the left and right from the left and right protrusions 5246 and collides with the deceleration protrusions 5273a, causing it to decelerate.

In other words, the momentum of the ball is so great that it reaches between the pair of left and right first projecting parts 272 or between the first projecting part 272 and the second projecting part 5273, and the ball has a large kinetic energy. The speed can be reduced by collision with the reduction protrusion 5273a.

The overlapping width (vertical dimension) of the ball in contact with the deceleration projection 5273a varies depending on the speed of the ball when passing through the left and right projections 5246. That is, a ball passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 at a high speed will come into contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a at a higher position over a wide range, while a ball passing at a slow speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 will contact the deceleration protrusion 5273a at a higher position. It is displaced to a lower position before coming into contact with the portion 5273a, and is kept in contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a to the extent that it rubs against it.

Therefore, if the speed at which the ball passes through the left and right protruding portions 5246 is high, a large deceleration effect can be expected, whereas if the speed at which the ball passes through the left and right protruding portions 5246 is low, the deceleration effect can be suppressed, and the ball can be prevented from stopping.

According to the present embodiment, a ball that is fired along the firing path HL51 with a strong firing force and reaches the band frame part 245 on the upstream side (left and right inner side) of the left and right protruding parts 5246 is While a deceleration effect occurs due to contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a, the ball is launched along the launch path HL52 with a weak launch force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 on the downstream side (left and right outside) of the left and right protrusions 5246. The configuration is such that the deceleration effect by the deceleration protrusion 5273a does not occur.

In other words, the ball is fired with a strong firing force that reaches the center of the left and right sides of the game area, and a deceleration effect is generated by the deceleration protrusion 5273a, and the ball is fired with a weak firing force that reaches the left and right outside (left side) of the game area. The decelerating effect of the decelerating protrusion 5273a does not occur on the ball. Thereby, the difference in speed of the ball flowing down (flowing down when passing the lower end side of the band-shaped frame portion 245) due to the magnitude of the firing force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 73, an opening 5274a is formed through the upper surface of the third projecting portion 5274 and is large enough to allow a ball to pass through. The opening 5274a is formed with a horizontal width approximately equal to the diameter of the ball, and forms a passage for the ball in conjunction with the recessed portion 5271a formed by cutting out the plate-like portion 271. The recessed portion 5271a allows the ball to be easily guided toward the opening 5274a.

A through passage 5060d is formed in the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction as a passage for the ball that enters the opening 5274a. A flow path component 5295 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the base plate 60. The flow path component 5295 includes a guide flow path 5295a that receives the ball that passes through the through passage 5060d and guides the ball outward to the left and right and downward.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear structure portion 266 (see FIG. 25), which serves as a member for sending the ball to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, so that the inner path is communicated with the guide flow path 5295a. Thereby, the path of the ball can be configured so that the ball that has flowed toward the back side of the base plate 60 appears again on the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

The ball rolling on the belt-shaped extension part 263 (see FIG. 24) passes through the central rear inclined part 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, and then falls toward the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 18). Due to this arrangement, the possibility that the ball rolling on the strip-shaped extension portion 263 will enter the first prize opening 64 is significantly increased.

This can increase the attention paid to the ball that passes through the opening 5274a and flows to the back side of the base plate 60. In addition, it can increase the player's motivation to adjust the launch force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a.

Note that the subsequent path of the ball flowing toward the back side is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, through-holes may be formed in the base plate 60 so as to return to the front side of the base plate 60 at the left and right outer positions of the channel front component 265 (see FIG. 18), or the left component 450 and the right A flow path may extend downward so as to flow behind the component member 470.

When the flow path is extended downward so as to flow down behind the left component 450 or the right component 470, the flow path can be arranged so as to at least partially overlap with the outer drop path FL2 (see FIG. 31) in a front view, so that the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 appears as if it is flowing down toward the first ball guide section 457. This can increase the attention to the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 and 75. In the second embodiment, the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 13, but in the sixth embodiment, the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional views of a pachinko machine 6010 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in Figure 36. Figure 74 shows the state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is positioned at the upper end position, and Figure 75 shows the state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is positioned at the lower end position.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the pachinko machine 6010 has a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13, and is configured so that when the front frame 6014 is locked to the outer frame 11, the first glass unit 6016a blocks the front side of the game area.

The front frame 6014 comprises the first glass unit 6016a described above and the second glass unit 6016b, which is positioned closer to the front and has an inclined posture that inclines upward as it approaches the front.

The first glass unit 6016a has a sheet glass portion formed on the game area side with the center frame 86 as a reference, and an opening 6016c formed therethrough on the opposite side. That is, since the front of the center frame 86 is open in the first glass unit 6016a, the glass unit 6016a does not block the field of view when viewed from the front, so that the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device disposed inside the center frame 86 can be easily viewed from the front. The visibility of the display of 81 can be improved.

The second glass unit 6016b is fixed by being fitted inside the support part 6014a that forms the periphery of the front frame 6014. Since the second glass unit 6016b separates the player from the operating unit 500, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the operating unit 500 even if an opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a.

The support portion 6014a is formed from an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide the configuration arranged on the back side thereof.

The light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is the same as the light-emitting action performance unit 700 described in the second embodiment, except for the different arrangement. That is, the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 has a rotation performance device 800 rotatably arranged therein.

Inside the front frame 6014, there are a first elongated hole 6672, a second elongated hole 6673, and a curved elongated hole having the same shapes as the first elongated hole 672, second elongated hole 673, and curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment. 6674 is formed in a state inclined by about 25 degrees in the forward rotation direction with respect to the posture in the second embodiment.

A change in appearance of the light emitting operation production unit 6700 due to a change in arrangement will be explained. As shown in FIG. 74, when the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is placed at the upper end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the entire view of the rotating member 810 is hidden by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. That is, when the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is placed at the upper end position, the visibility of the light emitting action producing unit 6700 decreases.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation production unit 6700 is displaced diagonally backward and downward, the portion hidden by the support portion 6014a is placed behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the entire view of the rotating member 810 becomes visible. Furthermore, even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotating shaft RJ1 to perform a rotating light emission effect, the player can visually recognize the rotating tip side of the rotating member 810. That is, when the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position, the visibility of the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is improved.

Note that, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 75, the rotation locus of the rotating member 810 enters into the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, and an opening 6016c is formed at the entry position. , contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810 is avoided. In other words, the opening 6016c functions to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rotating member 810 by avoiding contact with the rotating member 810.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, while a light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13. The operation of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is as described above in the second embodiment.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light emitting action producing unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position as a producing motion in which the movable unit protrudes to the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, or the light emitting operation producing unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position, The motion production unit 700 may be in an extended state of the internal motion unit 600.

The rotational light-emitting performance of the rotational performance device 800 may be performed by the rotating member 810 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, or by the rotating member 810 of the light-emitting action performance unit 6700. This improves the freedom of setting the execution position of the rotational light-emitting performance, and improves the design freedom of the execution variations (variations such as performing the rotational light-emitting performance with either the light-emitting action performance unit 700 or the light-emitting action performance unit 6700, performing the rotational light-emitting performance alternately, performing the rotational light-emitting performance simultaneously, etc.).

Although a case has been described in which the light emitting operation production unit 700 is also disposed inside the back case 510, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the light emitting operation production unit 700 is not arranged inside the back case 510.

In this case, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the field of view is not obstructed by the light-emitting operation production unit 700, so the upper edge of the third symbol display device 81 is pulled upward to display the third symbol display device 81. The area of the region can be increased. In addition, since the front and back width of the back case 510 that was necessary to accommodate the light emitting action production unit 700 can be shortened, the front and back distance between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 can be shortened. The visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the second embodiment, the metal rod member 686 is guided by the linear second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674, thereby switching between a state in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 moves in parallel and a state in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 rotates around the central axis J1 of the cylindrical portion 684. However, the guide portion 7673 in the seventh embodiment is formed in a protrusion shape that extends linearly in the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

76(a) to 76(c) are schematic side views of the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674, schematically showing the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 in the seventh embodiment. 76(a) illustrates the arrangement of the configuration at the height in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, and FIG. 76(b) illustrates the arrangement of the configuration at the height in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, In FIG. 76(c), the arrangement of the structures at the height in the extended state of the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated.

In addition, the position of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 in the extended state is shifted rearward from the position of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment, as can be seen from the position of the cylindrical portion 684 being shifted rearward.

The guide portion 7673 is formed along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 673 described in the second embodiment, and is formed on the left and right inner surfaces of the outer member 610 as a plate-shaped portion that extends downward. , are arranged so as to restrict displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the front-rear direction. In the L-shaped elongated hole 7674, a recessed portion 7674a having a width capable of receiving the cylindrical portion 684 is formed rearward from the lower end of the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will now be described. The displacement from FIG. 76(a) to FIG. 76(b) is a parallel movement performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. In the displacement from FIG. 76(b) to FIG. 76(c), the metal rod member 686 undergoes rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion 684, causing the displacement member 680 to tilt in the forward rotation direction.

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in such a manner that it enters and retreats into the recessed portion 7674a in order to maintain a distance from the metal bar-shaped member 686. That is, while the displacement member 680 is changing its posture, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the cylindrical portion 684 remains displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the second elongated hole 673 for guiding the metal rod member 686 extends in the vertical direction, but the second elongated hole 8673 in the eighth embodiment extends in the vertical direction. It extends along an inclined direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figures 77(a) to 77(c) are schematic side views of the second long hole 8673, the curved long hole 8674, the third long hole 8675, the first long hole upper portion 8672a, and the first long hole lower portion 8672b, which are schematic views of the second long hole 8673, the curved long hole 8674, the third long hole 8675, the first long hole upper portion 8672a, and the first long hole lower portion 8672b in the eighth embodiment.

Figure 77(a) shows the metal rod member 686 and the tubular portion 684 positioned at the upper end of the displacement range, Figure 77(b) shows the metal rod member 686 positioned at the connecting position between the second long hole 8673 and the curved long hole 8674, and Figure 77(c) shows the metal rod member 686 positioned at the connecting position between the curved long hole 8674 and the third long hole 8675.

The upper portion 8672a of the first long hole and the second long hole 8673 extend rearward in a direction that is inclined downward at an inclination angle of approximately 70 degrees with respect to the front-to-rear direction. The curved long hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second long hole 8673.

The curved long hole 8674 extends in a curved shape along an arc centered on the central axis J81 of the cylindrical portion 684 when the cylindrical portion 684 is positioned at the connecting position between the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b.

The upper end of the third elongated hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved elongated hole 8674. The first elongated hole lower part 8672b and the third elongated hole 8675, which are connected to the lower end of the first elongated hole upper part 8672a, extend forward in a downwardly inclined direction at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. be done.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted into the longitudinal hole 636 of the elevating plate member 630, and its vertical position changes as the elevating plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction. The displacement of the displacement member 680 due to the change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 will be explained.

The displacement from Figure 77(a) to Figure 77(b) is a parallel movement that is performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not vertical, but a direction that has a front-to-rear component. From the player's perspective, the displacement member 680 appears to be descending and retreating toward the rear, so that it appears as if the size of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is getting smaller (moving away) as the light-emitting action production unit 700 descends and appears.

In the displacement from FIG. 77(b) to FIG. 77(c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction. Accordingly, the visible surface of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be switched. In this embodiment, since the tilt angle is larger than that in the second embodiment, the player can see the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 51).

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in such a manner that it enters and retreats into the recessed portion 7674a in order to maintain a distance from the metal bar-shaped member 686. That is, while the displacement member 680 is changing its posture, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the cylindrical portion 684 remains displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

When the metal rod member 686 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 77(c), the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third elongated hole 8675. Therefore, it can appear to the player that the displacement member 680 is lowering and protruding forward. At this time, since it is once displaced backward along the second elongated hole 8673, the forward protrusion can be emphasized.

In this embodiment, the displacement resistance of the cylindrical portion 684 is configured to increase when the cylindrical portion 684 is disposed at the connection position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. . That is, in FIG. 77(b), the inner surface of the first elongated hole lower part 8672b that comes into contact with the rear side part of the cylindrical part 684 is caused by the friction of other parts of the first elongated hole lower part 8672b and the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper part 8672a. It is made of a material with a large coefficient of friction compared to the coefficient of friction.

This makes it easier to maintain the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the upper portion 8672a of the first long hole and the lower portion 8672b of the first long hole until the metal rod member 686 reaches the end position of the curved long hole 8674.

The method of maintaining the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b is not limited to using a material with a large friction coefficient, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first long hole upper portion 8672a or the first long hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape with a large friction coefficient (e.g., an embossed shape).

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the second embodiment, the long hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the left-right direction and short in the vertical direction. However, the large-diameter hole 9764a in the ninth embodiment has a cylindrical shape It is a circular hole having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the portion 689b1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

78(a) and 78(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member 9680 and the light emitting operation production unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa line in FIG. 37.

In FIG. 78(a), the fastening portion 682 faces approximately in the front-rear direction (a direction that is tilted upward by 3 degrees toward the front), and the upper edge of the large diameter hole 9764a abuts and is supported by the cylindrical portion 689b1. The condition is illustrated. In FIG. 78(b), the posture of the displacement member 9680 is switched to a posture in which the fastening portion 682 faces downward, and a ring member 9689b with a flange and a light emitting operation producing unit 9700 are attached to the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682. The state in which it is supported is shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, the plate-like ring member 689a that sandwiches the large-diameter hole 9764a from both sides and the flanged ring member 9689b differ in the manner of contact with the light emitting operation production unit 9700. That is, the plate-like ring member 689a contacts the light emitting operation producing unit 9700 at the plate plane portion. On the other hand, in the flange ring member 9689b, an inclined surface portion 9689b2 is formed over 360 degrees from the tip of the flange portion toward the cylindrical portion 689b1 side, and an inclined surface portion 9689b2 is formed over 360 degrees at the end of the large diameter hole 9764a. The surface contacts the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1.

In the state shown in FIG. 78(a) (corresponding to the retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is tilted backward, so the light emitting operation production unit 9700 cannot move toward the rear. and comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Because this contact is on a plane, the sliding frictional force against the rotational displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 around the fastening portion 682 is small, and the light-emitting action production unit 9700 can be displaced at least by the gap between the large diameter hole 9764a and the cylindrical portion 689b1. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 can be tolerated.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 78(b) (corresponding to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 faces downward, causing the light-emitting operation performance unit 9700 to sink downward and come into contact with the brim ring member 9689b.

This contact is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees and the chamfered slope portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees, so the center of the large diameter hole 9764a aligns with the center of the fastening portion 682. The light emitting operation production unit 9700 is arranged as shown in FIG. By filling the space, the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be restricted (regulated).

The weight of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 acts in a direction such that the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is pressed against the inclined surface portion 9689b2, so gravity can be used to increase the degree of restriction on the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 9700.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the degree of permissible (limited) displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be switched in accordance with a change in the posture of the displacement member 9680. Therefore, even if the large-diameter hole 9764a, which is a through-hole with a simple circular cross section, is adopted, the light emitting operation production unit 9700 will move forward and backward when the displacement member 9680 is tilted and displaced (see FIG. 78(b)). It is possible to prevent positional displacement in both the direction and the left and right directions.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the position of the light emitting action production unit 9700 from shifting when the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 62) rotates at high speed, so that afterimage display by the rotating member 810 can be advantageously performed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the second embodiment, the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotating member 810 has reached the correct posture, which facilitates tilting of the rotation performance device 800 in the forward and backward directions. However, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 810 is biased to the correct posture by the posture detection means 10830. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the posture detection means 10830 in the tenth embodiment. In 79(a) and 79(b), the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated in a protruding state, the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the fixed gear 10815 fixed to the rotating member 810 is illustrated by a solid line. Also, in 79(b), the correct posture of the rotating member 810 is illustrated, and in 79(a), the state in which the rotating member 810 is angularly deviated from the correct posture (displaced in the rotational direction by about 15 degrees around the rotation axis RJ1) is illustrated, and the rotation direction of each gear 10815, 10821, 10831 toward the state shown in 79(b) is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), in the rotating member 810, the driving force of a drive gear 10821 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 820 is transmitted to a fixed gear 10815 through meshing of the gears. The fixed gear 10815 is in mesh with the detection gear 10831 of the attitude detection means 10830.

The detection gear 10831 has a weight portion 10831a formed by pressing over an angular range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis. In this embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is a metal member that is fitted to the detection gear 10831, but it may also be formed integrally from a resin material.

With this configuration, the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is located toward the center of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc). Therefore, even if the rotation of the rotating member 810 stops in a position different from the correct position (see FIG. 79(a)), the detection gear 10831 is biased by gravity, so that the rotating member 810 can rotate and return to the correct position.

Therefore, even if it is not possible to accurately stop the rotating member 810 in the proper posture as the stopping posture of the drive motor 820 after performing the rotational light emitting effect in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 61), Since the rotating member 810 can then be returned to its proper attitude, the accuracy of detecting the attitude of the rotating member 810 can be reduced. Thereby, product costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 in the intermediate state and extended state of the internal operating unit 600 faces in a forward tilt direction rather than in a vertical direction (see Figures 68 and 69). Therefore, the force due to gravity using the weight portion 10831a can be generated regardless of the forward tilt position of the rotating member 810.

As a result, not only the movement mode in which the rotation member 810 is set in the proper posture in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 and then the rotation direction device 800 changes its posture in the rising direction, but also the movement mode in which the rotation direction device 800 changes its posture in the rising direction, as well as during the rising operation of the rotation direction device 800, It is possible to realize a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while returning it to its proper posture.

In addition, when the rotation performance device 800 performs a rising motion from the position shown in FIG. 79(a) (see the time series in FIG. 67 to FIG. 69), the rotating member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and can be returned to the correct position. That is, in this embodiment, the rotating member 810 is shaped so that it is susceptible to air resistance from the short side surfaces, which makes it easier to return the rotating member 810 to the correct position when performing a rising motion.

Note that the lateral side surface of the rotating member 810 may be formed into a narrow shape that is less susceptible to air resistance. In this case, the operational resistance of the rotational light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 can be reduced. The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the proper posture can be produced by the weight portion 10831a.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the upper connecting member 270 that connects the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is provided with the protruding portions 272-277 that distribute the balls' flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the part that distributes the ball's flow path may be formed as a recess rather than a protrusion. Also, a flow path that guides the ball through the recess may be formed so that the ball can be guided to another part of the play area.

For example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be arranged on the underside of the center frame 86, and configured to have a receiving portion that guides balls to any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140. Also, for example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured to have a through gate 67 arranged thereon.

In addition, the upper connecting member 270 is extended along the front side of the base plate 60, and a play area is formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the glass unit 16, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the upper connecting member 270 may be extended along the rear side of the glass unit 16 when the front frame 14 is closed, and a play area may be formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the base plate 60. In this case, a protruding portion may be formed that protrudes toward the base plate 60, and the flow path of the balls may be distributed.

In this case, the fastening position with the base plate 60 is important, but for example, if the fastening position is placed near the inner rail 61 in a place where it is unlikely to affect the flow of the ball (lower left of the return ball prevention member 68, etc.) , it is possible to secure a sufficiently large gaming area.

In the second embodiment above, the upper connecting member 270 is formed from a symmetrical shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the shape of the center frame 86 is designed so that the left side is away from the inner rail 61 to ensure a path for the ball to flow down, forming a large space between the inner rail 61, while the right side has a space between the outer rail 62 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball (as in the case of a typical right-handed machine), it is fully conceivable that the upper connecting member 270 will be formed only on the left side of the play area. It is also possible to design it so that the left and right sides are reversed.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which at least one of the base plate 60 or the center frame 86 is disposed on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270, and if the upper connecting member 270 has sufficient rigidity, the upper connecting member It is fully assumed that 270 has a portion on the back side where neither the base plate 60 nor the center frame 86 are arranged.

Further, the position where the center frame 86 constitutes the thin plate portion 242 and extends does not need to be at the center of the left and right sides. For example, they may be formed on both the left and right sides, or may be configured to protrude as thin plate portions 242 at multiple positions and engage with the base plate 60 (enter alternately with gaps).

Further, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed to a size that occupies most of the left and right width of the upper connecting member 270. In this case, the horizontal width in which the illumination board 251 can be arranged can be expanded.

Further, in the configuration in which the illumination board 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and is within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86. For example, if a thin plate member such as the upper connecting member 270 that is connected to the front surface of the base board 60 and forms one side of the game area is formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, the illumination board is placed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86. 251 can be placed within the thickness of the base plate 60 by incorporating the illumination board 251 into the distribution unit 300 and the winning slot component 400 disposed below the base plate 60. It may be configured as follows.

In the second embodiment, the illumination board 251 is arranged on the rear side of the upper connecting member 270 in a manner fixed to the base plate 60, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration similar to the light-emitting performance unit 518 arranged on the rear case 510 (a configuration in which a logo or the like corresponding to the model is formed and a light-emitting performance is performed by the LEDs of the illumination board arranged inside) may be arranged at the rear position of the upper connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the illumination board 251 may be omitted to make it easier for light from the rotation performance device 800 to pass through the upper connecting member 270 to the player side.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the light from the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c is irradiated onto the lower edge 272a of the first projecting portion 272, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the LED may be placed inside the first projecting portion 272 when viewed from the front. In this case, by providing a light diffusion process on the concave side of the first protruding part 272 or by providing a concave shape that tapers as it gets deeper in the concave direction, the inside of the first protruding part 272 is irradiated. It is possible to diffuse the light, reduce the visibility of the external shape of the LED, and improve the visibility of the light emitted from the LED.

In the second embodiment, the thin plate member 290 has been described as having colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters painted on the front surface of the plate, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least a portion of the thin plate member 290 may be light-diffusing or embossed, or the surface of the thin plate member 290 may be formed in a shape that fits into the recesses of the first protruding portion 272 and the second protruding portion 273 (for example, a convex lens shape or a three-dimensional shape).

In the second embodiment, the holes 291a and 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 connect the protruding portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side and the protruding portion 279 protruding from the upper connecting member 270. Although a case has been described in which the displacement of the thin plate member 290 is suppressed by accepting the thin plate member 290, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the protrusions inserted into the holes 291a, 291b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to protrude from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270. Also, instead of the protrusions 244b and the protrusions 279 being inserted into different holes 291a, 291b, they may be inserted into a common hole formed in the thin plate member 290. This not only positions the thin plate member 290, but can also be used to connect the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270.

In the second embodiment, the protrusion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the rear side of the second overhang 273, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 244b may be disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion 271 (so as to face the plate-shaped portion 271 in the front-rear direction). Note that when the protrusion 244b is formed inside the recess on the rear side of the second overhang 273, the second overhang 273 functions as a screen for the protrusion 244b.

In the second embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that flows down between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a flows into the first ball guiding portion 457 with some probability, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a gap may be provided between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a and the ball guiding portion 457, and a distribution portion 983 may be disposed between them to ensure that one of the two balls flows into the ball guiding portion 457. In other words, the proportion of balls that enter the ball guiding portion 457 may be changed depending on which of the two positions the distribution portion 983 is in when guiding the ball.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined guide part 458 is inclined in one direction (lower right direction) and guides the ball directly to the second ball guide part 459, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the inclined guide part 458 may extend from both the right and left sides of the ball guide part 457 in the opposite left and right directions, or, for example, the inclined guide part 458 may be configured to guide the ball in a meandering manner to the left and right. The ball may be configured to deviate from the second ball guide portion 459 with a certain probability at the turning position.

Furthermore, for example, the slope guide section 458 may be configured to change the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 depending on whether it guides a single ball or when it guides a plurality of balls at the same time. good. For example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide part 459 in a direction closer to the inclined guide part 458 in the left-right direction than the current position, the ball that has reached the second ball guide part 459 first may be able to catch the following ball before the ball reaches the second ball guide part 459 first. When the ball reaches the second ball guide section 459, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the ball is blocked by the previous ball and easily deviates from the second ball guide section 459.

Conversely, for example, by displacing the position of the second ball guide section 459 slightly away from the inclined guide section 458 in the left-right direction from its current position, a configuration can be realized in which if a ball that is likely to reach the second ball guide section 459 first and is falling between the inclined guide section 458 reaches the second ball guide section 459 before the ball has completely fallen, the following ball will roll over the preceding ball and be more likely to reach the second ball guide section 459.

If the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 is lower when a single ball is guided, multiple balls will enter the second ball guide section 459 and the number of prize balls paid out at once will be excessive. This situation can be avoided. On the other hand, if the probability of the balls reaching the second ball guide section 459 is higher when guiding a plurality of balls, then the attention paid to the vicinity of the inclined guide section 458 when a plurality of balls reach the inclined guide section 458 is lower. can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the inclined guide portion 458 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to protrude and retract forward and backward. In this case, in the protruding state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide portion 459 as in the second embodiment, while in the retracted state, the rate at which balls that flow to the right upstream of the first ball guide portion 457 reach the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. In addition, the inclined guide portion 458 is not limited to being displaced in and out, and may be configured to be tiltable at regular intervals around a rotation axis extending in the forward and backward directions so that the angle of inclination changes.

In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second ball guide section 459 is greater than the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first ball guide section 457. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of the profit obtained by the player depending on the ball entered may be different.

For example, the benefit may be obtained not by the payment of prize balls but by the benefit of a lottery for a pattern, or by the benefit of being able to select (vary) the number of rounds of the jackpot game by landing a ball before the start of the jackpot game, or by the benefit of changing (increasing) the probability of a winning pattern after the jackpot game by landing a ball during the jackpot game. These benefits can be set arbitrarily in the first ball guiding unit 457 and the second ball guiding unit 459.

In the second embodiment, the inclination of the ceiling plate portion 455 is approximately constant, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be a large angle with respect to the horizontal upstream from the midway position, and a small angle with respect to the horizontal downstream from the same midway position. In this case, the rolling speed of the ball is likely to change depending on whether the ball lands on the ceiling plate portion 455 upstream of the midway position or downstream of the midway position, making it easier to predict the subsequent flow path of the ball. In other words, attention to the midway position of the ceiling plate portion 455 can be improved.

Further, a plurality of protrusions may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 to reduce the rolling speed of the ball. In this case, the protrusions do not need to be formed over the entire horizontal width of the ceiling plate portion 455, but may be formed over a partial range, similar to the change in inclination.

Further, the plurality of deceleration protrusions are not limited to the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. For example, it may be provided protruding from the resin wall forming the guide channel that guides the ball downward toward the first ball guide section 457 toward the guide channel side, or it may be provided on the lower surface side of the bulge section 456 or from the inclined guide section 458. It may be provided so as to protrude from the upper surface side of the ball toward the downward flow path of the ball.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are formed is not limited to the direction intersecting the front-rear direction. For example, a protrusion may be provided protruding from the main body plate part 451 to the front side, or a front plate member formed in a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate part 451 is disposed on the front side of the main body plate part 451. When the ball is provided to form a downward flow path for the ball between the front plate member and the main body plate portion 451, a protrusion may be provided to protrude from the front plate member to the back side.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has fallen into the first ball guide section 457 is smoothly guided to the general winning hole 63, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the internal shape of the first ball guide part 457 is formed into a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end is formed with a size slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball passes through the first ball guide part 457. You can extend the time it takes.

In this case, if a trailing ball reaches the first ball guide part 457 while the ball remains in the first ball guide part 457, the ball can be easily guided toward the inclined guide part 458, and the second ball guide part 457 The probability of the ball hitting the ball can be increased. Therefore, the configuration can be such that a situation in which a ball is guided to the second guide part 459 side occurs without waiting for the rare situation in which a plurality of balls reach the first ball guide part 457 in a row.

As a method other than modifying the shape of the first ball guide section 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the ball may be provided. The movable member is configured to block the ball from entering the first ball guide section 457 for a predetermined period of time after the ball enters the first ball guide section 457, and is configured to guide the ball that reaches the movable member toward the inclined guide section 458. This can improve the probability that a ball will reach the second ball guide section 459 for a predetermined period of time after the previous ball has passed through the first ball guide section 457.

In the second embodiment, the left component 450 is formed from a fixed resin member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path of the ball may be changed by an electrically operated movable part. In this case, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to move forward and backward. That is, when it protrudes forward, it guides the ball toward the second ball guide portion 459, but when it retracts backward, the ball is not guided toward the second ball guide portion 459 and falls.

In addition, for example, a plate-shaped member arranged to block the first ball guide section 457 may be arranged so as to be able to protrude and retract forward and backward. That is, when the plate-shaped member protrudes forward, a ball that reaches the plate-shaped member is guided toward the inclined guide section 458, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball guide section 459, but when the plate-shaped member is retracted backward, the ball is more likely to fall into the first ball guide section 457.

Further, for example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate so that the inclined direction is reversed left and right in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b. When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, by making the slope direction of the slope plate part 434 downward slope toward the left and right inwards, the ball that deviates from the second ball guide part 459 to the left and right inside, and the ceiling plate part 455 A configuration may be adopted in which the balls that have fallen between the curved protrusion 414 and the opening/closing plate 65b are caused to flow into the opening/closing plate 65b side. Thereby, the ball can be configured to be guided toward the opening/closing plate 65b from a wide range.

The inclination of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to incline downwards to the left or right, regardless of whether it is electrically powered or not. Even in this case, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 434 still ends up at the outlet 71, so playability can be maintained.

In the second embodiment described above, the balls can be discharged from the play area through the outlet 415, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted, and the outlet 415 may be omitted, so that the balls that pass through the left component 450 flow down toward the opening and closing plate 65b. This can increase the variety of paths that the balls can take to flow down toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

In the above second embodiment, the opening and closing plate 65b is formed from a plate member having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, which is rotated and displaced on a rotation axis extending left and right along the lower edge, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to have a pentagonal shape when viewed from the front (a shape similar to home base) with the upper edge sloping upward toward the center on the left and right when viewed from the front. This makes it easier for the ball to flow outward to the left and right along the shape of the upper edge when it hits the upper edge.

In addition, an adjustment means may be provided to adjust the flow pattern of the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the upper edge of the opening and closing plate 65b. For example, an extension plate may be provided that extends downward from the left and right inner ends of the inclined plate portion 434 in parallel with the vertical plate portion 433, and a ball passage hole formed in the extension plate in the left and right direction and large enough to allow the balls to pass through may be provided.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage hole may be set at a position that is shifted from the position of the ball that has flown to the left and right outside on the upper edge 65b of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is open (shifted upward), and the opening and closing plate 65b may be designed at a position that allows the passage of a ball that has flown to the left and right outside of the upper edge 65b of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in a state between the open state and the closed state.

In this case, the extension plate and ball passage hole can be configured to keep the balls on the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, preventing leakage to the left and right, while allowing the opening/closing plate 65b to allow the balls to flow (spill) to the left and right when in the process of closing.

In addition, in order to maintain the posture of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state, a protruding portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 toward the back side is provided on the covering member 430 at a position where it can be supported. It may be formed into Further, the protruding portion may abut the opening/closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both ends of the opening/closing plate 65b in the left and right width direction. In this case, it becomes easier to maintain the open position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the second embodiment, when the sorting unit 300 passes through the discharge opening 325 after the ball guided forward by the direction switching unit 317 is switched in the left-right direction above the detection device SE3. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as an ejection opening to eject the ball. In this case, a through-hole large enough to allow a ball to fall may be formed in the lower surface of the direction switching unit 317, and the configuration may be such that the ball that has fallen into the through-hole is detected by the detection device SE3. Moreover, as a similar configuration, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed.

Alternatively, a similar configuration may be adopted in which the flow path switching direction by the direction switching unit 317 is set to the rear side instead of the front side, or the ball passes forward from above the winning opening 323 to the base board. It may also be configured such that it is discharged to the front side of the device 60.

In this case, since there is no need to arrange the discharge opening 325 on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3, the left and right distance between the pair of left and right detection devices SE3 can be narrowed, and the space on the left and right of the detection device SE3 can be effectively used as nail installation space, etc.

In addition, these configurations do not need to be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and different configurations may be used for the left and right. For example, a configuration may be used on either the left or right side during a jackpot game in which a ball passing forward from above the winning opening 323 can be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b. In this case, the probability that a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will return to the front side of the base plate 60 and be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b changes depending on whether the ball is guided to the side of the configuration through which the ball passes forward from above the winning opening 323 or the opposite. This can improve attention to the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64.

In the second embodiment described above, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is retracted above the center frame 86, and in the extended state, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 may be configured vertically and retracted to the left or right side of the center frame 86.

In addition, in imitation of the structure that projects forward from the upper edge of the front frame 14, a structure that projects forward from the left and right edges of the front frame 14 is adopted, and the projecting portion produces a light emitting action. The unit 700 may be configured to be evacuated. In this case, it can be configured such that it is retracted to the front side of both the left and right edges, and the light emitting operation production unit 700 is arranged in the front side of the third symbol display device 81 while being retracted in the extended state.

In the second embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 is described as the member that contacts the rotating member 810, but the material of the cylindrical member 695 is not limited in any way. For example, the cylindrical member 695 may be made of a hard resin material that does not deform under the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, excessive displacement of the rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

Further, it may be formed from a soft resin material that can be deformed (deformed by being crushed in the radial direction) even under the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, the cylindrical member 695 functions as a buffer material, making it easier to avoid damage to the rotating member 810.

In the second embodiment described above, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are designed to be viewed as one with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 when the internal operation unit 600 is in an intermediate state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 may be designed to be viewed as one with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 when the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is in a tilted position tilted to the left or right in a specific up-down arrangement. In this case, the performance effect of the bottom wall portion 511 and the decorative plate 811 can be improved by designing the content that is viewed as one unit to be different when the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is tilted to the left and when it is tilted to the right.

In the second embodiment, by tilting the light emitting action producing unit 700 while moving up and down, the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes when viewed from the front, and the vertical position of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes. Although the case where the two occur simultaneously has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the vertical arrangement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 may be maintained while the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed from the front may be changed. Also in the second embodiment, for example, when the light-emitting operation producing unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 is rotated by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, so that the projection direction of the rotating member 810 changes. Therefore, the outer shape of the rotating member 810 when viewed from the front can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the forward/backward displacement member 653 that generates resistance to the upward/downward displacement of the lift plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the forward/backward direction by the solenoid 651, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be displaced in a direction toward or away from the abutted plate 638, and a frictional force can be generated between the abutted plate 638 and the abutted plate 638, or the direction of movement can be blocked, thereby generating displacement resistance of the lift plate member 630.

In the second embodiment, the case is explained in which the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed in a direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630 (a direction on a plane perpendicular to the moving direction of the elevating plate member 630). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the elevating plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, if the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to incline upward as it moves forward, when the front-rear displacement member 653 moves forward, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward, the time until the lifting plate member 630 stops can be shortened by applying an upward load in addition to sliding friction if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward. On the other hand, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced upward, the kinetic energy of the lifting plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the lifting plate member 630 by applying an upward load in addition to sliding friction.

In addition, if the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed to be inclined downward toward the front, when the longitudinal displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced upward, the sliding In addition to dynamic friction, applying a downward load can shorten the time until the lifting plate member 630 stops. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced downward, in addition to the sliding friction, by applying a downward load, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630. Can be done.

In the second embodiment described above, the overlap width between the abutment plate 638 and the front-to-rear displacement member 653 when viewed in the up-down direction is configured to be approximately the same whether the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state or in the extended state, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed with an inclined surface that slopes more rearward as it approaches the top. In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 displaces forward as the abutment plate 638 is displaced downward, a load can be generated on the abutment plate 638 in a direction such that it is lifted up from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653, thereby strengthening the braking effect of the lifting plate member 630.

In addition, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed with an inclined surface that slopes more rearward as it approaches downward. In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 displaces forward as the abutment plate 638 is displaced upward, a load can be generated in a direction that presses the abutment plate 638 downward from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653, thereby strengthening the braking effect of the lifting plate member 630.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be such that an inclined surface that slopes backward as it goes upward from the lower end position and an inclined surface that slopes backward as it goes downward from the upper end position are arranged at a predetermined intermediate position. Correspondingly, a protruding portion extending rearward may be formed at an intermediate position on the rear end surface of the abutted plate 638.

In this case, when the longitudinally displacing member 653 is displaced forward with the abutted plate 638 disposed on the front side of the longitudinally displacing member 653, the abutted plate 638 comes into contact with a predetermined intermediate position on the front end surface of the longitudinally displacing member 653. The vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized in such a manner that the overhanging portion of the plate 638 is accommodated.

In this case, the number of portions where the downwardly inclined backwardly inclined surface and the upwardly inclined backwardly inclined surface are combined is not limited in the front end surface of the longitudinal displacement member 653. For example, the shape may include a plurality of parts to be combined (for example, a saw blade shape or a jagged shape). In this case, the vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 are configured to be vertically displaceable, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right lifting plate members 630 may be fastened and fixed to the light-emitting action production unit 700, and a configuration in which vertical displacement of the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 is not permitted may be used. In this case, it is sufficient to configure the resistance generating device 650 for generating displacement resistance of the lifting plate members 630 only on one side, the left or right.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since vertical positional displacement of the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 is allowed, it is preferable to arrange the resistance generating devices 650 on both the left and right sides. Using this configuration, control may be performed to shift the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651.

For example, when displacing the internal operation unit 600 downward from the retracted state to the intermediate state, the drive control of the drive motor 648 is performed with the pair of left and right solenoids 651 energized and the longitudinal displacement member 653 disposed at the rear. When the same drive control as above is executed with the left solenoid 651 energized and the right solenoid 651 de-energized, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is placed in an inclined position with the left side facing downward relative to the right side. It is possible to perform a performance movement like this.

This performance can be performed without placing a load on the internal operation unit 600 up to the operational error limit state of the internal operation unit 600. Furthermore, rather than increasing the number of drive patterns of the drive motor 648 for this performance, the performance is performed by reusing the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward, and exciting the solenoid 651 with a different excitation pattern. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drive patterns required of the drive motor 648.

Further, the timing at which the right solenoid 651 is de-energized is not limited to when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. For example, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the left and right solenoids 651 may be energized, and the right solenoid 651 may be de-energized while the internal operating unit 600 is in the intermediate state from the retracted state. In this case, the downward displacement of the right-side lifting plate member 630 can be delayed by the frictional force, and a performance operation is performed in which the light-emitting operation production unit 700 takes an inclined posture with the left side disposed downward relative to the right side. Can be done.

Although an example from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 has been described as a production operation, it is naturally assumed that the vertical direction is reversed. That is, the excitation pattern of the pair of left and right solenoids 651 described above may be executed in accordance with the displacement of the internal operation unit 600 from the extended state.

In the second embodiment, in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation of the rotation effect device 800 is controlled while the upward displacement of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 is regulated by the longitudinal displacement member 653. Although the case where the light emitting effect is executed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as a type of rotating light emitting effect executed with the internal operation unit 600 in an extended state, there is a lottery losing effect on both the left and right sides, which is different from the effect for announcing a jackpot that is executed with the rotating shaft RJ1 fixed. Alternatively, the rotational light emitting effect of the rotational effect device 800 may be executed while the left and right solenoids 651 are energized.

In this case, on the side where the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-to-rear displacement member 653 is retracted from the movement path of the abutment plate 638, so even if the light-emitting action production unit 700 or the lifting plate member 630 is displaced upward by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810, the front-to-rear displacement member 653 does not act to suppress the upward displacement.

Therefore, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 is easily displaced. As a result, it is possible to perform a motion effect in which the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 is executed without the rotation axis RJ1 being fixed, so that the rotational speed of the rotating member 810 and the light emitted from the rotating member 810 in the rotating light emitting effect can be changed. Although the light emission pattern is the same, the visually recognized figure can be made different by the afterimage display of the rotating member 810.

Note that in order to create a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be energized, or the solenoids 651 on one side of the left and right sides may be energized; By de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the other side, it is possible to restrict vertical displacement of the ascending plate member 630 on the de-energized side. It is possible to suppress upward displacement, and damage to the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission efficiency changes as the rack gear portion 634 approaches and moves away from the transmission gear 649, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be movable back and forth, and the transmission gear 649 may be movable back and forth with respect to the rack gear portion 634.

Further, the transmission gear 649 may be formed such that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 changes in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the elevating plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of the rack gear portion 634 while the meshing between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described above, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to move away from the transmission gear 649 to the extent that the meshing is released. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 runs out of control, the rack gear portion 634 is configured to move away from the transmission gear 649 before an overload is generated in the rack gear portion 634, thereby preventing damage to the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649.

In the second embodiment, the rack gear section 634 is pressed against the transmission gear 649 by the weight of the elevating plate member 630, and the meshing state of the gears is optimized. Although the case where the user is pushed away from 649 has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the direction of displacement of the rack gear portion 634, it may be configured to be displaced in both directions by the driving force of the solenoid 651. Further, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Further, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the drive shaft.

In the second embodiment described above, the thickness of the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 guided into the long holes 672-674 was described as being thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686 because electrical wiring is inserted inside the tubular portion 684, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the inside is not hollow but closed, the tubular portion 684 may be formed thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686, or the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed thicker than the tubular portion 684.

By making the metal rod member 686 (the front member) thick, a large area can withstand the load generated at a position far from the central axis J1 when the light-emitting action production unit 700 is tilted. This improves the durability of the metal rod member 686, and therefore improves the durability of the member when it is made of a resin material, for example.

Moreover, the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed with the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set for the long holes 672 to 674 can be designed with similar values, and the degree of wear of the long holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the second embodiment, the pair of upper and lower long holes 612 are designed to have equal clearances in the front-rear direction with the fastening parts 632, 633 of the lifting plate member 630, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the clearance between the lower long hole 612 and the lower fastening part 633 of the lifting plate member 630 may be greater than the clearance between the upper long hole 612 and the upper fastening part 632 of the lifting plate member 630. In this case, the allowable range for the lower part of the lifting plate member 630 to be displaced in the front-rear direction can be increased, making it easier to change the meshing state between the rack gear part 634 and the transmission gear 649 by displacing the lifting plate member 630 in the front-rear direction.

In the second embodiment, the second elongated hole 673 is formed as a vertically extending elongated hole, but the second elongated hole 673 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be configured to extend downwardly and inclined toward the front so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is disposed further forward. good. In this case, while the metal rod member 686 is guided in the second elongated hole 673, the metal rod member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction.

In other words, before the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state from the retracted state, it is possible to realize an operation that gradually changes the attitude of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 in the tilting direction.

The second long hole 673 does not need to be inclined from the upper end, but may be formed as a long hole in the vertical direction from the upper end to the middle, and then extended in a downward sloping direction from the middle. In this case, when the lift plate member 630 starts moving from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the position of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 can be maintained, so that collision between the base plate 60 and the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the center of gravity G1 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is disposed between the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod member 686, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity G1 may be located on the opposite side of the cylindrical portion 684 with respect to the metal bar-shaped member 686, or may be located on the opposite side of the metal bar-shaped member 686 with respect to the cylindrical portion 684.

In the second embodiment, the shape portion that supports the cylindrical portion 684 is formed as a long hole, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 684 may be configured to be rotatable around a fixed axis.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 680 supporting the light emitting action production unit 700 are disposed on both the left and right sides of the light emitting action production unit 700 and are displaced in the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the light emitting action producing unit 700 may be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction or in a direction that is a combination of the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, or the displacement member 680 may be disposed on either side of the light emitting action producing unit 700. Alternatively, the displacement members 680 may be arranged above and below the light emitting operation production unit 700 and may be configured to be displaced in the left-right direction or the front-back direction.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating effect device 800 that rotates is employed as the movable member disposed in the light emitting action effect unit 700, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that reciprocates in a linear direction may be employed, or a movable member that vibrates may be employed.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the support hole 764b is disposed on the lower side of the two upper and lower connected holes 764, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support hole 764b may be provided on the upper side, or the support hole 764b may be provided on both the upper and lower sides.

In the case where the upper and lower connected holes 764 on the right side are both support holes 764b and the upper and lower connected holes 764 on the left side are both elongated holes 764a, only the displacement in the horizontal direction of the light emitting operation production unit 700 with respect to the displacement member 680 is caused. This is allowed, and it is possible to suppress a change in posture in the direction of rotation of the light emitting operation production unit 700 about the fastening portion 682.

Furthermore, it is not limited to the long hole 764a, and any through hole with a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be designed. For example, it may be formed as a true circular through hole with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684. Also, for example, a long hole with a shorter longitudinal length than the long hole 764a may be used as the support hole 764b. In this case, the light-emitting operation production unit 700 can move horizontally in the left and right directions.

In addition, in setting the shape of the left and right connected holes 764, if both the diagonally connected holes 764 are set as support holes 764b, the misalignment of the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the left and right direction can also be avoided with the fastening portion 682 as the axis. Posture changes in the rotational direction are also suppressed. Therefore, it is good if it is formed with sufficient strength to prevent misalignment and the operation is controlled precisely, but if this is not the case, a slight malfunction may lead to damage to the light emitting operation production unit 700. , caution is required.

In the third embodiment, an opening 3982k is formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening 4985k is formed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Although the case in which a is formed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that both openings 3982k and 4985k are formed. In this case, resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the front side of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed on the rear side of the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a merging channel may be formed in which the balls discharged from these openings merge on the downstream side. In this case, since it is possible to change the appearance of the ball flowing left and right, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance using the ball.

Also, for example, an opening may be formed on at least one of the front and rear sides of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed on at least one of the left and right sides of the second passage TR2, so that balls are discharged from the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the respective openings.

In the third and fourth embodiments, the case where the opening 985d is provided is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the opening 985d may be omitted, and the distance between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 may be narrowed, thereby narrowing the left-right distance of the detection device SE3 and narrowing the left-right distance of the openings 985e and 985f. In this case, the left-right width at the lower end of the bulge portion 982 can be further shortened.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a space is formed between the standing wall 982a arranged between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a 7-segment display device may be arranged and used as a 7-segment presentation range, or a small liquid crystal display device may be arranged.

In the fifth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a passage for guiding a game ball to the back side of the game area is formed in the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the passage for guiding the game ball may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86, in the center frame 86 and the base plate 60, or in the base plate 60. , may be formed to pass through the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270, or may be formed on any of the base plate 60, the center frame 86, and the upper connecting member 5270.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the opening 5274a is formed in the third projecting portion 5274, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed on any of the other overhangs 272, 5273, and 275 to 277. Further, the destination of the ball after falling may be made different for each opening.

For example, the ball that has passed through the first opening reaches the top surface of the strip-shaped extension part 263, and the ball that has passed through the second opening returns to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the nail KG2, and then returns to the front side of the base plate 60 from right above the nail KG2. The ball that has passed through may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the curved protrusion 414. In this case, if you aim at the first opening, it will be easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, while if you aim at the second opening or the third opening, the ball will be difficult to enter the first winning opening 64. , it is possible to easily guide the ball to the ball guide portions 457, 459 and the specific winning hole 65a.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting action production unit 6700 moves back and forth on the front side of the game board 13, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation production unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to the position in which the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state (the position on the back side of the game board 13) described in the second embodiment.

In this case, the state where it is difficult for the player to see can be configured in two positions: a retracted position located on the back side of the game board 13, and the top end position of the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700. For this reason, a shutter or light guide plate or the like for blocking the player's view is arranged on the second glass unit 6016b, and the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is moved while blocking the player's view, making it difficult to see, making it impossible to know in which of the two positions the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is located. This makes it difficult to predict the action presentation by the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700.

In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped slot 7674 is formed as a slot that extends partway up and down, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that it is inclined or curved in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the recessed portion 7674a, rather than in the up and down direction. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 684 is simultaneously displaced rearward while it is displaced downward, the displacement member 680 can be configured to change its posture in the forward direction at the same time as it is displaced downward.

In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed in an L-shape by extending rearward at the lower end, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed to extend further downward from the upper or lower position of the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, by entering the recessed portion 7674a, the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 can be restricted at a midpoint within the range of vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 684. Even if a load is generated due to the restriction, damage can be easily avoided because the cylindrical portion 684 is formed thick.

In the eighth embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is placed in the middle of the curved elongated hole 8674, so that the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 coincides with the front-rear direction. In this state, the rotating member 810 may be rotated at high speed to perform a rotating light emission effect. Even if the metal rod member 686 is placed in the middle of the curved elongated hole 8674, the posture of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be maintained by regulating the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 by the resistance generating device 650. , it is possible to suppress misalignment of the rotating shaft RJ1.

In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rolling direction before tilting, so after the tilting displacement, the back side (heat sink 812 side) of the rotary member 810 is directed toward the player. It is a posture. Even in this case, the back side of the rotating member 810 is covered with a heat sink 812, and the illumination board is also housed inside so that it is not exposed.

In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while being displaced downward. In this case, the front-rear position of the rotation performance device 800 may be designed to be the same before and after the displacement member 680 is tilted. This can reduce the design difficulty when, for example, stacking multiple sets of the displacement member 680, light-emitting action performance unit 700, and rotation performance device 800 in the front-rear direction.

The shapes of the long holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, and 8675 are not limited in any way. For example, they may be wavy, or a combination of straight holes and wavy (curved) holes may be used.

In the ninth embodiment, the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 changes depending on the attitude of the displacement member 9680, so that the ease with which the light emitting operation producing unit 9700 is displaced changes. Although the case where this is done has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the design of the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1, a high-friction resin material may be placed where they press against each other, or a high-viscosity sheet member may be placed where they press against each other. However, one or more recesses and protrusions that fit into each other may be formed at the pressed portions.

Note that the shape of the recessed portion and the convex portion may be unevenly formed around a point, or may be a protrusion or groove formed around a straight line or curve. In the case of protrusions or grooves, it is easy to tolerate misalignment of the light emitting action producing unit 9700 in the direction along the extending direction, while restricting misalignment of the light emitting action producing unit 9700 in the direction crossing the extending direction. It can be made easier.

In the above tenth embodiment, the action of putting the rotating member 810 in the correct position is caused by the force of the detection gear 10831 due to its own weight, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

Alternatively, the rotating member 810 may be prevented from rising and operating in the backward rotation direction until the rotating member 810 assumes a proper posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, the engaging portion is retracted to the left and right inwards, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion protrudes to the left and right outward. can be fitted (inserted) into the inner member 670, and when fitted, the movement of the rotating member 810 in the rising direction may be restricted. In this case, since it is possible to mechanically prevent the rotating member 810 from rising and operating without being in the proper posture, it is possible to avoid unexpected damage to the rotating member 810.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the detection device SE3 disposed on the downstream side of the first winning a prize opening 64 is arranged on the left and right so that the front and back positions are the same, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the arrangement of the detection device SE3 may be shifted forward or backward.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Resin components that can replace nails>
In a game machine that includes a game board main body, a fixed member whose arrangement is fixed to the game board main body, and a connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member, the connecting member is A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to guide a ball.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a falling path of a game ball is randomly configured by nails driven into a gaming board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the conventional game machines mentioned above, the falling path of the game ball is made up only of nails, so it is necessary to drive nails into almost the entire area of the game board, but it is necessary to ensure the strength of the part where the nails are driven. Therefore, it is necessary to make the game board thicker, so there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board is reduced, especially in the design of the thickness direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the game ball can be guided by the connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member, so the range where the connecting member is arranged is limited to the game board main body. There is no need to drive nails into the Therefore, in the range where the connecting member is arranged, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board main body, particularly in the thickness direction, can be improved.

For example, by forming thinner parts where the thickness can be arbitrarily designed, material costs can be reduced by reducing the volume of parts required for the entire game board, and by making the thickness thinner, the empty space can be used to create production parts (electronic parts). Decorative substrates, etc.) can be arranged to make it possible to perform various light emitting effects.

Note that the arrangement of the connecting members is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board so as to form the part that first collides with a game ball introduced into the game area, or the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board so as to constitute the part that first collides with the game ball introduced into the game area, or the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board as a member that holds the through gate inside. It may be arranged on the left and right sides of the frame, or it may be arranged on the lower side of the center frame as a member for guiding the game ball to the winning hole.

Further, the connecting member may be configured to have a left-right symmetrical shape, or may be configured to have a left-right asymmetrical shape. Basically, if the gaming area is bilaterally symmetrical, it is preferable that the connecting member is also configured in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and if the gaming area is bilaterally asymmetrical (for example, in the case of a right-handed machine), It is preferable that the connecting member is also configured to have a left-right asymmetric shape.

In the gaming machine A1, the connecting member has a guide portion configured to be able to guide the gaming ball, and the guide portion is configured to protrude toward the gaming area. In the gaming machine A2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can provide the same effect as a nail that protrudes into the gaming area, and when the connecting member is made of a light-transmitting resin material, it can transmit light more easily than a nail. Therefore, even in the area where the guide is located, it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the light irradiated from behind the guide to the player.

Note that the shape of the guide part may be imitated to the shape of a nail, but if the narrow shape of the nail is made of resin material, the strength will be lower than that of a nail made of metal material, so multiple nails may be used. A single guide portion may surround the area where the guide portion is placed. This makes it possible to solve the problem of insufficient strength even when it is formed from a resin material.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the guide portion of gaming machine A2 has a recessed portion on the opposite side to the gaming area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 can reduce the weight of the connecting member. Furthermore, the thinner guide portion makes it easier to bend, and when a gaming ball collides with the guide portion, the guide portion bends, which reduces the load between the gaming ball and the guide portion, making it easier to avoid damage to the guide portion due to the load during impact.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide section includes a first guide section arranged adjacent to the gaming board body and a second guide section arranged adjacent to the fixed member, and the first guide section is narrower than the second guide section. Gaming machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2 or A3, since the first guide part is narrow, the guide part itself is easily deflected, and the load can be relieved without having to bend the game board body. On the other hand, the second guide part can release the load by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate even if the guide part itself does not bend.

The narrow width may be determined by the maximum width being small, or may be determined by the presence of a narrow portion, such as when the shape is triangular.

A gaming machine A5 is one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, characterized in that the guide section is arranged such that the part where the sides that make up the frame shape intersect at the maximum angle when viewed from the projection direction is located lower than the upper end position.

Gaming machine A5 has the same effect as any of gaming machines A2 to A4, but also allows for bending deformation around the axis where the angle is greatest, making it easier to withstand the impact of a gaming ball.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the member to be fixed is formed in an annular shape and is fixed inside the gaming board main body.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, gaming machine A6 makes it easier to maintain the shape of the fixed member due to the rigidity of the gaming board body.

A gaming machine A7 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, and is configured so that the connecting member and the game board body or the fixed member overlap, and the overlapping object changes depending on the location.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machine A7 omits the formation of the gaming board body and uses the fixed member instead, which reduces the material costs required for the gaming board body compared to forming the gaming board body without omitting the formation of the gaming board body.

In addition, in the area where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap, it is possible to allow light irradiated from the backside to pass through more easily, and by making the fixed member thin, it is possible to secure space on the backside, thereby improving the freedom of arrangement of the performance device.

Gaming machine A8 has a light emitting means disposed behind the point where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap in gaming machine A7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, gaming machine A8 makes it easier to secure space for arranging the light-emitting means by forming the fixed member with a thin wall compared to arranging the light-emitting means behind the gaming board body.

A gaming machine A9 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, and is characterized in that it is provided with a thin decorative member disposed between the fixed member and the connecting member, and the thin decorative member is aligned with a first positioning portion formed on the fixed member and a second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the thin decorative member can be aligned without being limited by the shapes of the fixed member or the connecting member.

A gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion engage with each other in the gaming machine A9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can align the fixed member and the connecting member using the first positioning unit and the second positioning unit.

＜Sorting without nails＞
A gaming machine B1 comprising a passing area through which gaming balls can pass, a guiding means configured to be capable of guiding gaming balls into the passing area, and a flow-down area through which gaming balls that have passed through the passing area flow down, wherein the guiding means is configured to be capable of changing the rate at which gaming balls are guided into the passing area, and the flow-down area comprises a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet configured to allow gaming balls to enter, and is configured to be capable of maintaining the rate at which gaming balls enter the first ball inlet and the rate at which gaming balls enter the second ball inlet.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, use nails hammered into the game board to distribute game balls to winning holes (see, for example, JP 2007-325743 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the state of the nails used to distribute the flow path of the game balls can change relative to the base plate when they collide with the game balls, and this change in state can create conditions that make it easier or harder for the ball to enter the winning hole, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the perspective of fairness in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in a situation where the rate at which the guiding means guides the game ball to the passing area can be changed, the downstream area is determined by the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entrance and the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entrance. Since it is configured such that the ratio of game balls entering the second ball entry port can be maintained, it becomes easier or difficult for game balls to enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. This can be avoided and the game can be improved from the viewpoint of fairness.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the flow-down area is formed from a resin material.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has a flow-down area formed from a resin material, so if a part of the resin member forming the flow-down area is damaged, it can be easily restored to its original state by replacing the resin member itself. Therefore, compared to when balls are distributed by nails, it can be improved in terms of maintenance and extended operating life of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in the case of nails, even if bending has occurred, it is difficult to tell with the naked eye, and operation may occur in a state in which the distribution state (balance) of the game balls has changed since shipment. However, if the flow area is formed from a resin material, it can be made less likely to be in a state different from the state at the time of shipment by making it in a shape that makes bending less likely to occur, or by designing it to break easily if bending does occur. This makes it easier to maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game balls as it was at the time of shipment.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B1 or B2, the first ball inlet is disposed upstream of the second ball inlet, and the profit that the player obtains when a gaming ball enters the second ball inlet is greater than the profit that the player obtains when a gaming ball enters the first ball inlet.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can draw attention to whether the gaming balls will flow down toward the second ball entrance.

Note that the form of profits that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the presence or absence of prize balls or the number of prize balls, it may be the presence or absence of a drawing of symbols, it may be a profit that changes the probability of drawing by passing a game ball, or it may be a combination of these.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, it is provided with an upstream means that is arranged upstream of the passing area and can guide gaming balls in a third direction different from the passing area, the upstream means is configured to prevent gaming balls from flowing down to the second ball entrance, and gaming balls that are diverted in the third direction are configured to be able to flow down a path that passes through a profit passing means that will allow a player to obtain a profit if the ball enters the area.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming balls that do not go to the passing area side do not obstruct the flow of the balls heading toward the second ball entrance, and furthermore, , since there is a possibility that the ball may pass through the profit passing means, it is possible to improve attention to the game ball that has deviated from the passing area side.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B4, a gaming ball guided in the third direction by the upstream means is configured such that the more upstream the point at which guidance begins, the more likely the ball will enter the profit passing means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the attention of the upstream means can be improved not only on the downstream side disposed on the profit passing means side but also on the upstream side. In other words, the game area can be configured so that even if the player is dissatisfied with the normal game, he will be comfortable with the jackpot game.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that in gaming machine B5, a first member constituting the general winning port side and a second member constituting the profit passing means side are positioned by the engagement of resin components.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B5, gaming machine B6 can eliminate the need for fastening screws compared to when the first and second members are fixed together with metal fastening screws, improving visibility at the overlapping position of the first and second members.

A gaming machine B7, which is a gaming machine B6, is characterized in that the positioning method is sandwiching between the gaming board and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6, it is possible to easily define the positional relationship between the first member and the second member in the portion facing the gaming area. Thereby, it is possible to avoid irregular disturbances in the flow of the game balls flowing down while contacting the first member and the second member. That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the front and back positions of the first member and the second member will be reversed, which tends to occur when the members are fixed to the game board body using fastening screws.

Among any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, gaming machine B8 is characterized by having a deceleration protrusion that maintains the momentum of the gaming machine until it is directly above the profit passing means, and then decelerates it after it is directly above it.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, damage to the profit passing means due to the game ball colliding with the profit passing means at high speed can be avoided.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B8, the profits are collected from a wide area on both the left and right, and the profit passing means beyond that is configured to be wide on both the left and right.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B8, even when game balls reach the profit passing means consecutively, the game balls that arrived first are allowed to flow left and right, making it easier to accept the following game balls. can do. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid defective ball entry when the game balls reach the profit passing means successively.

Gaming machine B10 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B8 or B9, an auxiliary means is disposed behind the flow path of the gaming ball to the profit passing means, which assists the flow of the gaming ball in a predetermined manner.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B8 or B9, the auxiliary means can assist the flow of the game balls to the profit passing means in a predetermined manner, so that the problems associated with the flow of the game balls can be solved. It can be improved in certain ways.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a game ball that enters a predetermined prize opening and flows down, and a flowing path of the game ball, a game machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B10, it is possible to make the game ball that enters a predetermined winning hole and flows down look as if it is flowing down toward the profit passing means. As a result, the game balls that enter the predetermined prize opening during the execution of the jackpot game can be added up as the number of game balls that appear to enter the profit passing means, so most of the game balls fired are profitable. It is possible to create the illusion that the ball is entering the means of passage.

Gaming machine B12 is characterized in that in gaming machine B10, the auxiliary means is a decorative means that decorates the flow path to the profit passing means from behind.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B10, gaming machine B12 can increase the player's interest by using decoration means when the player's attention is focused on the flow path to the profit passing means, compared to when no decoration is applied.

Gaming machine B13 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B12, the rate at which gaming balls enter the first ball entry port and the rate at which gaming balls enter the second ball entry port in the flow-down area can be maintained in multiple states with different rates.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the gaming machine B13 can change the state maintained in the flow-down area to multiple states. For example, a retractable device that retracts at regular intervals in the flow-down area may be provided, or the inclination angle of an inclined plate provided between the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance may be controlled to change.

<Make the device for distributing game balls left and right more compact>
In a game machine comprising a game board main body and a flowing means configured to allow game balls to flow down in a manner that distributes them to a plurality of ball entrances behind the front end surface of the game board main body, the game board main body includes: The flow means includes an arrangement area in which nails can be arranged to distribute the flow path of the game balls, and a non-arrangement area in which nails cannot be arranged, and the flow means is arranged so that the flow path of the game balls is arranged in the non-arrangement area. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is arranged in a range including the rear of the installation area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port installed on the left and right sides, and a swing system configured to allow the game ball to flow down toward the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. There is a gaming machine that includes a branch channel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741, especially FIG. 4). The distribution channel is made of a resin material, and is formed so that the game balls can flow down inside it.In order to facilitate measures in the event of ball clogging, etc., the first ball entry port and On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (the position immediately before the ball enters), a gap portion large enough to allow the game ball to pass through is formed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are configured to protrude toward the front side of the game board, so it is not possible to configure the gaming area on the front side of the distribution channel. The problem was that it was difficult. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ensuring a large range in which the game area can be formed.

In other words, the area required for locating the first and second ball inlets partially extends out toward the front side of the game board, narrowing the other areas in which game balls can flow down, potentially reducing the design freedom for the areas in which game balls can flow down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine C1, the flow-down means is disposed behind the front end face of the gaming board body, so other components that guide the gaming balls can be disposed in front of the front end face of the gaming board body, ensuring a large range for the formation of the gaming area.

A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the multiple ball entrances in the gaming machine C1 include a first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is positioned so as not to overlap with a movable device disposed in the gaming area when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from reducing the visibility of the gaming ball entering the first ball entrance.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines C1 or C2, at least a portion of the path along which the gaming balls that deviate from the first ball entrance flow downward is positioned in a position that overlaps, in a front view, with a movable device disposed in the gaming area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 can hide game balls that stray from the first ball entrance and flow down with a movable device.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the flow-down means in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3 includes a direction switching unit configured to cause gaming balls to flow down toward the player on the upstream side of the multiple ball entrances.

Gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C3, improves the visibility of the gaming balls by using a direction switching unit to direct the gaming balls flowing down the flow means toward the player just before the multiple ball entrances, and also increases the attention to the gaming balls flowing down toward the multiple ball entrances.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the gaming machine C4 is provided with a distributing means for distributing the downward direction of the game balls at a front position of the direction switching section on the front side of the gaming board main body.

In addition to the effects of game machine C4, game machine C5 can distribute game balls by the distribution means even at the front position of the game board body where it is difficult to drive nails. This improves the design freedom of the game area.

The game machine C5 is provided with a ball entry means configured to allow at least a portion of the game balls distributed by the distribution means to enter, and the game balls that have flown down the flow down means and down the direction switching section, A game machine C6 characterized in that game balls discharged to the back side and flowing down the flowing means are configured to be visible through the game board main body.

According to gaming machine C6, the visibility of the gaming ball after it flows down the direction switching section is reduced, creating the illusion that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry means. This allows the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means to be added to the number of gaming balls flowing down toward the ball entry means, making it appear as if a large number of gaming balls are flowing down toward the ball entry means.

In this case, the game balls flowing down the flow means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the game board body are separated by the game board body and cannot collide, so it is possible to avoid the flow of game balls actually flowing down towards the ball entry means being impeded by game balls flowing down the flow means. In other words, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it appear to the player that even more game balls are flowing down towards the ball entry means, while ensuring the ball entry efficiency of the game balls actually flowing down towards the ball entry means.

Gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C1, it has a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet, and a first flow path configured to allow gaming balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet, and the first flow path has a branched flow path upstream of the first ball inlet through which gaming balls flow in a direction deviating from the first ball inlet.

According to gaming machine C7, even if balls become clogged on the first ball inlet side of the first flow path, the game balls can be discharged from the branched flow path, making it easy to clear the ball clog.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7, the first flow path is configured to move the gaming ball upstream of the first ball inlet in a direction that intersects with a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet, thereby deflecting the gaming ball away from the first ball inlet.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet that are arranged on the left and right sides, and a distribution flow path that allows game balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is made of a resin material and is designed to allow game balls to flow down inside it, but to make it easier to take measures in case of ball clogging, etc., a gap large enough to allow game balls to pass through is formed upstream of the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet (just before the balls enter).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gap formed in the upstream side of the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port is large enough to allow the game ball to be ejected, and the game ball is ejected in the left-right direction. In order to ensure a passage area for the game balls, there is a flow path for the game balls to flow down toward the first ball entry port, and a flow path for the game balls to flow down toward the second ball entry port. Since it is necessary to leave a space between the flow path for the ball and the left and right sides of the arrangement at least equal to the diameter of the game ball, the width of the first ball entrance hole and the second ball entrance hole must be There was a problem in that the horizontal width for arranging the mouth and the second ball entry hole was excessive.

In other words, the horizontal width (area) required for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port is excessive, making it possible to form a falling path for the game ball on the front or rear side of the game board. There was a problem in that the range narrowed, and the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game balls were made to fall could be reduced.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C8, the structure for deflecting the gaming ball from the first ball inlet is configured to move the gaming ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line, eliminating the need for the distance between the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet to be greater than or equal to the diameter of the gaming ball, and thus reducing the left-right width (area) for arranging the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet. This improves the design freedom of the range in which the gaming ball flows down.

It should be noted that the design aspect of the range in which the game balls are made to fall is not limited in any way. For example, the area between the game board and the glass plate of the door frame (the so-called game area) may be designed, or the area behind the front end surface of the game board (for example, the interior of the resin It may also be an aspect of the design of the flow path). In the former case, this also includes aspects of the design of the arrangement of nails driven into the game board as members for guiding game balls.

The gaming machine C8 is provided with a second flow path configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the second ball entry port, and the second flow path is connected to the second ball entry port on the upstream side of the second ball entry port. A game machine characterized in that the game ball is configured to advance in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, thereby deflecting the game ball from the second ball entry port. C9.

Gaming machine C9 achieves the same effect as gaming machine C8, but also further reduces the left-right width (area) required for locating the first and second ball entrances.

Gaming machine C10 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second flow path configured to allow gaming balls to flow down toward the second ball entrance in gaming machine C8 or C9, and a receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path and deviated from the first ball entrance, and gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path and deviated from the second ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C8 and C9, gaming machine C10 can combine the means for receiving gaming balls that have deviated from the first ball inlet and the means for receiving gaming balls that have deviated from the second ball inlet into a single means, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing component costs.

In the gaming machine C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the receiving means is arranged on the front side of the predetermined straight line.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C10, gaming machine C11 can improve the visibility of the gaming ball received by the receiving means, making it easier to determine whether the gaming ball that entered the flow-down means passed through the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet, or whether it deviated from the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet and was received by the receiving means.

In the gaming machine C10, the gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the receiving means is arranged on the back side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C10, the visibility of the downstream means can be improved compared to the case where the flow path for the game ball is formed on the front side of the downstream means. It is possible to easily determine that the game ball is passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port provided on the downstream side of the flowing down means.

<Production is performed on the side that is easy to see, and evacuation is performed by moving to the side that is difficult to see>
A moving means is provided that can move between a first position where action is performed and a second position different from the first position, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than the first position. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a rotary member that is pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200914). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the rotary member is always visible inside the opening, so the player may not be able to see the rotary member's posture misaligned due to poor control, or the rotary member may be exposed to the player after it has over-rotated. This poses a problem in that it is easily visible and may reduce the performance effect.

In response to this, gaming machine D1 makes the movement means less visible in the second position compared to the first position where the action presentation is performed, so that even if a position shift or over-rotation occurs in the second position, this condition is less noticeable to the player, and a reduction in the presentation effect can be prevented.

The manner in which the visibility of the moving means is reduced is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, a member that blocks the view may be placed between the moving means and the player, regardless of whether the member is transparent or opaque, or the moving means may be displaced (retracted) outward from the area in front of the liquid crystal display device that is likely to attract the player's attention.

A gaming machine D2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, the first position is located closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the second position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can increase the visible size of the moving means itself by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the moving means in gaming machine D2 is capable of rotating about a predetermined rotation axis, and the front-to-rear arrangement changes depending on the rotation.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, it is possible to change the front-rear arrangement of the moving means while eliminating the need to translate the moving means back and forth. Therefore, the structure for changing the front and back arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

Gaming machine D4 is one of gaming machines D1 to D3, and is characterized by having an auxiliary means for assisting in maintaining the state of the moving means arranged in the second position on the appropriate side.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the state of the moving means is made appropriate by the auxiliary means at the second position, so that the performance of the moving means at the first position is appropriately performed. can be executed.

Note that the mode of assistance is not limited at all. For example, the posture of the moving means may be corrected to the proper side by contact, or the moving means may be maintained on the proper side by an urging force.

A gaming machine D5 in the gaming machine D4, wherein the auxiliary means is arranged on the second position side with respect to the first position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D4, gaming machine D5 makes it easier to hide the auxiliary means by placing it on an inconspicuous side. This eliminates the need for a separate member to hide the auxiliary means, and the space in front of the auxiliary means can be secured as a presentation space.

The arrangement of the second position side is not limited in any way, and various arrangements are exemplified. For example, it may simply be on an inconspicuous side, on the rear side in the front-to-rear direction, or on the outer side of the central opening of the game board facing the liquid crystal device.

In the gaming machine D5, the second position is set closer to the back side of the gaming machine than the first position, and the auxiliary means is configured to move the player by the moving means when the moving means is placed in the second position. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is arranged so that the line of sight is blocked.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the auxiliary means can be hidden using the moving means, so it is easy to avoid exposing the auxiliary means in the unlikely event that the moving means is evacuated. Looks good. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary means.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, the movement of the moving means is composed of a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible, and is configured to bring the state of the moving means closer to the appropriate side during the second movement.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

A gaming machine D8 in the gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the moving means is brought closer to a proper state by a biasing force.

With gaming machine D8, it is possible to bring the means of movement closer to the appropriate side without relying on control.

Gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the second movement in gaming machine D7 or D8 is a rotational movement around a predetermined rotation axis.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D7 and D8, gaming machine D9 can change the state of the moving means so that it approaches the appropriate side while the moving means is in the middle of changing its attitude.

Gaming machine D10 is any one of gaming machines D7 to D9, characterized in that during the first movement, the front side and back side of the moving means are formed in different configurations.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D7 to D9, gaming machine D10 allows the front side visible to the player to be shaped in a decorative manner, while the back side can be shaped in a functional manner.

<Performance that changes the surface of the stage equipment>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with a first means capable of executing a predetermined performance, the first means being changeable between a first posture for performing a first performance and a second posture for performing a second performance as the predetermined performance, and the side facing forward changes between the first posture and the second posture.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a position-changing member that is pivoted on a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, JP 2010-200914 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the position-changing member always faces the same side toward the front, and there is no change in appearance beyond the change in position, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the presentation effect that utilizes the position-changing member.

In contrast, gaming machine E1 is configured so that the side of the first means facing the front changes between the first and second positions. Therefore, if each side of the single movable means, the first means, is designed in a different manner, the side that is viewed (the front side) can be changed, making the first means appear to the player as a completely different object. This allows improvements to be made from the perspective of enhancing the presentation effect of the first means.

Note that the mode of the predetermined performance is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be an action effect in which at least a part of the first means operates, or a light emission effect using light emitted from a light emitting means included in the first means.

In gaming machine E1, the first means includes a predetermined light-emitting means arranged in a predetermined shape so that a figure can be seen by the emitted light, and gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the figure seen by the predetermined light-emitting means is configured to be changeable between the first position and the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved by changing the graphic visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means.

Note that the mode of change in the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the visible figure may be changed by controlling the light emitting pattern of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means in a stopped state, or the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means may be fixed and the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means is fixed. It may be possible to change the visible figure (such as an afterimage) by operating the light emitting means, or it may be a combination of these.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E1 or E2, the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and the outer shape of the first means visible at the first position is different from the outer shape of the first means visible at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, since the first means is configured so that the visible external shape changes while moving, it can produce effects that are difficult to achieve with a single member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the performance effect of the first means can be improved.

A gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E3, the area in which the first means can perform a presentation is set in accordance with the presentation mode.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E3, gaming machine E4 is configured so that the area required for the presentation operation executed by the first means changes in size depending on the presentation mode. This makes it possible to operate the first means in a presentation mode that matches the area, even if the area in which the first means can perform the presentation operation changes depending on the arrangement of the first means, thereby improving the design freedom of the presentation of the operation of the first means.

A gaming machine E5, which is the gaming machine E3 or E4, further comprising a dividing means arranged to divide the first means arranged at the first position in a predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E3 and E4, gaming machine E5 can use the separation means to make the appearance of the first means in the first position different from the appearance of the first means in the second position (non-separated).

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E3 to E5, the predetermined light-emitting means is configured so that the figure visible in the first position and in the first attitude corresponds to the shape of a progress assistance means that assists the progress of a gaming ball in the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the traveling direction of the gaming ball to the player by emitting light in the first posture. In addition to a stand-alone performance, it can also be used as a performance related to the direction of movement of the game ball.

Note that the mode of the advancement aid means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the ball to the game area, or it may be a guide means that is placed in the game area and guides the game ball to flow down, or it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the ball to the game area, or it may be a guide device that is placed in the game area and guides the game ball to flow down, or it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the game ball to the game area. It is also possible to use a ball passing state switching means that can be switched by.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the figure that is visible in the second position and in the second attitude in gaming machine E6 is a figure that draws attention to a predetermined ball entry area where the gaming ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, another type of light production can be performed by a single first means as a light production executed for the same purpose. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the player from getting bored with the performance.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines E3 to E7, the movement of the first means is composed of a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible, and is configured to bring the state of the first means closer to the appropriate side during the second movement.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E3 to E7, gaming machine E8 can avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an improper state when moving toward the first position.

In the gaming machine E8, the first means is a gaming machine E9 characterized in that the state is brought closer to the proper side by a biasing force.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E8, gaming machine E9 can bring the first means closer to the appropriate side without relying on control.

A gaming machine E10, in the gaming machine E8 or E9, wherein the second movement is a rotational movement about a predetermined rotation axis.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E8 and E9, gaming machine E10 can change the state of the moving means to approach the appropriate side while the attitude of the displacement means is changing.

A gaming machine E11, which is any one of the gaming machines E8 to E10, characterized in that the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different manners during the first movement.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E8 to E10, gaming machine E11 allows the front side visible to the player to be shaped in a decorative manner, while the back side can be shaped in a functional manner.

<Support structure for operated member>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable and a support means supporting the displacement means, the support means comprising an allowance portion capable of allowing the displacement of the displacement means and a limiting portion capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a movable unit that moves up and down by driving a pair of left and right drive devices has a rotary movement member that is rotationally driven by separate drive devices (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-000482 (see official bulletin). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movable unit is supported by plate portions extending vertically on both the left and right sides in a manner that it can move directly in the vertical direction. If a load is applied in a direction that causes the movable unit to lose its posture (tilt), the smoothness of the movable unit's motion will be lost, and the possibility of damage to the power transmission system will increase due to increased motion resistance. was there. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoints of performance and durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the support means that supports the displacement means includes a restriction section that restricts the displacement of the displacement means as well as an allowance section that allows the displacement of the displacement means. Even if a shift occurs in the drive timing, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the support means is allowed in advance, so the smoothness of the movement of the displacement means can be maintained within the permissible range, and the distance between the support means and the displacement means can be maintained. The load applied to the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve performance and durability.

In addition, by configuring the support mode of the displacement means so that it is possible to appropriately select whether to increase the proportion of influence of the permissive portion or the proportion of influence of the restrictive portion, two support modes can be configured.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable unit has been described as displacing in the vertical direction, but the displacement direction of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-back direction, a rotational direction around a specified rotation axis, or a combination of these.

The configuration of the permissive portion and the restrictive portion can be set to any shape, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the permissive portion may be formed as a long hole extending in the first direction, and the restrictive portion may be formed as a perfect circle with a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the permissive portion.

A gaming machine F2, in which the allowing section is configured to allow the displacement of the displacement means when the displacement of the restricted section of the displacement means is restricted by the restricting section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 can allow the displacement of the displacement means with the limiting portion as its base end. This makes it easier to ensure smooth displacement of the displacement means since no control is required, compared to when the presence or absence of displacement limit is switched on and off by electrical control.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that in gaming machine F1 or F2, the tolerance unit is configured to be able to change between a first tolerance state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permitted within a first tolerance range, and a second tolerance state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permitted within a second tolerance range that is smaller than the first tolerance range.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, even if the displacement widths corresponding to the types of displacement of the displacement means are different, the one allowable portion can accommodate the different displacement widths. can.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the state change is caused by a change in the attitude of the displacement means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F3, the change in the attitude of the displacement means causes a change in the allowable width allowed by the allowable section, so that the attitude of the displacement means subject to the allowable and restricted displacement and the displacement Since the size of the permissible width can be directly linked to the size of the allowable width, malfunctions of the displacement means can be avoided in advance. Furthermore, the number of structural members can be reduced compared to the case where a separate limiting member is used to hold down the displacement means and limit displacement.

In the game machine F4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along a first direction, and the first permissible state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permissible portion is the same as the first direction. The gaming machine F5 is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, and the second permissible state is characterized in that a direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permissible portion intersects with the predetermined plane.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F4, gaming machine F5 can change the range of displacement permitted by the permitting unit by switching the direction permitted by the permitting unit as the direction of displacement of the displacement means relative to the first direction.

As a result, in relation to the control of the drive device that drives the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means is maintained in the first permissible state in a range where positional deviation in the first direction between the displacement means and the support means is likely to occur; By setting the posture of the displacement means to the second permissible state within the range where it is possible to prevent positional displacement or where it is desired to prevent positional displacement, the displacement of the displacement means can be made sharp without being too soft or too hard. A certain displacement pattern can be provided.

In any of gaming machines F3 to F5, the displacement means supports an operating means configured to be operable, the operating means is configured to be able to operate at high speed, and the high-speed operation is controlled by the allowing portion A gaming machine F6 is characterized in that it can be executed in a state that is a 2-permissible state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines F3 to F5, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to the inertial load caused by the high-speed operation of the operation means.

Gaming machine F7 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F6, characterized in that the support means is composed of a pair of members that support the displacement means from both sides.

Gaming machine F7 provides the same effects as any of gaming machines F1 to F6, and also provides stable support for the displacement means.

The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the pair of members are configured to be rotatably displaceable coaxially about a first axis, and the allowable width of the allowable portion is formed to extend along the first axis direction. Gaming machine F8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F7, gaming machine F8 can cause the displacement of the displacement means within the allowable width allowed by the allowable portion to occur on the tangent plane of a cylinder centered on the first axis. In other words, the displacement allowed by the allowable portion can be caused as a displacement in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

This makes it possible to three-dimensionally deal with difficult-to-avoid deviations in the amount of displacement, such as backlash, that can occur when using gears in the drive transmission mechanisms on both the left and right sides, and allows for smooth rotational displacement of the displacement means around the first axis.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F8, wherein one of the supporting means includes the limiting section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, gaming machine F9 can tolerate misalignment when assembling the other support means and the moving means, making assembly easier.

A gaming machine F10 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F9, characterized in that the permissive portion is formed as a long hole, and the restrictive portion is formed as a long hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the permissive portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the gaming machine F10 can slide the moving means in the longitudinal direction of the restricting section and the allowing section. This can relieve the load on the moving means or can be used to improve the movement of the moving means.

<Technical philosophy in which multiple types of fixing forces for transportation means are set>
It comprises a movable means of transportation and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the means of transportation, and the load applying means is capable of switching the load to be applied depending on the state of the means of transportation. A gaming machine G1 featuring:

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a regulating means (load applying means) that is configured to be able to move the moving means, which is displaced up and down, to a position where it can be regulated (see, for example, JP 2016-54856 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, although the regulating means can regulate the movement of the moving means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost-effectiveness of the volume occupied by the regulating means is low. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making effective use of the regulating means.

In contrast, with gaming machine G1, the load applied from the load application means to the moving means can be switched according to the state of the moving means, so a single load application means can have multiple types of effects on the movement of the moving means. In other words, the load application means can be used effectively.

Note that the aspect of the state of the moving means adopted as a reference for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the difference in the state of the moving means may be a difference in the arrangement of the moving means, or a difference in the mode of operation.

Examples of states in which the operating modes are different include, for example, a state in which the moving means actively operates, and a state in which the moving means is actively operated, and a state in which the moving means is in response to the operation of another moving means held by the moving means or another moving means disposed outside the moving means. A passively operating state is exemplified.

Note that the mode of switching the load to be applied is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (it may be switched between a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means). (b) The mode of the load applied by the load applying means may be switched depending on the elapsed time from the start of movement of the moving means.

Further, the mode of switching the load may be switching the magnitude of the load or switching the mode of load generation. The load may be generated, for example, as a frictional force (brake) due to friction with the moving means, or as a restrictive force (stopper) generated when the limit of the allowable range of movement is reached. .

In the gaming machine G1, the load applying means has two states: a facing state in which it applies a load in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means, and a crossing state in which it applies a load in a direction crossing the moving direction of the moving means. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the applied load can be switched.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 can switch the load applied to the moving means by changing the position of the load applying means relative to the movement path of the moving means, eliminating the need for a complex shape for switching the load and allowing the load applying means to be configured simply.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the load applying means is provided with a load applying moving means that can move in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means, and the load applying moving means is configured to be able to come into contact with the moving means. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the load applying moving means can be configured to move in and out of the moving route of the moving means by linear motion (direct motion). In order to switch the mode of the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means, it is possible to reduce the movement width (the movement width taking into account variations in operation) required of the load applying moving means.

This makes it possible to reduce the space required to place the load-applying moving means. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the space required to place the moving means and load-applying means is usually limited to an internal size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard, so by reducing the space required to place the load-applying moving means, the degree of freedom in the placement of the moving means and load-applying means can be improved.

A gaming machine G4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine G3, the load applying means is configured so that its moving direction intersects the moving direction of the moving means at a right angle, and the movement in the moving direction of the moving means is restricted.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to increase the difference in the aspect of the load applied to the moving means with the minimum movement width of the load applying means.

A gaming machine G5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, switching of the load applied by the load applying means is performed in accordance with the position of the moving means.

The gaming machine G5 can accommodate cases where the performance action of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4.

For example, when a moving means has a specific operating means, if a performance is executed in which the operating means operates at high speed when the moving means is stationary, but is stopped or operates slowly when the moving means moves, there may be a demand to reliably fix the moving means when the moving means is stationary, but there may also be a demand to fix (brake) the moving means gently when it moves.

By switching the load applied by the load applying means in accordance with the position of the moving means, different demands depending on the arrangement of the moving means can be satisfied.

A gaming machine G6, which is one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, is characterized in that the load applying means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, and releases the load when the moving means moves in the reverse direction.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, it is possible to respond to the difference in the forward and reverse directions of movement by depending on the presence or absence (size) of the load from the load applying means.

Any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6 is characterized in that it includes a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a separation load is generated in a direction that separates the moving means and the driving means. Game machine G7.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the generation of a separation load allows the moving means to be separated from the driving means, and the transmission efficiency of driving force can be reduced. .

In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the separation load is generated from the load applying means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G7, the load applying means can be configured with multiple functions.

In gaming machine G7, gaming machine G9 is characterized in that the separation load is generated in the driving means.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G7, it is possible to reduce the driving force transmission efficiency on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G9, it is possible to configure a case in which a frictional force is applied from the load applying means to the moving means, and a case in which the load applying means restricts movement of the moving means. A game machine G10 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, variations in the movement mode of the moving means are increased even when the moving means is moved by generating the same driving force. be able to.

<Multiple guidance means for guiding the movement of a transportation means have different modes>
A gaming machine H1 comprising: a movable moving means; a first guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means; and a second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means in a manner different from that of the first guiding means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the movement of the moving means is guided by a pair of guiding means having the same configuration (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the pair of parts of the moving means that are guided by the guiding means share the same load configuration, and in order to improve durability, it is necessary to increase the strength of each part in the same way, which reduces the design freedom of the moving means (part of the moving means that is guided by the pair of guiding means).

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the first guide means and the second guide means for guiding the movement of the moving means are different in the guidance manner, so the manner of the applied load and the necessary for improving durability are different. The intensity values can be different. Therefore, since the portion of the transportation means that is guided by multiple guide means can be configured to have different shapes and strengths, the portion of the transportation means that is guided by multiple guide means ) can improve the degree of freedom in design.

Note that the difference in aspect between the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the first guide means may be configured as a guide rail, while the second guide means may be configured as a guide hole, or the first guide means may be a rotation guide means supported by a predetermined rotation axis. The second guide means may be configured as a guide groove, or may be configured by changing the combination of each structure.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the extending direction of the grooves in the first guide means and the second guide means may be parallel, but the widths of the grooves may be different; An embodiment may also be adopted in which the extending directions of the grooves in the first guide means and the second guide means are non-parallel, but the grooves have a common width.

Gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H1, the second guide means is arranged so that at least a portion of it is aligned along the first guide means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 has the advantage that the second guiding means is at least partially aligned with the first guiding means, allowing the moving means to operate in two stages.

In the gaming machine H2, the second guide means includes a part that is parallel to the first guide means, and an auxiliary part that guides the moving means in a direction different from that when guided by the part that is parallel to the first guide means. Features of gaming machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the moving direction in which the moving means is guided can be changed at the boundary between the annexed section and the auxiliary section. Therefore, the movement mode of the moving means can be complicated.

A gaming machine H4 is any one of gaming machines H1 to H3, and is characterized in that it is provided with a transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means, and the displacement direction of the transmission means is fixed in one direction regardless of the moving direction of the moving means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the design of the driving force transmission system is made easier compared to the case where the displacement direction of the transmission means is changed while the moving means is moving. be able to.

A gaming machine H5 in the gaming machine H4, wherein the transmitting means is configured to transmit driving force via a guided portion guided by the second guiding means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H4, the driving force is transmitted via the guided part guided by the narrow second guide means, so that the guided part is not affected when the driving force is transmitted. Misalignment can be suppressed.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H5, the guided portion is configured to overtake the auxiliary guiding portion guided by the first guiding means in the moving direction of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the entire weight of the auxiliary guide section is applied to the guided section, and compared to the case where the guided section is driven against the entire weight, the moving means is The driving force required at the start of movement can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, when the moving means is guided by the annexed section, the first direction of the moving means is rotated in a rotational direction with the second guiding means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. When the guide means side is energized and the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part, the second guide means side of the moving means rotates in the rotational direction with the first guide means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. A game machine H7 characterized in that it is energized.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, when a roller guided by the guide means is adopted as a configuration, it becomes easier to rotate the roller, so that the roller as a guided member can be easily rotated. wear can be reduced.

Gaming machine H8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines H3 to H7, when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary section, the moving means is maintained in a predetermined section of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is formed to be wider than the second guiding means.

Gaming machine H8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines H3 to H7, but the wide first guiding means can maintain the movement of the moving means guided by the auxiliary section, stabilizing the movement of the moving means. This makes it easier to prevent the part of the moving means that is guided by the second guiding means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the auxiliary section and the auxiliary section. This stabilizes the movement of the moving means, and allows smooth gradual switching when the movement is configured to be switched in stages.

In addition, the support area of the first guiding means at a specified portion can be increased, making it easier to avoid localized wear between the moving means and the first guiding means.

A gaming machine H9 in the gaming machine H8, wherein the predetermined portion is configured to at least suppress vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H8, it is possible to reduce the load required to move the moving means in the portion guided by the first guide means.

Gaming machine H10 is characterized in that the electrical wiring connected to the moving means in gaming machine H8 or H9 is routed through the first guide means.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effects of the game machine H8 or H9, it is possible to secure a sufficient cross-sectional area for passing the electric wiring, and to prevent the displacement of the electric wiring when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part. Since this can be suppressed, the durability of the electrical wiring can be improved.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the definite identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base plate (installation area)
60a Through hole (non-installed area)
62 Outer rail (advancement aid)
65a Specific winning slot (part of the profit passing means)
140a Electric role (movable role)
241 Upper component member (part of fixed member)
244b protruding portion (first positioning portion)
247 Decorative part (separating means)
251b Central light emitting means (part of the light emitting means)
251c Ambient light emitting means (part of the light emitting means)
251d Remote light emitting means (part of the light emitting means)
261 Lower component member (part of fixed member)
270 Upper connecting member (connecting member)
272 First protrusion (part of guide part, first guide part)
274 Third protrusion (part of guide part, second guide part)
279 Protruding portion (second positioning portion)
290 Thin plate members (thin decorative members)
310 First component (part of flow-down means)
317: Direction switching unit 320: Opening forming unit (distribution means)
410 Central component member (second member)
413a Protrusion (reduction protrusion)
450 Left component member (part of flow area, first member)
453a Side wall portion (part of the passage area)
455 Ceiling plate portion (upstream means)
455a Extension plate portion (part of the passing area)
457 First ball guide section (first ball entrance)
459 Second ball guide section (second ball entrance)
490 Wide decorative members (decorative means)
630 Lifting plate member (part of moving means, transmission means)
648 Drive motor (drive means)
650 Resistance generating device (load applying means)
653 Front-rear displacement member (load applying movement means)
672 First long hole (first guide means)
673 Second long hole (part of the second guide means, adjacent part)
674 Curved long hole (part of the second guide means, auxiliary part)
680 Displacement member (part of the support means)
684 Cylindrical part (rotating shaft, auxiliary guide part)
686 Metal rod member (guided part)
695 Cylindrical member (auxiliary means)
700 Light-emitting motion production unit (part of the means of transportation)
710 Main body member (part of displacement means)
760 Intermediate connecting member (part of the support means)
764a Long hole (allowance part)
764b Support hole (restriction portion)
800 Rotational performance device (part of the moving means, part of the first means)
810 Rotating member (part of first means, predetermined light emitting means, part of operating means)
3982l Discharge gutter (receiving means)
4985l Discharge gutter (receiving means)
7674a Recessed portion (predetermined portion)
10831a Plume part (auxiliary means)
J1 central axis (first axis, rotation axis)
KG2 Nail (part of guide means)
SE1a Detection hole (first ball inlet, second ball inlet, part of ball inlet means)
TR1 First passage (first flow path)
TR2 Second passage (second flow path)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a position-changing member that is pivoted on a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-200914 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the performance effect. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of improving performance effects.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is provided with a first means capable of executing a predetermined performance, and the first means is capable of changing between a first position for performing a first performance and a second position for performing a second performance as the predetermined performance, and the side facing forward changes between the first position and the second position.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line VI-VI in FIG. 2. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. 1A is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a side view of the distribution unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 9(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in range XIIIa of FIG. 12(b). (a) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of the game board and operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. It is a back view of the game board. It is a front perspective view of a game board. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central component unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central structural unit. FIG. 19 is an enlarged front view of the game board in range XXVI of FIG. 18 . FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in Figure 26. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. An enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXI of Figure 18. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXXII-XXXII in Figure 31. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXV of FIG. 18 . FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36. FIG. FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operating unit in range XLV of FIG. 44 . A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line XLIV-XLIV in Figure 36. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit. 47A is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, the lifting plate member and the resistance generating device in the range XLIXa of FIG. 47, and FIG. 47B is a front perspective view of the outer member in the range XLIXb of FIG. 47A is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting plate member, the inner member, the displacement member, and the rotation posture assisting member in the range La of FIG. 47 , and FIG. 47B is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member and the rotation posture assisting member in the range Lb of FIG. 47 . FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action production unit. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the light-emitting action production unit. This is an exploded front oblique view of the light-emitting action production unit. 54(a) is a front view of the right-side intermediate connecting member, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in Figure 54(a), (c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVc in Figure 54(a), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member along line LIVd-LIVd in Figure 54(a). A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LV-LV in Figure 36. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LV-LV in Figure 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. 4A to 4C are schematic side views of a first elongated hole, a second elongated hole, and a curved elongated hole, each of which is shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. 5A to 5C are schematic front views of a fastening portion of a displacement member and an elongated hole and a support hole of a connected hole. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV in Figure 36. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 36. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 36. FIG. 13A is a front view of a sorting unit in a third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the sorting unit. 13A is a front view of a sorting unit in a fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the sorting unit. It is a partially enlarged front view of a game board in a fifth embodiment. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 72. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along a line corresponding to line LV-LV in Figure 36. (a) to (c) are schematic side views of a guide part and an L-shaped slot in a seventh embodiment, schematically showing the guide part and the L-shaped slot. (a) to (c) schematically show the second elongated hole, the curved elongated hole, the third elongated hole, the upper part of the first elongated hole, and the lower part of the first elongated hole in the eighth embodiment; It is a schematic side view of a long hole, a 3rd long hole, the 1st long hole upper part, and the 1st long hole lower part. 37(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light-emitting action production unit in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 37. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating member and attitude detection means in a tenth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed from the front side of the game board 13 using tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it becomes possible to shield various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, whereas when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more easily than when the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to a back case fixed to the back of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window (center opening 60b) of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown in Figure 2).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 648, 820, solenoids 651, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

With reference to Figures 5 and 6, the winning port unit 930 and ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the first embodiment will be described. Note that Figure 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of Figures 5 and 6.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2), etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a that penetrates in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 5) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed slightly smaller than the external shape of the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning port unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning port unit 930 is arranged from the playing area (front side), and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite side (back side) of the playing area, and each is fastened and fixed with tapping screws or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Figure 6 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line VI-VI in Figure 2. Figure 6 illustrates the arrangement of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 in the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected in a state in which they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in more detail, the first ball throwing section 942g and the inlet 982d are arranged such that the second protrusion 982d1 formed on the inlet 982d is disposed inside the first recess 942g1 formed on the first ball throwing section 942g. In addition, the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b are arranged such that the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall section 981b is disposed inside the second recess 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing section 942c. This makes it easy to align the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 when assembling them to the base plate 60.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 7(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and Figure 7(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. Figure 8(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and Figure 8(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b). ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on one side of the sorting unit 980 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the sorting unit 980, and game balls sent inside the sorting unit 980 can be received through these openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the sorting unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 9 to 12. Figure 9(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, and Figure 9(b) is a side view of the sorting unit 980. Figure 10 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and Figure 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980. Figure 12(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line XIIa-XIIa in Figure 9(a), and Figure 12(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line XIIb-XIIb in Figure 12(a).

As shown in Figures 9 to 12, the distribution unit 980 is formed mainly by comprising a rear base 985, a front base 981 arranged on the player side of the rear base 985, a distribution section 983 arranged in a rotatable state between the front base 981 and the rear base, and a cover member 987 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 985 in a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The rear base 985 is formed from a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and is mainly composed of a base portion 985a formed into a plate-like body, a number of openings (openings 985b to 985g) that penetrate the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, a recess 985h recessed into the other side of the openings in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity), and a storage portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e that protrude from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping with a portion of the other side of the openings 985b to 985f (described below) in the direction of gravity. The inclined surface 986a is also formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. This makes it possible to guide the flow direction of game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, it becomes easier for game balls to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 9(b)), and is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 9(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (in the left-right direction in FIG. 9(b)), and its position in the gravity direction (in the vertical direction in FIG. 9(b)) is approximately the same as that of the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and the rear base 985 described below, and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage to flow into the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 are formed by extending in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) is connected to the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1, and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. This allows game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2.

The intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 also have recessed portions 985f4 formed in a direction that is approximately perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball (the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 985f4 are cutouts for disposing the detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside thereof, and are set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. This allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted and disposed from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE3 disposed in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b that controls the detection device SE3 is disposed on one side.

In this embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of the game ball, five prize balls are paid out and a lottery of the first symbol is executed. In response to this lottery, a variable display of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

The detection device SE3 is also arranged such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 are approximately aligned. This allows the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 when it flows down from the other side of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). This allows the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the connecting portion with the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed in a continuous manner with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990 described below when the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 to flow into the discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 and to be sent to the passage unit 990 by passing through the space.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Further, like the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The storage section 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. The storage section 986b is a portion that stores the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. The protruding dimension of the storage section 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. This allows the magnetic body 988b to be stored inside the storage section 986b. Since the storage section 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed slightly larger due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular rings can be elastically deformed to arrange the magnetic body 988b.

The protruding portion 986e is provided in a cylindrical shape from a position opposite to the above-described bearing portion 985j with the base portion 985a interposed therebetween. The protruding portion 986e also includes a circular fastening hole formed in the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material (blue in this embodiment). The front base 981 is formed in a generally rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and is formed mainly with a base plate 981a and a bulge portion 982 that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (the side opposite the rear base 986).

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulge 982. It is formed mainly with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulge 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed so that their inner edge shapes are substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the rear base 985 described above. This allows the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c to be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, and allows the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d to be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. When the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled, the second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c, and the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened together by inserting a screw from the front base 981 side and screwing it into the fastening hole 986d.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 9(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed with dimensions such that the erected tip surface abuts the second ball throwing section 942c of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b is formed so that the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is positioned on one side in the direction of gravity than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling section 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (see FIG. 6).

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent toward the rear base 985 side and stands approximately halfway between the inlet 982d, which is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity. It is formed mainly of an upright wall 982a and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out to have a generally U-shape when viewed from the front. The inlet 982d is formed at a position where the inner edge of the inlet 982d overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60.

The inlet 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance L14 (see FIG. 9(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first thrown ball. The distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape with a predetermined distance from the outer edge shape of the bulge portion 982 when viewed from the front. The erected wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the direction of gravity, and is formed with an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the erected direction on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

The standing wall 982a has a horizontal separation distance L16 (see FIG. 12(b)) from the inner edge of the outer circumferential portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed between the opposing sides. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed as spaces through which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c is formed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the erected wall 982a, protruding in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that axially supports the distribution portion 983 described below, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recesses 982e and 982f are recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the bulge 982. In addition, inside the recesses 982e and 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 is formed as a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

The first branch passage BK1 is connected to the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the second passage TR2, and the game balls that have flowed into the second passage TR2 can also flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recess direction is set parallel to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In addition, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 is formed as a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 that communicates with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be made smaller.

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985. .

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the bulge portion 982, and is extended at an angle toward the rear base 985 toward that side in the direction of gravity. The inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985b and the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 to come into contact with the inclined portion 982b, guiding the flowing game balls toward the openings 985b to 985f and making it easier for them to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are connected to the recesses 982h and 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end faces are inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 9(b)). This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to come into contact with the erected end faces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and be guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, making it easier for them to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

In addition, the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to come into contact with the inclined portion 982b and be guided toward the rear base 985 while colliding with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, making it easier for the game balls to flow into the openings 985e and 985f. Furthermore, the inclination of the inclined portion 982b allows the erection distance of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 to be reduced, thereby increasing the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and improving their durability.

As described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player through the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) disposed on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are difficult to see from the player side due to the front unit 940. Furthermore, when the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are erected on the front side of the openings 985e and 985f, there is a problem in that the thickness of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 makes it difficult for the player to see the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the erected dimensions of the inclined portion 982b can be made small. Therefore, the game balls sent to the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily seen even when passing through the front unit 940. That is, in this embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned toward the rear base 985 as it moves in the direction in which the game ball flows down, so that the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-to-rear direction can be made thin while ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball, and visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through hole 983c is a hole into which the shaft member 988a supported between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and rear base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, so that the distribution part 983 is disposed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L17 (see FIG. 12(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the abutment portion 983d is set to one side in the direction of gravity (lower in the direction of gravity) than the connection position with the abutment portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution portion 983 through the inlet 982d is placed in a state in which a load is applied to the action portion 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is set to be smaller than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Therefore, in a state in which the distribution portion 983 is disposed between the opposing back base 985 and the front base 981, the wall portion 983e can be disposed inside the recess 985h. This prevents the game ball sent from the inlet 982d to the inside of the distribution unit 980 from getting caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the flow of the game ball from being hindered.

The wall portion 983e is provided with a housing portion 983e1 on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b, recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b at the radially outer end from the through hole 983c. The housing portion 983e1 is a portion that houses the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

In addition, the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled by each other, and the storage section 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, so that the magnetic body 988c inserted into the storage section 983e1 can be prevented from slipping out of the storage section 983e1. In other words, since there is no need for a part to lock the magnetic body 988c inserted into the storage section 983e1, the structure of the sorting section 983 can be simplified, and the magnetic body 988c can be easily arranged in the sorting section 983.

The magnetic force of magnetic body 988b and magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. This prevents the game ball sent inside the sorting unit 980 from being magnetically attracted to magnetic body 988b and magnetic body 988c and from stagnating inside the sorting unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985. The cover member 987 is also formed with two recesses, a first recess 987a and a second recess 987b, which are recessed side by side in the direction of gravity and have a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface thereof for fastening and fixing to the back base 985. Further, the second recessed portion 987b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate and position the second recess 987b in the protruding part 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, screws can be inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding part 986e through the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, the operation of the distribution section 983 when a game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range XIIIa of FIG. 12(b). Note that, below, only the case where the action section 983a of the distribution section 983 is displaced from a state in which it restricts the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state in which it restricts the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 will be described, and a description of the case where it restricts the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first passage TR1 from a state in which it restricts the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 13(a) and 13(b), before the game ball is sent to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball abuts against the action section 983a), as described above, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution section 983 repels the magnetic body 988b (see Figure 10), causing the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c to be tilted toward the second passage TR2. Note that the action section 983a on the second passage TR2 side abuts against the abutment section 982a1 of the front base 981, thereby restricting the amount of rotation (see Figure 13(a)).

When the game ball is sent to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connection position of the action section 983a with the abutment section 983d is set to one side in the direction of gravity (lower in the direction of gravity) than the connection position with the abutment section 983d of the intermediate plate 983b, so that the weight of the game ball can be applied to the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c as an axis, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side. The amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side abutting against the abutment portion 982a1 of the front base 981. In this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c acts toward the second passage TR2 side to a state in which the magnetic body 988c acts toward the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution section 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Furthermore, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution section 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution section 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b and throw the game ball one ball to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to Figures 14 to 16. Figure 14(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and Figure 14(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and Figure 16 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in front view and has a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 is mainly formed with a first insertion hole 991a formed through on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the sorting unit 980 side, a second insertion hole 991b formed through on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d formed through on both sides in the horizontal direction of the second insertion hole 991b, and a plurality of through holes 991f formed in a circular shape around the outer periphery in front view.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. This allows the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a to roll toward the second passage member 992.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985e of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

The third insertion hole 991c also has recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both horizontal sides on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 991c1 are portions that house the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed with dimensions that are approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991c1, and also prevents the detection device SE3 from being improperly operated from the outside when combined with the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

Furthermore, when combining the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. This prevents a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding outward, and allows the overall size of the ball throwing unit 970 to be reduced.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2, and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 14(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, with the width dimension in the short direction set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985f of the distribution unit 980 is connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and pass through the opening 985f to be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

The fourth insertion hole 991d also has recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both horizontal sides on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 991d1 are portions that house the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed with dimensions that are approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991d1, and also prevents the detection device SE3 from being improperly operated from the outside when combined with the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991d2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 14(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 992b penetrating to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole 992b. It is formed mainly of a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 992b, and an upright wall 992a standing on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The fifth insertion hole 992b is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the fifth insertion hole 992b is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. This allows a game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 to be received in the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993. The erected wall 992a is also formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993. This allows the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 992b to roll toward the third passage member 993 (the right side in FIG. 14(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993 side. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engaging portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding walls 992e are formed to protrude in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front on both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and have through holes 992e1 that penetrate the axis of the semicircle. In addition, when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, the protruding walls 992e are formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 991g of the first passage member 991, and the through holes 992e1 are positioned coaxially with the fastening holes 991g1. This allows the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 to be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a position where its internal space communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. This allows a game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 to be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

A guide wall 992c1 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c, facing the third passage member 993. The guide wall 992c1 is formed of a first wall portion 992c2 that stands on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) and a second wall portion 992c3 that is connected to the end of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extension direction and extends in the direction of gravity.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces that determine the position of the detection device SE4, and the dimension between the erected wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing portions of the detection device SE4.

The detection device SE4 is also positioned at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

The second passage member 992 also has a ring projection 992f that protrudes toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced horizontally (left-right direction in FIG. 14(a)) from the sixth insertion hole 992c. The ring projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, thereby allowing the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 to be fastened and fixed together.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and pass through the opening 985d to be received by the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, the first insertion hole 991a is connected to the outer periphery with a ring-shaped protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw that passes through the second passage member 992 is screwed. This allows the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 to be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and pass through the opening 985g to be received by the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 is mainly formed with a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through at approximately the middle position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, an erect wall 993e erected from the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity towards the second passage member 992, an engagement portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed into the side surface on the second passage member 992 side.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side longer than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a position that communicates with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. This allows a game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 to be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). be done. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 993a can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (the right side in FIG. 14(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992 (lower side in FIG. 14(b)). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 14(b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the external shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the erected wall 993e and the first wall portion 992c2 of the second passage member 992 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the short side in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This allows the detection device SE4 to be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engagement portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and has a bent portion 993d1 at its protruding tip that bends toward the second passage member 992. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the bent portion 993d1 and the second wall portion 992c3 of the second passage member 992 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This allows the detection device SE4 to be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140, and is disposed on the back side (opposite the playing area) of the front unit 940 which includes the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. Therefore, by replacing the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and disposing a different unit, a different playing style can be achieved without affecting the flow of the game balls flowing down the playing area.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 69. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980 are formed as passages that guide the ball backward without returning it, but the distribution unit 980 in the second embodiment The unit 300 is configured to allow the ball to move back and forth. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 17 to 35, and then the configuration of the operation unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 36 to 69.

FIG. 17 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17, an internal opening is formed in the center frame 86 disposed inside the game board 13, and the player can visually recognize the operating unit 500 through the internal opening of the center frame 86. .

In addition, in this embodiment, since the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the visibility is not limited to that through the internal opening of the center frame 86; The operating unit 500 can be visually recognized through the base plate 60 located on the outside.

18 is a front view of the game board 13, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the game board 13, FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 21 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. It is a diagram. In FIG. 18, the wind turbine FS1 and the nail KG1, which were not shown in FIG. 2, are also illustrated.

As described below, this embodiment is provided with an upper connecting member 270 that replaces the nail's function of redirecting the ball's flow path, and nails KG1 are not placed in the area where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged.

This makes it possible to avoid the impermeability of the nail KG1 from acting as a drawback. In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the upper position of the center frame 86 where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged (the position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62), the upper position of the center frame 86 can be removed. Since the light passing through can be prevented from being reflected in various directions or blocked by the nail KG1, the visibility of the light effect at a position above the center frame 86 can be improved. Note that the mode of light production at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

Figure 19 shows that the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is recessed upward at the center of the left and right sides, and that the sensor cover 254 is also used to hold the electrical wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251 placed in the recessed portion.

As shown in FIG. 19, at a position below the center frame 86, a collecting gutter 480 that forms a path for balls entering the general winning opening 63 to flow down is fastened to the back side of the base plate 60, and a wide decorative member 490 that is disposed above the collecting gutter 480 and is shaped to straddle the rear side of the first winning opening 64.

The collecting gutter 480 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. This can prevent the collecting gutter 480 from blocking the incidence of light from the back side. In addition, when viewed from the front, visibility of the ball that enters the general prize opening 63 and flows down the collecting gutter 480 can be improved.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed from a colored transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. This allows the wide decorative member 490 to stand out to the player who views the gaming area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 has fastening screw insertion holes 491 at the left and right ends. A fastening screw that is screwed into the collecting gutter 480 is inserted into the insertion hole 491, and the wide decorative member 490 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 480 by the fastening screw. This makes it possible to connect attention to the wide decorative member 490 to attention to the ball flowing down the collecting gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 has a pair of left and right inclined forming parts formed at the same angle of inclination as the plate-like part behind the plate-like part (ceiling plate part 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63. 492, and a central forming portion 493 extending in the left-right direction on the left and right inner sides of the inclined forming portion 492.

The inclined forming portion 492 is positioned so that the upper surface of the member is aligned with the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63 when viewed from the front. Therefore, even if the plate-shaped portion that rolls the ball is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, it is possible to make the ball appear as if it is rolling down the inclined forming portion 492 when viewed from the front, making it easier to grasp the path that the ball takes.

The center forming part 493 constitutes the ceiling part of the downward path of the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 (the inclined extension part 315 to be described later). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the falling path, and even if the falling path of the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling off the flowing path. The central forming portion 493 formed from a resin material allows the flow path of the ball to be easily seen from the front.

In FIG. 20, resin members such as an upper connecting member 270 made of a light-transmissive resin material and a winning hole forming member 400 having a portion projecting into the gaming area are illustrated above and below the center frame 86. ing. These resin members can produce the effect of stably maintaining the downward flow mode of the ball, but the details will be described later. Note that in FIG. 20, illustration of the nail KG1 and the windmill FS1 is omitted.

To give an overview first, a common effect of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the winning hole forming member 400 is that they are easy to repair when cracked or chipped. This effect is not achieved when using commonly used metal nails.

In the case of nails planted in the base plate 60, there is a possibility that the nails will bend or break if a ball collides with them or if an operator accidentally overloads the nails. If it is bent, it may be possible to restore it to its original shape by bending it the same amount to the opposite side, but if it is bent, it is difficult to restore it to its original shape.

To begin with, nails are driven into the base board 60 using an automatic machine, and the general method is to drive the nails into the entire game board all at once, rather than driving them one by one. Therefore, even if only one nail is broken, it is difficult to re-drive the broken nail with other nails installed, and the entire base board 60 needs to be replaced. there is a possibility.

In this case, since the rails 61, 62 and the outer edge member 73 are attached to the base plate 60, it is necessary to either reattach these attached members to the new base plate 60 or replace these members altogether, which can easily result in high repair costs.

On the other hand, if a part of the resin member such as the upper connecting member 270 or the winning opening component member 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing it with a new member, and the base plate 60 can be replaced. There's no need to. Furthermore, since the resin members are independent from the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc., there are no costs related to the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. when replacing the resin members, so repair costs can be suppressed.

In Figure 21, the illumination board 251 and board holding plate 252, which are placed on the top of the center frame 86, are shown to be positioned so that the board holding plate 252 fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the illumination board 251, which is placed in front of the board holding plate 252, is positioned so that it fits within the inner position of the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, but details will be given later.

As shown in FIG. 21, the base plate 60 has a plurality of fitting portions 60c formed as cylindrical protrusions whose outer shape tapers from the rear surface of the plate toward the rear surface side. The fitting portions 60c have female threads formed on the inner diameter side, and function as portions into which fastening screws are screwed when fastening the operating unit 500 to the base plate 60.

Figure 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in Figures 22 and 23, the game board 13 comprises a base plate 60, a central component unit 240 that is disposed inside the base plate 60 and has a center frame 86, an upper connecting member 270 that connects the upper portion of the central component unit 240 to the base plate 60 and limits the flow direction of balls flowing down the play area, and a thin plate member 290 that is disposed between the upper connecting member 270 and the central component unit 240.

Details of the central component unit 240 will be described later, but as shown in an enlarged view in Figure 22, the central component unit 240 is formed with a fixing portion 244 that is used to position and fix the thin plate member 290.

Figure 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central component unit 240, and Figure 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central component unit 240. The central component unit 240 is a unit that is assembled into a ring shape when placed in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, and has a center frame 86 that guides the balls as they flow down.

The central structural unit 240 includes an upper structural member 241 that forms the upper side of the center frame 86 and a lower structural member 261 that forms the lower side of the center frame 86 . The upper component 241 and the lower component 261 are made of a light-transmissive resin material and constitute the upper and lower halves of a ring shape, respectively, so that they surround the third symbol display device when viewed from the front in the assembled state (see FIG. 18). A center frame 86 is configured.

In this way, by configuring the center frame 86 in a ring shape by combining multiple members instead of configuring it in a ring shape as a single item, it is possible to reduce the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member. . Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the resin mold can be suppressed.

For example, if the design of the base plate 60 is changed so that the shape of the upper edge of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is formed in a generally arc shape rather than a shape that is recessed upward in the left-right center to correspond to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 as in this embodiment, the center frame 86 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by changing the design of only the upper half (upper component 241) accordingly, and the component designed to correspond to this embodiment can be reused for the lower half (lower component 261).

As a result, in order to make minor changes such as changing the design of the base plate 60 or changing the shape of the center frame 86 to change its appearance, it is necessary to manufacture a new large mold that encompasses the entire center frame 86. Since there is no mold, it is possible to reduce mold costs.

The upper component member 241 includes a thin plate portion 242 that is arranged flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-like extension extending from the front side of the thin plate portion 242, so that the glass is not exposed during the game. A band-shaped frame portion 245 is formed with dimensions that do not allow balls to pass through between it and the unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and is formed to be able to guide the flow of the ball, and a band-shaped frame portion 245 is arranged below and on the left and right inner sides of the band-shaped frame portion 245. A decorative portion 247 is provided to form a substantially arc shape.

The thin plate portion 242 has extension portions 243 that extend to the rear side at the left, right, and upper edges for reinforcement, and a fixing portion 244 that is used to position and fix the upper connecting member 270 (see Figures 22 and 23).

The extension portion 243 is designed so that its front-rear width is approximately the same as the thickness of the base plate 60. That is, the longitudinal thickness of the thin plate portion 242, which is shorter in longitudinal width than the extension portion 243, is designed to be thinner than the thickness of the base plate 60. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the thin plate portion 242.

The fixing part 244 includes a recessed part 244a that is recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23), and a recessed part 244a that is disposed close to the recessed part 244a and protrudes from the front side. A protruding portion 244b and a fastening portion 244c into which a fastening screw inserted into the upper connecting member 271 from the front side is screwed are provided at symmetrical positions.

The thin plate portion 242 is disposed flush with the base plate 60, and the protruding portion 244b can be formed at any position on the front side. This improves the design freedom for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see Figures 22 and 23). The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing portion 244 will be described later.

The decorative portion 247 is formed with a plurality of three-dimensional patterns and figures, and is formed to have lower light transmittance than the thin plate portion 242. Thereby, the decorative portion 247 can be used as a portion that divides the field of vision while maintaining some light transparency.

So far, the configuration of the front side of the upper component 241 has been mainly described. Next, the configuration arranged on the back side of the upper component 241 will be described. The upper component 241 includes an illumination board 251 fastened to a fastening portion formed on the back side of the thin plate portion 242, a board holding plate 252 fastened together with the fastening screw that fastens the illumination board 251, a dish-shaped member 253 that is sandwiched between the illumination board 251 and the thin plate portion 242 and is formed into a dish shape that flares out toward the front side, and a sensor cover 254 that is fastened to a position on the back side of the decorative portion 247 on one of the left and right sides (the right side in this embodiment) of the upper component 241.

The board holding plate 252 is not symmetrical, and the lower right portion is omitted compared to the left side. This makes it easier to connect the electrical wiring DH1 (see Figure 19) that is passed through from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the illumination board 251 is located on the back surface of the board at the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed to make it easy to connect the electrical wiring DH1 to this position.

Furthermore, the substrate holding plate 252 has a recessed portion 252a formed in a curved upward convex shape at the center position on the left and right. The recessed portion 252a is formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the operating unit 500, and will be described in detail later.

The sensor cover 254 is a fixing member for mounting a capacitance sensor (for example, a sensor that can detect when a player places his/her hand over the front side of the glass unit 16) inside. In this embodiment, the sensor cover 254 is not only used to mount the capacitance sensor, but also serves as a relay for the electrical wiring DH1 that is connected to the illumination board 251.

That is, by fixing the electrical wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the illumination board 251 with a binding band or the like, the electrical wiring DH1 can be held at the rear position of the decorative portion 247. Thereby, the electric wiring DH1 can be hidden from the player's view. In this way, by using the sensor cover 254 to maintain the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, the number of assembly steps can be reduced compared to the case where a dedicated member for maintaining the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 is prepared. Material costs can be reduced.

The lower component 261 includes a thin plate portion 262 fastened to the front plate of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), a band-shaped extension portion 263 extending from the thin plate portion 262 to the rear side in a band shape, a rear cover portion 264 fastened to a fastening portion formed at the extended end of the band-shaped extension portion 263 and covering the rear side of the band-shaped extension portion 263 so as to block it, a pair of left and right front flow path components 265 fastened to the front side of the left and right lower ends of the thin plate portion 262 and forming a flow path for flowing the balls to the rear side between the thin plate portion 262, and a pair of left and right rear flow path components 266 fastened to the rear side of the left and right lower ends of the thin plate portion 262 and combining with half components protruding from the thin plate portion 262 of the front flow path components 265 to the left and right inside to form a flow path for guiding the balls to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension portion 263.

The band-shaped extension portion 263 has an upper surface portion that slopes downward toward the left and right center portions, and functions to return the rolled ball to the front side of the base plate 60. At the left and right center portions of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, there is a center back slope portion 263a that slopes downward toward the back side so that the ball with a reduced speed in the left and right direction can easily flow to the back side, and on both left and right sides of the center back slope portion 263a. A pair of left and right front inclined parts 263b are arranged slightly below the central rear inclined part 263a and are inclined downwardly toward the front so that the ball whose speed in the left and right direction has settled can easily flow to the front side, and a rear side is formed by the central rear inclined part 263a. A ball discharge hole 263c is formed through the base plate 60 so that the ball guided to the front side of the back covering part 264 after flowing down to the side can be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60.

In relation to the band-like extending portion 263, the back covering portion 264 basically closes the ball to prevent it from falling off from the back end of the band-like extending portion 263; In this case, a gap is formed between the ball and the belt-shaped extending portion 263 to allow the ball to flow downward. The ball guided to the front side through this gap is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

Since the ball ejection hole 263c is arranged at the center position on the left and right, and the first prize opening 64 is arranged below it (see FIG. 18), the balls ejected from the ball ejection hole 263c have a high probability of being hit by a nail. The ball enters the first winning hole 64 with a higher probability than the ball approaching the first winning hole 64 while being bounced by KG1. Therefore, when a ball is guided by the belt-shaped extension portion 263, attention to the ball can be improved.

The channel front structure section 265 forms a guide path that guides the ball flowing down the front side of the thin plate section 262 to the back side, and the channel rear structure section 266 forms the rear end surface of the guide path to guide the ball. is guided to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263. In other words, the channel front configuration section 265 and the channel rear configuration section 266 form a tunnel-shaped section that discharges the balls that have flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension section 263 .

Referring back to Figures 22 and 23, the upper connecting member 270 is a member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a thin plate-like portion 271, protruding portions 272-277 that protrude from the plate-like portion 271 as if being pushed out from the rear side to the front side, a thin portion 278 formed partially thin on the rear side of the plate-like portion 271, and a protruding portion 279 formed on the thin portion 278 so as to protrude toward the rear side.

The plate-like portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical arch shape that is long in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion follows the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86 . In addition, the upper edge of the plate-shaped portion 271 is curved, and in detail, the tangent at a specific point on the upper edge of the plate-shaped portion 271 is the outer rail disposed close to the specific point. The shape is parallel to the tangent line of the corresponding point of 62.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 are spaced apart by a distance approximately equal to the diameter of a ball (game ball) (see FIG. 18). This makes it easier to avoid the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271 and losing momentum.

That is, the ball introduced into the game area is configured to leave the outer rail 62 before it collides with the plate-shaped portion 271. In other words, as long as the ball is in contact with the outer rail 62, the ball will not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271, so the ball is fired with the maximum firing strength (for example, the ball is fired at the outer rail 62 until it collides with the return rubber 69). It is possible to avoid that the momentum of the ball (which contacts and rolls) collides with the plate-like portion 271 and its momentum is attenuated.

This avoids unnecessary attenuation of the ball, and also prevents the plate-shaped portion 271 from cracking or chipping due to a ball with maximum launch strength colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271.

Note that the distance between the outer rail 62 and the plate-like portion 271 is not limited to a distance approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere, and various forms may be exemplified. For example, in consideration of the shape of the sphere, the interval may be changed in the front-back direction (the interval becomes wider as the distance from the base plate 60 increases) so as to avoid collision between the sphere and the plate-like portion 271. In this case, since the distance between the plate-shaped portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side closer to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, when decoration is applied to the plate-shaped portion 271, the formation area of the decoration can be expanded. .

The overhanging parts 272 to 277 have a symmetrical shape with respect to the left-right center of the plate-like part 271 from positions that are symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the plate-like part 271, and extend from the back side of the plate-like part 271 to the front. These are the parts that extend out to the sides, and each one replaces the function of a nail.

From the left and right center side, they will be described as a first overhang 272, a second overhang 273, a third overhang 274, a fourth overhang 275, a fifth overhang 276, and a sixth overhang 277. do.

The first projecting portion 272 and the second projecting portion 273 are arranged in front of the central component unit 240 with a thin plate member 290 interposed therebetween. The third projecting portion 274 is arranged to straddle the central component unit 240 and the base plate 60. The fourth overhang 275 , the fifth overhang 276 , and the sixth overhang 277 are arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 .

As such, each of the protrusions 272 to 277 differs in which component it is placed on in front of, which may result in differences in function and design concept, but more details will be given later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion that is formed thinly by shifting the back surface of the plate toward the front side by the thickness of the thin plate member 290 or an amount slightly exceeding the thickness in order to arrange the thin plate member 290. In this embodiment, instead of a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by applying a pressing force to the thin plate member 290 from the thin portion 278, a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by the fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 22) is adopted. are doing.

The offset dimension of the back surface of the plate toward the front side in the thin portion 278 is not limited to being greater than or equal to the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the offset dimension of the back surface of the plate toward the front side may be designed to be less than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the thin plate member 290 is formed to be expandable (compressible) in the thickness direction, which makes it easier to fix the position of the thin plate member 290 while avoiding excessive pressure being applied to the thin plate member 290.

Further, for example, the displacement of the thin portion 278 toward the front side of the back surface of the plate may be reduced only in a portion corresponding to the edge of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the range in which pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge of the thin plate member 290.

The protruding portion 279 is a portion that is inserted into a positioning hole 291 drilled in the thin plate member 290, and is a protruding portion for positioning the thin plate member 290. Because a recess (depression) corresponding to the shape of the protruding portion 272, 273 is formed on the back side of the position of the first protruding portion 272 or the second protruding portion 273 in the thin portion 278, the protruding portion 279 cannot be protruded from this position. In other words, the protruding portion 279 protrudes from a position of the thin portion 278 that avoids the position of the first protruding portion 272 or the second protruding portion 273.

The thin plate member 290 is a thin plate-like (sheet-like) member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plurality of positioning holes 291 drilled for positioning during assembly, and an upper connecting member 270 in the center. A plurality of insertion holes 292 are provided, which are formed as holes for inserting fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the component unit 240.

The positioning holes 291 include a hole 291a that is drilled on the left and right outer sides and through which the protrusion 244b of the central component unit 240 is inserted, and a hole 291b that is drilled on the left and right inner side and through which the protrusion 279 of the upper connecting member 270 is inserted. , is provided. That is, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning with both the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270.

In this embodiment, the left and right outer side means the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the left and right inner side means the left and right center side of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front. means.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the protruding portion 244b is formed at a position facing the recessed portion on the back side of the second projecting portion 273. As shown in FIGS. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the protruding portion 244b is hidden by the second protruding portion 273. Thereby, the protrusion 244b can position the thin plate member 290 (position stabilizing) while reducing the visibility of the protrusion 244b.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, by making the part formed in the upper connecting member 270 a protruding part 279 instead of a hole, it can be positioned easily even in the narrow range of the boundary between the protruding parts 272 and 273. can be made up of parts. In other words, when forming a through hole or a recess in a narrow area, the thickness of the member may become excessively thin and the strength may be insufficient, but this situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily avoid restricting the positioning of the overhanging portions 272, 273 and reducing their strength due to the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290. That is, when forming a positioning hole at the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272, 273, it is necessary to make the width of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272, 273 equal to or greater than the width of the hole (or equal to or greater than the diameter if the hole is circular), and there is a possibility that the strength of the overhanging portions 272, 273 will be reduced by the amount of material removed by the hole. However, according to this embodiment, these problems can be easily solved.

On the other hand, as described above, since the back surfaces of the projecting parts 272 and 273 are recessed, the projecting part 279 cannot be formed; however, as shown in FIG. This can be achieved by protruding the protruding parts 244b, so the positioning portions of the thin plate member 290 (protruding parts 244b, 279) can be arranged without being restricted by the arrangement of the protruding parts 272, 273. .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by forming the protrusions 244b and 279 for positioning the thin plate member 290 on both the central unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, the upper connecting member 270 can be designed more freely. Since it is possible to avoid restrictions on the arrangement of the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining high strength and strength, the position of the thin plate member 290 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, by being designed so that the protrusion 279 inserted into the thin plate member 290 can be inserted into the recessed part 244a of the central component unit 240, the thin plate member 290 is inserted into the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270. The upper connecting member 270 can be positioned with respect to the central component unit 240 at the same time as the upper connecting member 270 is positioned.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that can be seen by the player via the upper connecting member 270. Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters are painted on the front of the thin plate member 290, and the colors and brightness seen through the thin plate member 290 change in various ways depending on the differences in the emission patterns (differences in color and brightness) of the light emitted from the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 251 of the central component unit 240.

Unlike the case where a pattern, figure, character, or character is drawn directly on the base board 60, according to this embodiment, if the thin plate member 290 is removed, the pattern, figure, character, or character drawn on the thin plate member 290 can be removed from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, if you want to change the gameplay while using the same shape of the game board 13 (so-called different specs), you can change the patterns, figures, characters, characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13. There are cases where it is made easier for players to understand the gameplay.

If patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, it will be necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, which essentially means replacing the entire game board 13, which can easily increase costs when changing gameplay.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 that has a different pattern, figure, letter, character, color, etc., drawn on it, so there is no need to replace the entire game board 13. Therefore, it is easy to suppress the cost of changing the playability.

Figure 26 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXVI of Figure 18, Figure 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVII-XXVII of Figure 26, and Figure 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII of Figure 26.

As shown in FIG. 26, the projecting parts 272 to 277 are each formed in an individual shape, but when a ball introduced into the game area collides with the ball, the projecting parts 272 to 277 reduce the momentum of the ball and They have a common purpose of causing the ball to flow down to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

The extensions 272-277 are formed as replacements for nails that have traditionally been installed in a similar arrangement. That is, each extension 272-277 is designed to surround the multiple nails that are installed when viewed from the front.

As can be seen in common among the first overhang portion 272, the second overhang portion 273, and the third overhang portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other side surfaces. This allows the ball to flow in the same direction along the slope of the upper surface, regardless of the position on the upper surface. As a result, even if the adjustment of the firing force is slightly off, the ball can be easily flowed down a similar path, and the stress of the player who wants the ball to flow down a similar path can be alleviated during the game.

The third protrusion 274 and the fourth protrusion 275 are arranged next to each other, so even a slight deviation in the ball launch force adjustment will change which side the ball will land on, but the slope of the upper surface is significantly different. That is, the upper surface of the third protrusion 274 is a gently sloping downward surface that slopes inwardly to the left and right, while the upper surface of the fourth protrusion 275 is a steeply sloping downward surface that slopes inwardly to the left and right.

Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the fourth projecting portion 275 and flows downward will bounce upward significantly upon collision with the center frame 86, and its momentum is likely to be lost. Therefore, on the downstream side of the gaming area, it is easy to flow down toward the out opening 71 or toward the general winning opening 63 without reaching the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, balls that reach the upper surface of the third protrusion 274 and flow down collide with the center frame 86 in the left-right direction, and the load in the rebound direction can also be used as momentum for the ball to flow down, making it easier for the ball to reach the first winning hole 64 downstream of the play area.

In other words, the shapes of the protrusions 272-276 are designed so that the way the ball flows downstream of the play area changes depending on which of the protrusions 272-276 the ball reaches. This allows players to be proactive in adjusting the force with which they launch the ball.

As shown in Figures 27 and 28, the base plate 60 and the extension portion 243 of the central component unit 240 are designed to be arranged with gaps CL1 and CL2 between the top and bottom, the gaps being approximately the thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240.

In other words, the design concept is not to position the central component unit 240 in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but to leave a gap between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central component unit 240, and to simultaneously align the central component unit 240 with respect to the base plate 60 when fastening (connecting) it with the upper connecting member 270.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the thin plate member 290 and the central component unit 240 are arranged on the back side of the first overhang part 272, while the base plate 60 is placed on the back side of the third overhang part 274. is placed. In this way, the members arranged on the back surfaces of the overhanging parts 272 to 277 are not all the same and may be different.

As shown in FIG. 27, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 is formed with a thin wall, for example, when a load is applied to the first overhang portion 272, the first overhang portion 272 undergoes bending deformation. In this case, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 can also be flexibly deformed, the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 can be absorbed. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the first projecting portion 272 will break or chip.

Therefore, for example, when a ball collides with the first projecting portion 272, even if the force of the ball is very large, the first projecting portion 272 may be bent and deformed, and a thin plate portion caused by the bending deformation may be caused. The deflection of the ball 242 can sufficiently reduce the momentum of the ball, so that the ball can flow down after colliding with the first projecting portion 272.

As described above, the thin plate portion 242 is more likely to flex due to the adoption of a configuration in which gaps CL1 and CL2 are provided between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, rather than a configuration in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are fitted together. In other words, in this embodiment, by providing gaps CL1 and CL2 between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, the central structural unit 240 is flexibly deformed, thereby dissipating the load applied to the first protrusion portion 272.

A similar effect can be expected for the second projecting portion 273 as well. Note that the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 includes the load caused by the collision of game balls, the load applied by a clerk at a gaming machine store when clearing ball jams in the gaming area, and the load applied by a worker performing maintenance work. It is assumed that the load will be applied from

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the base plate 60 is formed thick enough that it does not deflect. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the third overhang 274, it is not possible to expect the base plate 60 to deflect and dissipate the load. However, since the height position of the third overhang 274 is lower than the overhangs 272 and 273, the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small. Therefore, even if the third overhang 274 is disposed in front of the base plate 60, the possibility of the third overhang 274 cracking or chipping can be reduced.

Furthermore, if the momentum of the ball that collides with the third overhang 274 is excessively reduced at a location where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the ball may stop flowing down, so this book has been In the embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the third projecting portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60.

In addition, since the third protrusion 274 is prevented from bending and is in a stable state, the ball can be guided more stably in the left and right areas and the lower area of the center frame 86, which are the play areas where the nails are planted, and the ball can be guided more stably. This makes it possible to stabilize the correspondence between the ball's launch strength and the way the ball flows down.

To reliably prevent the third overhang 274 from cracking or chipping, it is preferable to design the impact angle with the ball and the shape of the third overhang 274 so that the load applied to the third overhang 274 is small (so that the load can be easily dissipated). It is preferable to adopt a similar design concept for the fourth overhang 275 to the sixth overhang 277.

The advantages of using the protrusions 272-277 as substitutes for the nails KG1 that are planted in the base plate 60 are explained below. In particular, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. That is, in the case of the protrusions 272-277 that are made of a light-transmitting resin material, there are fewer areas that are hidden from the player compared to the nails KG1 that are made of metal.

For example, even if the illumination board 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the back side of the overhanging parts 272 and 273 as in this embodiment (see FIG. 27), the overhanging parts 272 and 273 do not allow light to pass through. Since the light is transmitted through the illumination board 251, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the illumination board 251, and the patterns, figures, characters, or characters drawn on the thin plate member 290. Can be done.

The illumination board 251 is equipped with a central light-emitting means 251b consisting of four LEDs located in the center of the lower part, a surrounding light-emitting means 251c consisting of seven LEDs arranged to surround the left, right and top of the central light-emitting means 251b, and a distant light-emitting means 251d consisting of two LEDs arranged near each of the left and right ends, and the arrangement in this embodiment is shown by hidden lines in Figure 26. The light-emitting means 251b, 251c, 251d do not necessarily have the same direction of light irradiation, and each is intended to illuminate a different target.

The central light-emitting means 251b emits light in a forward direction (with the optical axis in the front-rear direction) and illuminates the symbol mark (shown in white in FIG. 26) in the center of the left and right of the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240. In order to make the entire symbol mark glow softly, the light is designed to have a large width angle in the irradiation direction based on the optical axis of the light emitted from the central light-emitting means 251b.

The surrounding light emitting means 251c irradiates light in the front direction (optical axis is in the front-back direction), and irradiates light onto parts having widths in the front-back direction, such as the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the edges of the overhanging portions 272 and 273. arranged to be introduced. The optical axis of the light emitted from the surrounding light emitting means 251c is used as a reference in order to concentrate the energy of the light on the optical axis so that the light visible to the player does not become weak after passing through a portion with a long width in the front-rear direction. The width angle in the irradiation direction is designed to be small.

As a result, the path of light (the path of light passing through the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the overhanging portions 272, 273) can be directly highlighted by changing the brightness and darkness of the light and the color, and there are differences in how to make it stand out. You can perform a performance that adds . For example, by making a difference in the brightness of the light on the left and right sides, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that implicitly suggests the direction in which the ball will be launched.

For example, the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c, which is disposed behind the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272, is positioned to guide light from the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272 to the left and right outer edges 272b. This allows the player to easily shoot a ball using the light of the first overhang 272 as a marker to make the ball reach the left and right outer edges 272b of the first overhang 272. The optical axis of the light passes through a position where the front-to-back width of the first overhang 272 is long, making it easier for the light to be totally reflected inside the first overhang 272.

In addition, the internal shape of the first protrusion 272 is curved so that the rear end protrudes inward, so that light that travels inside the first protrusion 272 is repeatedly reflected inside the first protrusion 272, making it easier to collect the light inside the first protrusion 272. This makes it possible to make the first protrusion 272 emit light brighter than the surrounding area when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 27, the illumination board 251 is disposed on the rear side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240. In this embodiment, the illumination board 251 is disposed on the rear side of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the ball is guided on the front side, within the thickness dimension (within the front-to-rear dimension) of the thick portion of the base plate 60 (the portion of thickness required to drive the nail KG1). In other words, the front-to-rear position of the illumination board 251 is set closer to the front than the front-to-rear position of the rear side of the thick portion of the base plate 60.

This is an impossible board arrangement in the area where the nail KG1, which serves as a component for guiding the ball, is driven into the base plate 60. In other words, the base plate 60 must be made sufficiently thick in the area where the nail KG1 is driven in, so it is not possible to ensure space for placing the illumination board 251 within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (front side of the front-to-rear positions of the back side of the thick portion of the base plate 60).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a thin upper connecting member 270 is used instead of the nail KG1 as a component for guiding the ball, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the upper connecting member 270. By arranging the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 instead, a space for arranging the illumination board 251 is secured on the back side of the range where the ball is guided.

This allows for greater design freedom in the placement of the illumination board 251 compared to when the illumination board 251 must be placed on the back side of the base plate 60, and also allows the illumination board 251 to be placed closer to the front.

By shifting the arrangement of the illumination board 251 toward the front side, it is possible to easily shift the arrangement of the rotation performance device 800 (see FIG. 17) of the operation unit 500 disposed on the back side of the game board 13 toward the front side, and also Since the central light emitting means 251b and the surrounding light emitting means 251c arranged on the decorative board 251 and the light sources arranged on the rotating production device 800 are arranged on the front side, the light that is visible to the player can be made brighter. can do.

The far-field light emitting means 251d is arranged so that the light irradiation direction (optical axis direction) intersects with the front-rear direction (the direction shown by the arrow in FIG. 26), and irradiates light onto the extensions 274-276 arranged on the left and right outer sides, the belt-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, etc.

As a result, even with a configuration like the present embodiment in which a thick portion of the base plate 60 is formed to ensure strength and overhanging portions 274 to 276 are arranged in front of the thick portion, it is possible to achieve long-distance light emission. The overhangs 274 to 276 can be sufficiently illuminated using the light irradiation from the means 251d.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the illumination board 251 is closer to the front end side of the base board 60 than the rear end of the board thickness (disposed within the board thickness dimension), It is possible to make it easier for the light emitted in the direction intersecting the direction to reach the fifth projecting portion 276 that is distant to the left and right outside.

The shapes of the projections 274-276 that receive the light from the far-field light-emitting means 251d are designed to ensure a sufficient amount of light. That is, for example, the third projection 274 has a wide side surface 274a (the inner left and right and upper side surface) on the far-field light-emitting means 251d side, so that the light from the far-field light-emitting means 251d is received by the surface.

In addition, on the opposite side (the outer left and right sides and the lower side) of the far-field light emitting means 251d, a corner 274b is formed at the joining position between the faces, and the cut formed in the protruding portion 274 is formed in a shape that concentrates light at this corner 274b. This makes it possible to ensure the light emission intensity even at the corner 274b that is far from the far-field light emitting means 251d.

Note that the light irradiation to the sixth projecting portion 277 is not from the illumination board 251, but from the thin plate portion 242 disposed on the left and right inner sides of the sixth projecting portion 277 (not at the center of the left and right, but from the left and right sides). This is done using light that passes through the outer thin plate portion 242) toward the front side.

The illumination effect of the sixth protrusion 277 is also achieved by the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800, which will be described later. The configuration for directing the light emitted from the rotating member 810 toward the front side and the settings for the intensity of the light will be described later.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 20. As shown in FIG. 20, the winning holes 63, 64, etc. arranged below the center frame 86 are formed as part of a winning hole forming member 400 made of a light-transmissive resin material.

29 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIGS. 29 and 30, the state in which the winning a prize opening constituent member 400 is disassembled is illustrated.

The winning opening component 400 includes a central component 410 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 at the left and right center portions of the game board 13, and a covering member 430 configured to cover the lower part of the central component 410 from the front side. a left component member 450 arranged on the left side of the central component member 410 and fastened to the base plate 60; a right component member 470 arranged on the right side of the central component member 410 and fastened to the base plate 60; Equipped with Note that the right component 470 is formed to have a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape with the left component 450.

The central component 410 includes a flat main body plate 411 that is fastened and fixed in surface contact with the base plate 60, a horizontally long opening 412 that is formed as an opening that constitutes the specific winning opening 65a, and the horizontally long opening. A pair of left and right distribution parts 413 are formed on the left and right side parts of 412 so as to be able to distribute the falling paths of the balls upwardly, and the upper side surface is formed in a curved plate shape above the distribution parts 413. A pair of left and right curved protrusions 414 protrude toward the front side so as to distribute the falling path of the balls, and a pair of curved protrusions 414 large enough to discharge the balls to positions spaced outward from the left and right ends of the oblong opening 412. A pair of left and right outlet ports 415 are provided.

The main body plate portion 411 includes seat placement recesses 411a that are recessed from the back side on both left and right sides so as to reduce the plate thickness. The seat arrangement recess 411a is recessed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the production sheet member (thin plate member 380), and is formed with a recess depth that is approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

The gap between the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. This allows the ball to flow down through the gap between the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414, increasing the randomness of the ball's flow and improving attention to the ball.

The distribution section 413 has multiple ridges 413a protruding from the left and right inner side (the second winning opening 140 side). The ridges 413a are shaped to slow down the speed at which the balls flow down by contacting them, and the deceleration effect of the ridges 413a can reduce the impact force applied from the balls to the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. This can prevent damage to the opening/closing plate 65b.

The tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 31) of the curved surface that passes through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved protrusion 414 is designed to pass through the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces on the first winning opening 64 side) of the distribution section 413. Therefore, it is easy for a ball that has rolled down the curved surface of the curved protrusion 414 to the lower end to reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution section 413.

The covering member 430 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body plate 431 formed in a thin plate shape, a pair of left and right belt-shaped portions 432 extending from the left and right side ends of the main body plate 431 toward the left and right inner parts toward the rear side in a belt shape, a pair of left and right vertical plate portions 433 connected to the left and right inner ends of the belt-shaped portions 432 and extending toward the rear side in a vertically long plate shape, a pair of left and right inclined plate portions 434 extending toward the rear side in a long plate shape that inclines upward from the upper end of the vertical plate portion 433 toward the left and right inner parts, and an erect portion 435 formed on the lower side of the electric role 140a from the main body plate portion 431 toward the rear side so as to regulate the rotation angle of the electric role 140a.

The belt-like portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the standing portion 435 are formed with a length that allows their tip portions to abut against the main plate portion 411 of the central component member 410 when the covering member 430 is fastened and fixed to the central component member 410. In other words, the belt-like portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the standing portion 435 change the flow path of the balls and distribute the flow path of the balls.

The belt-shaped portion 432 is arranged along the left and right outer sides and the bottom side of the outlet 415, and the balls that roll and flow down the belt-shaped portion 432 are guided to the outlet 415 and discharged from the play area.

The inclined plate portion 434 is positioned closer to the specific winning port 65a than the outlet 415, but the upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 415, so that the balls that roll down the inclined plate portion 434 are also guided to the outlet 415 and discharged from the play area.

When the central component 410 and the covering member 430 are assembled (see FIG. 17), the erected portions 435 are positioned on the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413 of the central component 410 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball. This allows the ball to flow down between the distribution portion 413 and the erected portions 435.

The left component 450 includes a flat main body plate 451 that is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 while being in surface contact with the main body plate 451, and a left portion of the main body plate 451 that extends from the front. It is a plate-shaped part where the left end is arranged with a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass between the overhanging part 453 that is formed overhanging on the side, and as it goes to the right side, A ceiling plate part 455 formed in a shape that slopes downward, and a plurality of ball guide parts 457, 459 formed in a shape that can guide the ball to the general winning hole 63 below the ceiling plate part 455. Be prepared.

The ceiling plate part 455 is not separated in the middle so that only the balls that have passed through the gap between the overhanging part 453 and the ceiling plate part 455 can flow down the ball guide parts 457 and 459. It is formed into a plate shape.

Seat placement recesses 451b and 471b are formed on the back side of the left component 450 and the back side of the right component 470, which are recessed so as to reduce the plate thickness from the back side. The seat arrangement recesses 451b and 471b are recessed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of a production sheet member (not shown), and are formed with a recess depth that is approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member. Note that the explanation regarding the thin plate member 380 will be used instead of the example of the decoration of this sheet member.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXI of FIG. 18. Balls that do not pass through the gap between the overhanging part 453 and the ceiling plate part 455 and roll down the upper surface of the ceiling plate part 455 are not guided to the guide parts 457 and 459 and are not guided to the central structure. It flows down so as to be guided toward the member 410 side. The flow path of the ball from the upstream side of the left component 450 and the center component 410 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31, the plurality of nails KG1 installed on the base plate 60 are arranged with gaps smaller than the diameter of the ball along a straight line that slopes downward as it goes inward in the left-right direction. While a path for the ball flowing down toward the center (main path FL1) is formed, by leaving gaps that exceed the diameter of the ball in some places, a falling path for the ball to pass through the gaps and deviate from the main path. FL2 and FL3 are formed.

The ceiling plate part 455 is formed so that a ball can roll on the upper surface, but the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the ceiling plate part 455 differs depending on the timing of dropping downward from the main path FL1. To explain in detail, when the path of the ball changes from the main path FL1 to the falling path FL2, the falling velocity of the ball is switched from a state in which it mainly faces in the left-right direction to a state in which it mainly faces in the vertical direction.

Then, after reaching the ceiling plate part 455, the speed is switched again to the state in which the ball faces the left and right directions, so the sooner the ball reaches the ceiling plate part 455 (the more upstream it is on the downstream path), the faster the ball can reach the ceiling plate part 455. The rolling speed (momentum) of the ball when flowing down the portion 455 increases, making it easier to reach the left and right inside of the gaming area (specific winning opening 65a side).

In addition, the left and right inner ends (lower ends) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 are positioned higher than the upper ends of the adjacent curved protrusions 414, making it easier to prevent the ball that rolls along the ceiling plate portion 455 and passes too far to the left or right from being blocked by the left or right outer side surfaces of the curved protrusions 414.

If the rolling speed of the ball when flowing down the ceiling plate part 455 is increased and it reaches the specific prize opening 65a at that speed, the opening/closing plate 65b will be damaged due to the large impact force being transmitted from the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b. Although this may be a concern, in the present embodiment, a protrusion 413a is provided on the downward flow path of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby reducing the downward speed of the ball.

In addition, erected portions 435 are arranged on the left and right inner sides of the protrusions 413a, preventing multiple balls from flowing down side by side. This prevents balls from getting stuck between the protrusions 413a and the erected portions 435 (rectification effect), and also makes it easier to prevent balls from landing on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, making it easier to prevent damage to the opening/closing plate 65b (improved durability).

In this way, the ball's flow speed is reduced and the ball's flow path is restricted. This reduces the impact force that occurs when the ball collides with the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby preventing the opening/closing plate 65b from being damaged.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the protrusions 413a are arranged at bilaterally symmetrical positions with respect to the upright part 435, in the pair of flow paths formed by the pair of left and right protrusions 413a and the upright part 435. If the balls flow down at the same time, a plurality of balls may land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting the balls left and right, it is possible to easily allow a plurality of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same time. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the progress of the special game state becomes too slow.

Since the upper surface of the ceiling plate section 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface on the left and right sides, the ceiling panel section 455 can receive multiple balls at the same time. It can be flowed to the winning a prize opening 65a side).

The balls that are diverted to the left and right inner sides pass through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413 (the side where the protrusion section 413a is formed) in order, and reach the open opening and closing plate 65b in order. In this way, according to this embodiment, the path of the balls that reach the opening and closing plate 65b is consolidated into a path that passes through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which balls collide with each other upstream of the opening and closing plate 65b and deviate from the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, by designing so that the left and right ends of the specific prize opening 65a and the opening/closing plate 65b are located on the left and right outer sides of the position where it flows down while contacting the protrusion 413a of the distribution part 413 and reaches the opening/closing plate 65b. Even if the balls collide with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b and bounce from side to side, the state in which the balls rest on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b can still be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball spills from the opening/closing plate 65b.

Even if multiple balls are closely packed together at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b, in this embodiment, a space is formed below the inclined plate section 434, allowing the balls to flow to the outside left and right of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the path of the balls passing through the inside left and right of the distribution section 413 can be prevented from becoming clogged.

In this embodiment, a gap larger than the diameter of the ball is provided between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414, allowing the ball to flow down through this gap. For example, when a ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 collides with a ball flowing down through the inner drop path FL3, the ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 has its left-right speed reduced, making it easier for it to enter the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414.

The frequency with which balls flowing down the main path FL1 flow down the outer drop path FL2 or the inner drop path FL3 can vary depending on the condition of the nail KG1 (adherence of dirt, production lot). Therefore, without measures, the gaming efficiency and gaming profits will be affected by the condition of the nail KG1, and it will not be possible to provide games under equal conditions.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if balls that roll along the outer drop path FL2 and the ceiling plate portion 455 occur more frequently than balls that flow down the inner drop path FL3, fewer balls will reach the first winning hole 64, which is disadvantageous in a game state (normal state, time-saving state, high probability state, etc.) in which a lottery is entered to aim for a jackpot. However, in a jackpot game state in which the specific winning hole 65a opens and closes, the possibility of balls getting into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414 can be reduced, and most balls that reach the ceiling plate portion 455 can be guided to the specific winning hole 65a, improving game efficiency (e.g., the time required for a jackpot game can be shortened).

On the other hand, if balls that flow down the inner drop path FL3 occur more frequently than balls that pass through the outer drop path FL2 and roll on the ceiling plate portion 455, more balls will reach the first winning hole 64, which is advantageous in a game state (normal state, time-saving state, high probability state, etc.) in which a lottery is drawn to aim for a jackpot, but in a jackpot game state in which the specific winning hole 65a opens and closes, balls that flow down from the inner drop path FL3 collide with the path of balls that roll down the ceiling plate portion 455, and balls that fall into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414 or pass through the gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved protruding portion 414 and flow to the out hole 415 side frequently occur. As a result, more balls will deviate from the specific winning hole 65a, and the game efficiency of the jackpot game will decrease.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the frequency of occurrence of balls passing through the outer falling path FL2 and rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 changes in magnitude with the frequency of occurrence of balls flowing down the inner falling path FL3, the game state is changed. The system switches between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state, and is designed so that the player is neither unilaterally advantageous nor unilaterally disadvantageous.

In other words, while allowing the state of the nail KG1 to differ, no matter what the state of the nail KG1 is, a relationship is maintained that is advantageous to the player in some states and disadvantageous to the player in other states. By doing so, we aim to provide gaming under equal conditions.

The following describes the path of the ball that flows down the outer drop path FL2 between the extension plate portion 455a that extends upward at the left end of the ceiling plate portion 455 and the side wall portion 453a that is curved downward and outward on the left and right inner sides of the protrusion portion 453 that is arranged opposite the extension plate portion 455a.

The rate at which the ball is guided to this flow path varies depending on the state of the adjacent nails KG2 (the distance between the nails at the position where the ball flows down). The state of the nails KG2 may change due to collision with the ball, touch by a staff member of the gaming machine store, etc.

Further, the rate at which the ball reaches just before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453. Whether the ball reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 varies depending on the state of the wind turbine FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453. Since the rotating shaft of the windmill FS1 is also driven into the base plate 60 in the same way as the nail KG2, its condition may change due to a collision with a ball or being touched by an employee at a gaming machine store.

The first ball guide section 457 is disposed directly below the flow path between the extension plate section 455a and the side wall section 453a, so that the ball that flows down is normally discharged from the game area through the first ball guide section 457. The first ball guide section 457 constitutes the general winning opening 63, and when a ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457, a prize ball is paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, when a ball flows straight down between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the ball has an 80% probability of entering the first ball guide portion 457, a 10% probability of deviating to the left, and a 10% probability of deviating to the right. Note that these ratios can be designed to differ depending on the shape (slope, spacing, etc.) of the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a and the arrangement of the first ball guide portion 457.

On the other hand, for example, if the next ball reaches the first ball guide part 457 while the ball that has reached the first ball guide part 457 is still staying there, the next ball The balls tend to deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and flow down. Further, for example, when a plurality of balls gather together and flow toward the first ball guide section 457, some of the balls tend to deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide section 457 and flow down.

When the ball deviates from the first ball guide part 457 to the right and left sides, no winning opening is provided on the downstream side thereof, and the ball is discharged from the out opening 415. On the other hand, if the ball deviates from the first ball guide part 457 to the left and right inside, it can reach the second ball guide 459 by rolling on the inclined guide part 458 that projects from the first ball guide part 457 to the left and right inside. The second ball guide section 459 constitutes the general prize winning opening 63, and when a ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459, a prize ball is paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457 and the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459 can be set arbitrarily. Although this is possible, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to be larger when the ball is guided to the downstream side.

In other words, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459 is set to be greater than the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457.

As a result, when a ball falls to the left of the left end of the ceiling slope portion 455, the ball does not enter the first ball guide portion 457 and deviates to the right side (second ball guide portion 459 side). It is possible to create the gameplay that the player desires, and it is possible to improve attention to the left component member 450.

For example, when the setting is such that one prize ball is paid out as the ball is guided by the first ball guide section 457, the ball heading toward the first guide section 457 is placed on the left and right sides (on the left side in FIG. 31). If the ball deviates from the ball, the number of balls in the player's hand decreases, and if the ball is guided by the first guide section 457, the number of balls remains the same (one prize ball for one shot) and deviates to the left and right (right side in Figure 31). The number of balls in hand may increase as the balls are guided to the second ball guide section 459 and prize balls (more than 1 ball, generally 2 to 15 balls) are paid out. It is possible to configure the gameplay.

This makes it possible to clearly correlate the flow of the ball near the first guide section 457 with the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player, thereby improving attention to the flow of the ball near the first guide section 457. Can be done.

The inclined guide portion 458 extending to the right of the first guide portion 457 is made of a resin material, and therefore easily breaks when bent. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to grasp the change in state. If it is possible to grasp the broken state, the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped in operation until the part is replaced, thereby preventing players from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

In this embodiment, various shapes are devised so that the ball rolling on the inclined guide part 458 is guided to the second ball guide part 459 with high probability. First, a bulging portion 456 that bulges toward the lower surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide portion 459 .

When the ball starts to roll on the top surface of the inclined guide section 458 and has not yet fully stopped bouncing up and down, it comes into contact with the bulge section 456 in the left-right direction, and the ball's direction of speed is redirected downward. This makes it possible to prevent the ball, which has rolled on the top surface of the inclined guide section 458, from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide section 459 due to its momentum.

Second, the inclined guide section 458 has a horizontal interval with the second ball guide section 459 that is shorter than the radius of the sphere, and a vertical interval with the second ball guide section 459 that is shorter than the radius of the sphere. (The slanted guide part 458 and the second ball guide part 459 are formed in a dimensional relationship that does not allow the passage of a ball between the inclined guide part 458 and the second ball guide part 459.) ) Therefore, the inclined guide part 458 can easily prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide part 459.

The winning slot component 400 is a resin molded component, and is attached to the base plate 60 by fastening screws, so replacement in the event of a defect is easier than replacing (re-driving) the nail KG1.

For example, if nail KG1 breaks, there is a high possibility that the game machine will stop operating for a long period of time, but normally, nails KG1 are driven in in large numbers rather than one by one. Since the nails KG1 are driven by an automatic machine, it is not easy to re-drive the nails KG1 even if some of the nails KG1 break.

Therefore, repairs often require the replacement of the entire game board, but if it is determined that the replacement costs cannot be covered, the machine may be put away in storage without being put back into operation, even if there is no other broken part other than nail KG1. In other words, there was room for improvement in terms of maintainability and extending the operating life of the game machine.

In this embodiment, in order to minimize the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1, the ball falling in the vertical direction is received by the protruding portion 453 of the left component 450, and the received ball is made to roll left and right on the upper surface of the protruding portion 453 to reduce its vertical momentum before it comes into contact with the nail KG1 downstream. This reduces the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1, and suppresses the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1.

Furthermore, when focusing on the nails KG1 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the outer drop path FL2, the left and right outer sides are covered by the overhanging portion 453, so the ball will not collide with these nails KG1 from the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the period until the nail KG1 breaks can be made longer compared to when the nail KG1 is subjected to load from random directions.

The balls flowing down the front side of the left component 450 pass through the outlet 415 and are discharged to the back side of the base plate 60. At this time, since the vertical plate portion 433 restricts the passage of the ball to the left and right inner side (the side close to the opening/closing plate 65b), the ball does not flow toward the opening/closing plate 65b without passing through the outlet 415. It can be prevented.

As a result, the pivot axis of the opening/closing plate 65b can prevent balls from flowing in from the left component 450 side, so there is no need to always leave a gap between the opening/closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 so that balls can pass through as a countermeasure against ball clogging, and the vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the pivot axis (lower edge) of the opening/closing plate 65b can be set to less than the diameter of the ball.

Even if configured in this way, if a ball on the opening/closing plate 65b falls to the left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate portion 433 and the opening/closing plate 65b, and when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the opening/closing plate 65b, which was blocking the ball's flow path, moves away from the ball's flow path, and the temporarily placed ball will flow down toward the outlet 71. This reduces the possibility of ball clogging.

Figure 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in Figure 31. The main body plate 451 of the left component 450 has extensions 451a extending in a thin plate shape (thinner than the thickness of the main body plate 451) from the left and right inner edges along the front surface of the base plate 60, and the main body plate 411 of the central component 410 has covering extensions 411b extending from the left and right outer edges along the front side surfaces.

In this embodiment, the extending portion 451a is held between the covered extending portion 411b and the base plate 60. As a result, the fastening screws for fixing can be removed from the left and right inner ends of the left component 450, which is the side to be held, so the presence of the fastening screws can be avoided when decorating the left component 450. This makes it easy to prevent the problem of deterioration of the performance effect due to conspicuousness. In addition, since the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, the number of assembly steps and material costs can be reduced.

The front-rear position of the front end of the covered extension part 411b in the state where the extension part 451a is held between the base plate 60 is located closer to the back side than the front-rear position of the front end of the main body plate part 451. There is. As a result, when the ball flowing down the front side of the main body plate part 451 flows toward the front side of the main body plate part 411, the front end of the covered extension part 411b collides with the ball, causing the ball to move outward on the left and right sides. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the object is bounced back.

33 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 300, and FIG. 34 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the above-mentioned distribution section 983 is rotatably arranged inside the distribution unit 300, and passes through the first prize opening 64 inside the distribution unit 300. The structure is such that the balls guided by the ball are distributed alternately to the left and right.

The sorting unit 300 is a member disposed in a rotatable manner from the rear side with a sorting section 983, and has a first configuration that constitutes a flow path that distributes the balls that have passed through the first prize opening 64 to the left and right and flows them down. The member 310, the ceiling component 330 that constitutes the ceiling of the path through which the balls that have passed through the first prize opening 64 flow downward, and the first component 310 support the shaft member 988a of the distribution section 983 with both ends. A first auxiliary member 340 that comes into contact with the distribution section 983 to prevent balls flowing from falling off to the back side, and a second component that constitutes a discharge path for balls discharged rearward from the downstream side of the first component 310. 350 and a member to which the second component 350 is fastened and fixed, which is disposed so as to cover the rear and upper part of the discharge path formed by the second component 350, and is fastened and fixed to the first component 310. A pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 and a pair of left and right thin plate members 380 arranged on the front side of the first component 310 and between the first component 310 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410. and.

The first component 310 is made of a colorless, semi-transparent resin material and includes a plate-shaped central plate 311 formed along a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction, an extension plate 313 extending from the upper end of the central plate 311 to the front side, a pair of inclined extensions 315 extending from the rear side of the central plate 311 and extending in a band-like manner in a direction that slopes downward toward the left and right outside, a pair of direction switching parts 317 connected to the left and right outer ends of the inclined extensions 315 and switching the flow direction of the balls (switching 90 degrees from the left-to-right direction to the front-to-rear direction in this embodiment), and a pair of left and right opening forming parts 320 in which multiple openings large enough for the balls to pass through are arranged on the left and right sides of the front side of the central plate 311.

The central plate portion 311 is provided with a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 directly below the rear end portion of the extension plate portion 313 into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted. The bearing portion 312 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate portion 313 is provided with a protrusion portion 313a that is formed as a protrusion whose upper end surface slopes downward toward the rear along the left and right central portion, forming a rolling path for the ball, and a pair of left and right wall-like portions 314 that are erected from the left and right edges and guide the ball rearward.

The balls flowing down the inclined extension 315 flow outward to the left and right while being prevented from falling off to the rear side by the front plate 371 of the second auxiliary member 370. The second auxiliary member 370 is also used as a member to prevent the detection device SE3 from falling off.

The direction switching section 317 is provided with an inclined surface section 318 which is formed as a plate surface on which the ball can roll at a position one step lower than the inclined extension section 315 on the left and right outer sides of the left and right ends of the inclined extension section 315 and slopes downward toward the front side, and an erect curved section 319 which is erected from the rear edge and the left and right outer edges of the inclined surface section 318 and curved toward the front side in a shape that can guide the ball to the front side.

The opening forming part 320 includes a sensor placement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the back side, and extends toward the front side along the left and right side surfaces of the sensor placement opening 321 to support the left and right ends of the detection sensor SE3. a pair of left and right support extensions 322, a winning opening 323 formed between the support extensions 322 so that a ball can pass therethrough, and a winning opening 323 based on the support extension 322. A pair of ejection openings 325 are formed on the left and right opposite sides of the screen so that the balls can pass therethrough, and a bottom surface with a shape that can receive the balls that have passed through the winning opening 323 and the ejection opening 325 and guide them to the back side. A bottom surface forming portion 327 whose portion is curved toward the rear, and a pair of bottom surface forming portions 327 extending from the lower edge of the support extension portion 322 toward the bottom surface forming portion 327 so as to partition the upper surface side of the bottom surface forming portion 327. A partition wall portion 328 is provided.

When the detection device SE3 is inserted into the sensor placement opening 321, the detection hole SE1a is designed to be positioned inside the winning opening 323. The positioning protrusion 322a protruding from the front edge of the support extension 322 comes into contact with the front end of the detection device SE3, making it easy to position the front and rear of the detection device SE3.

After passing through the direction switching section 317 and reaching the opening forming section 320, the ball passes through either the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, and rolls on the upper surface of the bottom forming section 327 to be guided to the rear side. Each rolling path is separated by a partition wall section 328, which reduces the possibility of the balls crossing or colliding on the upper surface of the bottom forming section 327. This allows the flow of the balls to be streamlined, preventing ball clogging and stagnation.

Of the balls rolling on the top surface of the bottom component 327, those that pass through the winning opening 323 are detected by the detection device SE3. On the other hand, those that pass through the discharge opening 325 are not detected by the detection device SE3. In either case, the balls that roll on the top surface of the bottom component 327 are detected by a detection device (not shown) that detects the discharge of balls, and are then guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

To reach the ball discharge passage (not shown), the ball rolls inward on the rolling surface 351 of the second component 350 to the left and right while being prevented from falling out to the rear side by the second auxiliary member 370, and is guided through the common drop flow paths 352 arranged on both the left and right sides.

The second auxiliary member 370 includes a front plate portion 371 that covers a space open on the back side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the ball from falling off, a rolling surface 351 of the second component member 350, and a common fall. A rear plate part 372 that blocks the upper and rear sides of the flow path of the balls flowing down along the flow path 352 to prevent the balls from falling off, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening part 329 of the first component 310. An insertion hole 373 formed in the front plate part 371 so that it can be inserted therethrough; and an insertion hole 374 formed in the rear plate part 372 so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 353 of the second component 350 can be inserted thereinto. , is provided.

Note that the materials for forming the second component member 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the second component member 350 is formed from a colored opaque resin material, and the second component member 350 is made of a colored opaque resin material. 370 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material.

This reduces the visibility of the balls flowing through the common drop flow path 352, lowering attention to the discharged balls, and also allows light to be taken in from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370, so that the light taken in can brightly illuminate the first component member 310 arranged in front, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the first component member 310.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being accommodated in the seat placement recess 411a (see FIG. 30) of the main body plate portion 411. In this positioned state, the game board 13 is assembled, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched between the main body plate portion 411 and the first component member 310 in the front-rear direction.

A description will be given of the front-rear, left-right and left-right displacement (change in placement) of the ball that entered the first prize opening 64 in the course of its descent. First, the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 is displaced backward along the extension plate portion 313. After that, it is distributed to the left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution part 983 described in the first embodiment, and is displaced to the left and right outside along the inclined extension part 315.

Thereafter, the flow direction is switched to the front side by the direction switching unit 317, and the paper is displaced forward. If a guide section with a curved surface for switching the direction of the ball's flow is placed in front of the falling ball, the guide section may easily block the line of sight to the ball, reducing visibility. However, in this embodiment, since the erected curved portion 319 as a guide portion is arranged on the back side of the ball, there is a low possibility that the erected curved portion 319 will block the line of sight to the ball. This makes it easier to ensure visibility of the ball.

Then, the ball that flows straight down through the winning opening 323 is detected by the detection device SE3 and displaces backward along the bottom surface component 327. Also, the ball that displaces to the left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaches directly above the discharge opening 325 passes through the discharge opening 325 and displaces backward along the bottom surface component 327.

In this way, in this embodiment, the position of the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is shifted to the rear when it first enters, then flows to the left and right, and then shifts to the front just before passing through the detection device SE3. This allows the distribution section 983 to be shifted to the rear compared to the configuration of the first embodiment, and also allows space to be created below the extension plate section 313.

This empty space can be used as a space for arranging a drive mechanism for operating the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Thereby, in this embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the arrangement of the second winning hole 140 can be brought closer to the first winning hole 64.

In addition, when the flow paths are configured to be consistently aligned in the vertical direction by configuring the path along which the distributed balls flow down by switching the path in the front and back direction (for example, when the flow path is configured to be consistently arranged in the vertical direction (for example, as described above in the distribution unit 980). The vertical width of the flow path when viewed from the front can be shortened compared to the case of the above structure. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the relative vertical arrangement of the detection device SE3 with respect to the first winning opening 64 can be improved.

FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXV of FIG. 18. In FIG. 35, the central component 410 and the thin plate member 380 are shown semitransparently, so that the distribution unit 300 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 35, for convenience of explanation, the external shapes of the electric accessory 140a in both the closed state and the open state are shown. In addition, in the description of FIG. 35, FIGS. 33 and 34 will be referred to as appropriate.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate (sheet) shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that can be seen by the player through the central component member 410. Although not shown in the figures, in this embodiment, colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters are painted on the front surface of the thin plate member 380, and the colors and brightness seen through the thin plate member 380 change in various ways depending on the state of the light that is irradiated (differences in color and brightness).

Unlike when patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to this embodiment, the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be removed from the game board 13 by removing the thin plate member 380, so the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when changing the gameplay characteristics (so-called different specifications) while keeping the same shape of the game board 13, the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the game board 13, or the colors, etc. may be changed to make it easier for the player to understand the gameplay.

If patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, it will be necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, which essentially means replacing the entire game board 13, which can easily increase costs when changing gameplay.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 with a different drawn pattern, figure, character, or character, color, etc., so there is no need to replace the entire game board 13. None. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the gameplay.

The type of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited in any way, and various types are exemplified. For example, a colorless and transparent area may be formed above the detection device SE3 to improve the visibility of the ball rolling on the inclined surface portion 318, and other parts may be densely decorated with figures and patterns. Also, for example, numbers or other marks may be drawn at the locations corresponding to the winning opening 323 and the ejection opening 325 when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to understand the profit he or she can obtain depending on which mark the ball falls close to.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to be large enough to extend outward beyond the through hole 60a to the left and right, and is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main plate portion 411 of the central component member 410.

In this embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 is positioned so as to abut against the front end of the first component member 310 (e.g., the front end of the support extension portion 322). In other words, since the detection device SE3 is positioned close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be moved closer to the player. This improves the visibility of the ball passing through the detection device SE3, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a ball passing through the detection device SE3 is overlooked.

Moreover, the detection device SE3 is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the electric accessory 140a when viewed from the front, and is not hidden by the electric accessory 140a. As a result, compared to the case where the downward path of the ball is hidden by the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 5), the ball passes through the detection device SE3 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 140a (open state, closed state). visibility can be improved.

In addition, because the detection device SE3 is positioned behind the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410, it does not affect the way the balls flow down the front side of the main body plate portion 411. In other words, the design freedom of the play area can be improved compared to when the detection device SE3 is positioned protruding forward of the main body plate portion 411 (forward of the front end surface of the base plate 60).

For reasons of strength, nails are not provided on the main body plate portion 411, but in this embodiment, as a substitute for nails, a distribution portion 413 and a curved protrusion portion 414 are used to distribute the paths of the balls. ing. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a monotonous falling path of the ball on the front side of the main body plate portion 411.

Both balls that pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 and are detected by the detection device SE3 (balls that pass through the winning opening 323) and balls that pass through the ejection opening 325 follow a path that rolls along the inclined surface portion 318 and displaces toward the front. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of balls that reach the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of balls detected by the detection device SE3.

Although visibility of the ball can be improved by displacing the ball toward the front side by the inclined surface portion 318, it is difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325. In this case, it is not possible to determine whether the ball has not really passed through the detection device SE3 or whether the ball has passed through the detection device SE3 but has been detected incorrectly, and the player may feel dissatisfied.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the ball passing through the winning opening 323 from the inclined surface part 318 is visually recognized as flowing downward in front view along the winning flow path FL31, whereas The ball passing through the discharge opening 325 from the surface portion 318 has its flow direction switched from downward to left and right by 90 degrees in front view along the non-winning flow path FL32.

In other words, whether the ball passes through the detection device SE3 can be determined based on whether there is a left-right component in the direction of the ball's downward flow, which reduces the possibility of misjudging the location where the ball passed. This makes it easier to determine whether the ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Both the game balls that flow down along the winning flow path FL31 and the game balls that flow down along the non-win flow path FL32 flow down near the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414 when viewed from the front. , the downstream path is visually recognized to overlap with the downstream path of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Therefore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 can be made to appear to the player as if they are flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a. The player often visually checks the number of game balls that reached the top of the opening/closing plate 65b but did not enter the specific winning opening 65a (game balls that passed when the opening/closing plate 65b was closed) by checking the game balls rolling on the inner rail 61 toward the outlet 71. However, since the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 flow down the winning flow path FL31 or the non-winning flow path FL32 and then flow backward along the bottom surface component 327 (see FIG. 34), the game balls do not appear in front of the outlet 71.

This allows the game balls that enter the first winning port 64 during a jackpot game to be added to the number of game balls that appear to be flowing down toward the specific winning port 65a, so that regardless of the number of game balls that enter the first winning port 64, it is possible to create the illusion that most of the game balls that are launched enter the specific winning port 65a.

Furthermore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game balls actually flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a do not collide with each other because their arrangement is separated at the front and rear by the thin plate member 380. This makes it possible to create the illusion described above without impeding the flow of the game balls flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

In this embodiment, the non-winning flow path FL32 is formed as a flow path that flows in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion 411 and the thin plate member 380 may be configured so that openings are drilled in the front-back direction in the path along which the ball flows after flowing down the inclined surface portion 318 toward the detection device SE3, and the non-winning flow path FL32 may be formed as a flow path along which the ball flows to the front side by passing through these openings.

In other words, the ball flowing down the non-winning flow path FL32 may return to the front side of the main plate portion 411 and flow down toward the outlet 71. In this case, if the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that flowed down the non-winning flow path FL32 may be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b and enter the specific winning port 65a.

In other words, it is possible to create a game in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can enter a specific winning opening 65a after returning to the front side of the main board portion 411, thereby increasing the attention paid to the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 (particularly during a jackpot game in which the opening and closing plate 65b opens and closes).

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 17) that is fastened to the rear side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is fastened to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

Figures 36, 37, 38, and 39 are front views of the operating unit 500. Figure 36 illustrates the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 of the operating unit 500, Figure 37 illustrates the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, Figure 38 illustrates the extended state of the internal operating unit 600, and Figure 39 illustrates one operating error limit state of the internal operating unit 600.

In this embodiment, the retracted state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 of the internal operation unit 600 is positioned at the upper end position of its vertical operation range, the intermediate state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned at the lower end position of its operable range while maintaining its forward and backward tilting posture from the retracted state, and the extended state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned at the lower end position of its vertical operation range and the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation performance device 800 faces in the forward and backward direction.

In the state change from the intermediate state to the extended state, a posture change (tilting motion) of the light emitting action production unit 700 in the front and rear direction occurs. This posture change is executed as a rotational movement around a predetermined rotational axis (center axis J1 to be described later).

In the present embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the horizontal tilt allowed by the design of the light emitting operation unit 700 has reached its limit. In FIG. 39, for convenience, the right side of the light emitting operation unit 700 is shown in the same position as in the retracted state, and the left side is shown shifted downward. In this embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light emitting operation unit 700 can be operated in the vertical direction while maintaining the tilt angle of one operation error limit state, but the details will be described later. do.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 is in a posture with the decorative plate 811 on which decorative figures and patterns are formed facing the front side.

The figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, as shown in FIG. It is visually recognized as an integral part (among the radially extending linear shape and the wave pattern formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is also visually recognized as being formed on the rotating member 810).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the rotating member 810 can be adjusted depending on the size of the rotating member 810. It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns that can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is tilted in the forward rotation direction, and the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 are Visible from the front.

These figures and patterns are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and are visually recognized as one unit when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state (of the radially extending straight lines and the wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the straight lines are formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and the wave patterns are visually recognized as formed on the main body member 710).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the main body member 710 can be It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns that can be displayed.

Since the light emitting operation production unit 700 is vertically displaced from the retracted state to the extended state, in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511, the figure or pattern changes from the state in which the figure or pattern is seen integrally in the retracted state to the bottom The figures and patterns formed on the wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the rotating member 810 begin to deviate from each other.

This misalignment becomes more noticeable the greater the vertical displacement. In contrast, in this embodiment, the light-emitting action production unit 700 tilts and displaces in the extended state, switching the side that is visible to the player, and allowing the player to newly see figures and patterns that are viewed as one with the bottom wall portion 511. Therefore, it is possible to configure the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the light-emitting action production unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) that displaces in the vertical direction to be viewed as one in both the retracted state and the extended state.

During the vertical displacement of the light-emitting motion production unit 700 described here, the external shape of the light-emitting motion production unit 700 when viewed from the front changes. This creates the illusion that a single production unit is multiple different production units, improving the design freedom of the motion production.

40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIGS. 40 and 41, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) disposed in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, it is possible to divide the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a plurality of positioning convex portions 513a that protrude in an annular shape toward the front side and have a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed in the center of the positioning convex portion 513a through which a fastening screw fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting portion 60c (see FIG. 21) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the female thread of the fitting portion 60c, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be an annular protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60 (circular in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape that increases the fitting gap (large-diameter ring shape) in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and a light emitting means and an operation unit are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 that is inserted into the rear case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and an internal operation unit 600 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. A light emitting production unit 518 disposed at the inner lower part of the back case 510 is provided.

The light emitting production unit 518 is a unit that irradiates light from behind to the front of the distribution unit 300 and the winning hole component 400 (see FIG. 29), and is formed by the distribution unit 300 and the winning hole component 400. It functions to brightly illuminate the path of the ball.

The decorative fixing member 520 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-like members that are arranged symmetrically on both the left and right positions and can be divided into vertical parts, and is arranged on the upper left side. a first fixing member 530 disposed on the lower left side, a third fixing member 550 disposed on the upper right side, a fourth fixing member 560 disposed on the lower right side, and a second fixing member 540 disposed on the lower left side; A left illumination board 570 disposed on the back side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, a right illumination board 580 disposed on the back side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560, Equipped with The configuration and role of each part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

42 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 43 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. 42 and 43, the decorative fixing member 520 is disassembled from the back case 510 and placed at the front, and the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled from the back case 510 and placed between the back case 510 and the decorative fixing member 520. The state shown in FIG.

The first fixing member 530 includes a thin-plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the front-rear direction, a front plate portion 534 extending rightward from the front side of the insertion plate portion 531, and an outer plate portion 537 extending leftward from the front side of the insertion plate portion 531.

The insertion plate portion 531 has a plurality of insertion projections 532 that protrude from the extended tip to the rear side with a shape and arrangement that allows it to be inserted into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600, and serves to prevent outward tilt displacement of the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600. The relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be described later.

The front plate part 534 is a plate-shaped part arranged in front of the left side illumination board 570 and formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570). A light diffusion process is formed on the back side of the left illumination board 570 in order to diffuse light from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side. Additionally, an insertion hole 535 is provided through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted.

The outer plate portion 537 is a portion that can abut against the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, and has an insertion hole 538 drilled therein to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 512a formed in the outer wall portion 512.

That is, when the operating unit 500 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 36), the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 to the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600.

The second fixing member 540 includes a front plate portion 541 that is disposed at the same front-to-rear position as the front plate portion 534 of the first fixing member 530 and is disposed with a slight gap from the lower end of the front plate portion 534, a fastening extension portion 544 that extends rightward from the lower right side of the front plate portion 541, and an outer plate portion 547 that extends leftward from the left end portion of the front plate portion 541.

The front plate 541 is a plate-like portion that is disposed in front of the left side illumination board 570 and is formed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570), and has a light diffusion treatment formed on the back side to diffuse light from light-emitting means such as LEDs that are disposed on the front side of the left side illumination board 570.

Furthermore, the insertion hole 542 is formed so that a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted therethrough, and the fastening screw fastened and fixed to the inner member 670 of the internal movement unit 600 can be inserted therethrough. An insertion hole 543 is provided. That is, by fastening and fixing via the front plate part 541, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be coupled and fixed.

The connecting extension part 544 includes an insertion hole 545 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 518a of the light emitting production unit 518 can be inserted. The outer plate part 547 is a part that can come into contact with the front part of the outer wall part 512 of the rear case 510, and is bored through so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 512b formed on the outer wall part 512 can be inserted therein. An insertion hole 548 is provided.

That is, when the operating unit 500 is assembled (see FIG. 36), the second fixing member 540 connects the outer wall 512 of the back case 510, the outer member 610 and inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600, and the light emitting unit 518. , are connected and fixed.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560 and the right side illumination board 580 are slightly different in shape from the first fixing member 530, the second fixing member 540 and the left side illumination board 570 due to the difference in the shape of the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 that is located on the rear side and is the subject of coverage. However, they are basically formed symmetrically to the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and the configurations and roles of each component are similar, so descriptions of overlapping parts will be omitted and the reference numerals mentioned above in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540 will be illustrated for convenience.

The order of assembling the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 will be described. When assembling to the rear case 510, the internal operation unit 600 is first assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 40), and then the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled to the rear case 510.

In summary, the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510 is performed in the following order: first, the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670 are fastened to the rear case 510, then the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is inserted from the front side inside the rear case 510 and positioned between the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670, the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is positioned at the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and the members (screws, collars, etc.) to prevent it from falling off are attached to the fastening part 682 from the front side.

In this embodiment, when assembling the light-emitting operation production unit 700, there is no need to attach the decorative fixing member 520 to the rear case 510, so the front side of the rear case 510 can be left wide open, and the movement of the worker's hands can be prevented from being blocked by the decorative fixing member 520. This improves work efficiency.

Furthermore, the work of inserting the fastening screws into the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, and 548 of the decorative fixing member 520 to fasten it can be performed from the front side of the rear case 510, so after the work of assembling the light-emitting action production unit 700 to the displacement member 680 is completed, the work of fastening the decorative fixing member 520 can be performed immediately after without changing the position of the rear case 510. This can further improve the work efficiency. Next, the details of the assembly work will be explained.

Figure 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in Figure 36, Figure 45 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLV in Figure 44, and Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in Figure 36.

In FIGS. 44 and 45, the light emitting action production unit 700 is disassembled from the back case 510, and illustration of the decoration fixing member 520 is omitted because it shows a state before the decoration fixing member 520 is assembled. On the other hand, FIG. 46 shows a state in which the light emitting action producing unit 700 and the decorative fixing member 520 are assembled to the back case 510 (see FIG. 36).

In this embodiment, the fastening positions are designed so that sufficient rigidity cannot be achieved only by fixing the internal operation unit 600 and the back case 510 (for example, the fastening positions are arranged only at one of the upper and lower ends). (see the imaginary line in FIG. 45), the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be flexibly deformable (changeable in posture) to the left and right outward with respect to the back case 510.

Utilizing this bending deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting action production unit 700. That is, the assembly of the light emitting action producing unit 700 is performed by inserting the fastening part 682 into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 and then screwing a fastening screw into the fastening part 682. By bending and deforming the light-emitting motion production unit 700 to the left and right outward, the dimensions of the path through which the light-emitting action production unit 700 enters toward the fastening portion 682 can be expanded from the fixed width W1 to the deflected width W2, making it easier to assemble. Work efficiency can be improved.

At this time, the internal operating unit 600 flexes and deforms outward to the left and right, causing the direction in which the fastening screw enters the fastening portion 682 to incline inward to the left and right as it approaches the rear side (the front side inclines outward to the left and right).

In this case, compared to the case where the fastening screw is inserted in the front-back direction, the driver for screwing in the fastening screw is separated (avoided) from the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 (with respect to the front-back direction). The fastening screw can be inserted into the rear case 510 in an inclined direction).

Therefore, the fastening work can be made easier, and the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700, whose shape is designed with one purpose of avoiding contact with the driver, can be improved. . That is, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of assembling the light emitting action production unit 700, and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750.

In order to achieve this effect, in the present embodiment, the horizontal dimension of the elongated hole 764a of the connected hole 764 through which the fastening screw is inserted is adjusted to accommodate the displacement of the fastening portion 682 due to the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600. Designed with compatible dimensions (sufficient left and right length).

Note that the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 inward to the left and right is less likely to occur compared to the bending deformation to the left and right, since the cylindrical member 695 comes into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 and resistance is generated. It is composed of

In this embodiment, by assembling the decorative fixing member 520, the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be restrained from being deflected outwardly to the left and right. This is because the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative There are more fastening positions between the fixing member 520 and the back case 510 (fastening positions arranged on the outer wall 512 of the back case 510 or the front side of the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions arranged closer to the front side); The effect can be achieved by devising the shape of the decorative fixing member 520.

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513, and the support plate portion 513, which is integrally configured with the outer wall portion 512, is attached to the base plate 60. It is fastened and fixed (see Figure 42). That is, the decorative fixing member 520 is restricted from being displaced by the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513. Thereby, the rigidity of the decorative fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600 can be improved by using the rigidity of the base plate 60, so that it is possible to suppress the deflection deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right sides.

Secondly, the insert plate portion 531 of the decorative fixing member 520 is positioned to abut against the left and right outer sides of the internal operation unit 600. In other words, the insert plate portion 531 can suppress bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outer sides.

These first and second configurations make it possible to prevent the internal operating unit 600 from bending and deforming outwardly to the left or right when the decorative fixing member 520 is attached.

In addition, the decoration fixing member 520 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, and the light emitting operation production unit 700 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, so that the posture of the rear case 510 is fixed. The assembly work can be performed in a series of steps, such as assembling the light emitting action producing unit 700 and then assembling the decorative fixing member 520, without changing the process. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work.

On the other hand, if the work of removing the light emitting operation producing unit 700 from the fastening part 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decorative fixing member 520, the number of maintenance work can be reduced and efficiency is improved.

Here, the illumination boards 570 and 580 are disposed on the back side of the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 42), and it is better to configure the illumination boards 570 and 580 to protrude inward from the left and right for better light emission. The range of performance can be expanded and the performance effect can be improved.

In contrast, if the illumination boards 570, 580 are positioned to protrude inward to the left and right as in this embodiment, when a maintenance worker moves the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 to the front, the connecting plate parts 765 formed on the left and right ends of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 may collide with the illumination boards 570, 580, causing damage to the illumination boards 570, 580.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a protective extension 677b is extended from the front edge of the extension wall 677 of the inner member 670 (described later) toward the left and right inward in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illumination boards 570 and 580 (see FIG. 42).

The left and right inner ends of the protective extension portion 677b are formed in the same shape as the shape line S51 (see FIG. 42) corresponding to the shape of the left and right inner edges of the upper side parts of the illumination boards 570 and 580, and the shape line It is extended to the position corresponding to S51.

As a result, the area for supporting the illumination boards 570, 580 from the back side can be increased, and the back surfaces of the upper parts of the illumination boards 570, 580 can be protected by the protective extension part 677b, so maintenance work can be carried out. It is possible to avoid contact between the illumination boards 570, 580 and the light emitting operation producing unit 700 at times.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, regardless of the shape of the illumination boards 570, 580, the formation of the extending portions inward to the left and right is omitted. Therefore, when removing the light emitting action production unit 700 at this position, there remains a possibility that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the illumination boards 570, 580 will come into contact with each other.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 700 is configured to change its posture as it moves downward (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the direction of the fastening portion 682 changes from the front-back direction to the vertical direction due to the change in posture. , and it becomes impossible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw. Therefore, the work for removing the light emitting action producing unit 700 is configured to be executed before the attitude of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes. Therefore, it is sufficient to form the protective extension portion 677b at a position before the attitude of the light emitting action production unit 700 changes, and this embodiment is designed in this way (see FIG. 37). .

In this way, rather than forming the protective extension 677b over the entire vertical range, it is possible to narrow the range of formation of the protective extension 677b by limiting its formation to the minimum necessary range to avoid contact between the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the illumination boards 570 and 580.

In other words, in this embodiment, the position of the light-emitting operation production unit 700, which can be removed, is limited to a position between the retracted state and the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, thereby reducing the range of formation of the protective extension portion 677b.

In this embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the light-emitting operation production unit 700 after removing the decorative fixing member 520 from the rear case 510. In this case, as in the assembly work, the internal operation unit 600 can be flexed and deformed outwardly to the left and right, thereby widening the left and right width of the path for removing the light-emitting operation production unit 700, thereby preventing the light-emitting operation production unit 700 from coming into contact with the protective extension portion 677b.

47 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. 47 and 48 mainly show the internal operation unit 600 in an exploded state, and illustration of the decorative fixing member 520 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the internal operation unit 600 includes an outer member 610 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 511 of the back case 510, and is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be movable in the vertical direction and in the left and right directions. An elevating plate member 630 disposed inside, a drive motor 648 that is a device that generates a driving force for elevating and lowering the elevating plate member 630 and is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610, and a drive shaft of the drive motor 648. A transmission gear 649 that is fixed to and transmits a driving force to the elevating plate member 630, and a coil spring SP1 that applies an upward biasing force (load in a tensile direction) to the elevating plate member 630 are provided.

Further, the internal operation unit 600 is arranged inside in the left-right direction so that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed between the outer member 610 and a resistance generating device 650 that is configured to be able to generate a resistance force for the movement of the elevating plate member 630. an inner member 670 that is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw that is inserted through the outer member 610 in the left-right direction; and a displacement member 680 that is movably supported by the inner member 670 and disposed inside the left-right direction. , a rotational posture assisting member 690 that is fastened and fixed from the left and right sides on the rear side of the upper end of the inner member 670, and a light emitting operation production unit 700 that is connected at both ends to the displacement member 680.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit that is roughly symmetrically configured, with the light-emitting operation production unit 700 positioned in the center on the left and right, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is supported for operation by a roughly common configuration that is fixed to the rear case 510 side on both the left and right sides of the light-emitting operation production unit 700.

Details of each component of the internal operation unit 600 will be described below with reference to Figs. 49 and 50, which are enlarged views of each area of Fig. 47. In the description of Figs. 49 and 50, Figs. 47 and 48 will also be referenced as appropriate.

Figure 49(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610, lifting plate member 630, and resistance generator 650 in range XLIXa of Figure 47, Figure 49(b) is a front perspective view of the outer member 610 in range XLIXb of Figure 47, Figure 50(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting plate member 630, inner member 670, displacement member 680, and rotation posture assist member 690 in range La of Figure 47, and Figure 50(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 680 and rotation posture assist member 690 in range Lb of Figure 47.

As shown in Figures 49(a) and 49(b), the outer member 610 includes a plate-like portion 611 formed in a long plate shape in the vertical direction, and an extended wall portion 621 extending in a wall shape on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like portion 611 (the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 512 that is adjacent to the outer wall portion 512 in the assembled state) and formed to partition the left and right outer areas of the plate-like portion 611.

The plate-shaped portion 611 has a pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 that are elongated in the vertical direction and is elongated and wide (wider than the elongated hole 612) at the rear of the upper elongated hole 612. It includes a wiring through hole 613 formed in an oval shape, and a pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614 that protrude outward from the left and right in a cylindrical shape at the rear of the lower elongated hole 612.

The long holes 612 are long holes for restricting the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 630, and a pair are arranged on the upper and lower sides. The front-to-rear width of the long holes 612 is formed slightly wider than the diameter of the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the lifting plate member 630 through which it is inserted, so that the displacement of the lifting plate member 630 in the front-to-rear direction is small. The pair of long holes 612 are intentionally formed with a staggered front-to-rear arrangement. In other words, the lower long hole 612 is arranged further forward than the upper long hole 612.

As a result, the support position of the upper part of the lifting plate member 630 is rearward compared to the support position of the lower part of the lifting plate member 630, so that the lower part of the lifting plate member 630 suspended from the upper part of the lifting plate member 630 is biased rearward by gravity.

As a result, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 can be brought closer to the transmission gear 649 side, so that it is possible to avoid the rack gear portion 634 from falling off from the transmission gear 649, and to optimize the meshing relationship. Can be done.

The wiring hole 613 is an opening for passing electrical wiring that is connected inside the light-emitting operation production unit 700 and is located on the left and right outside of the inner member 670 through the irregular opening 685a of the fall-prevention collar member 685, and discharging it to the left and right outside of the outer member 610.

The guide protrusion 614 functions as a portion that guides the displacement of the longitudinal displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650. That is, it functions to guide the longitudinally displacing member 653 so that it can be displaced in the longitudinal direction and to prevent the longitudinally displacing member 653 from tilting back and forth and changing its posture, but the details will be described later.

The extension wall 621 is provided with a number of fastening parts 622 arranged at the front end and configured to receive fastening screws inserted into the decorative fixing member 520, and a pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623 arranged on the rear side and formed to receive the insertion protrusions 532 (see FIG. 43) of the insertion plate part 531 of the decorative fixing member 520. The fastening parts other than the fastening part 622 arranged at the front end are mainly used to fasten and fix the illumination boards 570, 580 (see FIG. 40).

The lift plate member 630 includes a long body portion 631 whose long length is oriented in the up-down direction, a pair of upper fastening portions 632 that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the long body portion 631 and are inserted into the upper long hole 612 of the outer member 610 and are formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in, a pair of lower fastening portions 633 that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the long body portion 631 and are inserted into the lower long hole 612 of the outer member 610 and are formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in, and a rack gear portion 634 that is formed in a gear tooth shape on the back side of the long body portion 631 and is engaged with a transmission gear 649.

Further, the elevating plate member 630 is configured to be able to detect the position of the elongated main body 631 by extending from the lower end of the elongated main body 631 to the back side and disposed in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown). a detected portion 635 that is located between the pair of upper fastening portions 632; A drop-off prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the upper fastening part 632 by fastening screws arranged and inserted therein, and a fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the lower fastening part 633 by fastening screws arranged on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like part 611 and passed through. The ring member C1 is assembled to the upper fastening part 632 and the lower fastening part 633 in order to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are positioned to correspond to the front-to-rear arrangement of the long hole 612 of the outer member 610. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 633 is positioned forward of the upper fastening portion 632.

The longitudinal elongated hole 636 is a elongated hole that guides the longitudinal movement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 inserted through the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 of the inner member 670. It is formed with a front-to-back length that is greater than the front-to-back width of the area to be formed.

The fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the upper fastening part 632 with the upper fastening part 632 of the elevating plate member 630 inserted into the upper long hole 612, and the lower fastening part 633 is inserted into the lower long hole 612. 612 and the abutted plate 638 is fastened and fixed to the distal end side of the lower fastening part 633, so that the elevating plate member 630, which is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be movable up and down, can fall off from the outer member 610. can be easily prevented.

The abutment plate 638 has locking portions on the left and right outer sides for locking the lower end of the coil spring SP1. The upper end of the coil spring SP1 is locked to locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610. In other words, the coil spring SP1 generates a biasing force (pulling force) that biases the abutment plate 638 upward.

While the drop-off prevention plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, the abutted plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the area of contact with the resistance generating device 650 can be increased, and the magnitude of the load per unit area that occurs during a collision can be reduced, but details will be described later.

The resistance generating device 650 includes a solenoid 651 whose plunger extends and retracts in the front-rear direction, a fixed cover 652 for accommodating the solenoid 651 and fixing it to the left and right outer sides of the outer member 610, and a plunger of the solenoid 651 that is engaged with the solenoid 651. and a longitudinally displacing member 653 configured to be movable in the longitudinal direction by being guided by the guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610.

The fixed cover 652 has a number of insertion holes 652a drilled at both the top and bottom of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which the fastening screws screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b recessed with arrangement dimensions that allow the tip of the guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610 to fit into it.

The longitudinally displacing member 653 includes a pair of guided elongated holes 653a, which are elongated in the front and back, and are formed on both upper and lower sides as elongated holes through which the guide projections 614 are inserted. With the guided elongated hole 653a inserted into the guide protrusion 614, the fitting part 652b of the fixed cover 652 is fitted to the tip of the guide protrusion 614, so that the guide protrusion of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is fitted. Falling off from the installation portion 614 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 50(a) and 50(b), the inner member 670 includes a plate-shaped portion 671 arranged to face the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and It includes an extending wall portion 677 that extends outward in the form of a wall, and a rectangular projecting portion 678 that projects rectangularly inward from the left and right at the rear portion of the upper end of the plate portion 671 .

The plate-like portion 671 has a first elongated hole 672 formed as a long elongated hole in the vertical direction on the back side of the elevating plate member 630 than the front-back position, and a first elongated hole on the front side of the first elongated hole 672. A second elongated hole 673 is bored as an elongated hole that extends parallel to the first elongated hole 672 from an upper end that is shifted above the upper end of the first elongated hole 672; A curved long hole 674 bored as a connected curved long hole is provided.

In FIG. 48, the fastening portion is shown only on the upper end rear side of the left inner member 670 as the connection portion between the plate-shaped portion 671 and the rear case 510, and no other fastening portions are shown on the rear side of the inner member 670. As can be seen from this, the position of the plate-shaped portion 671 is fixed not mainly by direct fastening to the rear case 510, but by fastening via the outer member 610 and decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40) which are fastened to the rear case 510. In other words, the plate-shaped portion 671 generates a fixing force with the rear case 510 by indirectly fastening to the rear case 510.

The plate-like portion 671 includes a plurality of fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws are inserted into the plate-like portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction from the left and right outer sides. It is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610.

The first elongated hole 672 is formed to have a wider width than the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674. As a result, in this embodiment, the first elongated hole 672 can be used as a through hole for electrical wiring, and the electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation production unit 700 is exposed to the left and right inner areas of the pair of left and right inner members 670. This can be prevented, but the details will be described later.

The second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 are formed with the same width. The curved shape of the curved long hole 674 is formed as an arc shape with the center of the cylindrical portion 684 as the axis when the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided by the first long hole 672 is positioned at the lower end of the first long hole 672.

The extension wall 677 includes a partition wall 677a that is formed from the plate-shaped portion 671 to the left and right outside and surrounds the first long hole 672, and a protective extension 677b that extends from the front edge to the left and right inside in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illumination board 570, 580.

The displacement member 680 includes a box-shaped main body 681 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape with left and right inner sides open, and a pair of fasteners formed to protrude outward from the lateral side walls of the box-shaped main body 681. part 682, an extending part 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-like main body part 681, and a cylindrical part 684 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the corner of the box-like main body part 681 in the left-right outer direction, A fall prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the distal end side of the cylindrical part 684, and a metal rod-shaped member 686 is fitted and fixed to a fitting recess 683a formed as a circular recess at the proximal end side of the extension part 683. , a plurality of ring members 687 arranged in the gaps between the relatively displaced members and into which the metal rod-shaped members 686 are inserted, a large-diameter ring member 688 into which the cylindrical part 684 is inserted, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 in the front and back. The front and rear ring members 689 are inserted into the fastening portion 682 in a sandwiching state (see FIG. 46).

The fastening portion 682 has a female thread into which a fastening screw inserted into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is screwed, and the light emitting action production unit 700 is connected to the displacement member 680 by this fastening screw. Concatenated.

The extending portion 683 functions as a portion that protects the light emitting action producing unit 700 from coming into contact with the inner member 670 when the light emitting action producing unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (the extending portion 683 and the light emitting action producing unit (See FIGS. 45 and 46 for the arrangement relationship of 700).

The cylindrical portion 684 has an irregular opening 684b formed on the inner circumference so as to penetrate the box-shaped unitary portion 681 in the left-right direction, and fastening portions 684a formed so that fastening screws inserted into the fall-off prevention collar member 685 can be screwed in at both positions on either side of the central axis passing through the irregular opening 684a.

The cylindrical portion 684 is inserted into the first long hole 672 of the inner member 670, and the fall-prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684. An irregular opening 685a is formed in the center of the fall-prevention collar member 685, and is an opening of approximately the same size as the irregular opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684.

That is, in a state where the fall-off prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684, an opening is formed in the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 684 and the fall-off prevention collar member 685, passing through in the left-right direction. This opening has a function as a through hole for electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation producing unit 700. This will be explained here.

The other end of the electrical wiring, one end of which is connected to the light emitting action production unit 700, is brought out through the wiring through hole 762 (see FIG. 48) of the light emitting action production unit 700, and is connected to the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680. It passes through the irregularly shaped opening 684b and the irregularly shaped opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 to the left and right outer side than the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670, and further passes through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 to the plate-shaped wire. It is brought out to the left and right outside of the portion 611.

The irregularly shaped opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protruding part (a part through which the fastening screw is inserted) that projects inward from the diameter position of the circular shape, and the irregularly shaped opening 685a is not a simple circular opening. When rotated, the protruding portion catches the electrical wiring, thereby displacing the electrical wiring in the circumferential direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the friction occurring between the irregularly shaped opening 685a and the electrical wiring, and thus it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from breaking.

The other end of the electrical wiring is routed to the back side of the back case 510 from the left and right outside of the plate-shaped portion 611, and is connected to an individual relay board. The areas on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 are at least hidden by the decoration fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40).

At one end of the electrical wiring, there is a possibility that the electrical wiring will be exposed at a position between the light emitting action producing unit 700 and the displacement member 680, but in this embodiment, the box-shaped main body 681 covers the electrical wiring. The extension plate part 763 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 extends in front of the wiring through hole 762 so as to cover the electrical wiring in a front view (see FIG. 48). ). Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being exposed at a position between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the displacement member 680.

By passing the electrical wiring in this manner, it is possible to avoid a situation where the electrical wiring is exposed in the left and right inner areas of the pair of left and right inner members 670. Therefore, problems that tend to occur when the electrical wiring is visible to the player include the problem that the electrical wiring is placed in front of the third symbol display device 81 and hides the display, reducing visibility; It is possible to solve the problem that electrical wiring is disposed in a disorganized manner, making it look dirty and reducing the performance effect. That is, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved and the electrical wiring can be hidden from the player.

At this time, the partition wall 677a can limit the placement of electrical wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670, making it possible to prevent contact between the lift plate member 630, which is positioned closer to the front than the partition wall 677a, and the electrical wiring.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 has a flanged rod shape by fitting E-rings into the left and right outer ends, thereby preventing the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. The insertion order of the metal rod member 686 is such that the left and right inner ends are the ring member 687, the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the ring member 687, and the second elongated hole 673 (curved elongated hole 674) of the inner member 670. , the ring member 687, and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680 in this order, and are fitted and fixed into the fitting recess 683a of the extension portion 683.

In this way, the metal rod member 686 is a member that is inserted into the lift plate member 630 and the inner member 670, and its vertical arrangement depends on the change in arrangement caused by the lift plate member 630's lifting and lowering action, and its front-rear arrangement depends on the arrangement of the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674. The metal rod member 686 is configured so that the arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light-emitting action production unit 700 to which the metal rod member 686 is fitted and fixed changes depending on the change in arrangement and posture, but the changes in the arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light-emitting action production unit 700 will be described later.

The front and rear ring members 689 are comprised of a plate-shaped ring member 689a arranged on the box-shaped main body 681 side, and a flanged ring member 689b that has a flange that extends outward from the end of the cylinder.

The plate-like ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 is sandwiched between the respective plate-like parts arranged in front and back, and the cylindrical part 689b1 of the flanged ring member 689b serves as an intermediate connection described later. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the connected hole 764 of the member 760.

The rotational posture auxiliary member 690 is arranged on the left and right inner sides of the rectangular projecting portion 678 of the inner member 670, and the fastening screws inserted from the left and right insides are screwed into the fastening portions of the rectangular projecting portion 678, thereby forming a rectangular projecting portion. It is fastened and fixed to the portion 678.

The rotational posture assisting member 690 includes a box-shaped main body 691 that is open on both the left and right inner sides and fastened to the rectangular protrusion 678, and a cylindrical member 695 that is disposed on the left and right inner sides of the box-shaped main body 691 and rotatably supported by the box-shaped main body 691.

The box-shaped main body part 691 includes an extension part 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends of the back side, and a cylindrical member 695 is supported by a rotating shaft extending in the left and right direction on the left and right inner sides of the extension part 692. has been done. That is, the cylindrical member 695 is placed at the rear end and lower side of the box-like main body 691, and is placed away from the player, so that the cylindrical member 695 is prevented from being excessively conspicuous. be able to.

The light emitting operation production unit 700 is a unit connected to the fastening portions 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides, and its arrangement and attitude change as the arrangement and attitude of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides change.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action producing unit 700, FIG. 52 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting action producing unit 700, and FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action producing unit 700. . Note that FIG. 53 shows an exploded view of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed in a direction looking up. Further, in FIG. 53, in addition to the light emitting action production unit 700, a displacement member 680 is illustrated in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting action production unit 700 includes a main body member 710 on which a rotation production device 800 is disposed, a lower plate member 730 arranged below the main body member 710 and fastened to the main body member 710, and a lower plate member 730 that is connected to the main body member 710 and the lower part. An intermediate plate member 740 disposed between the plate member 730 and closing the front side of the space, a plurality of decorative members 750 fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and a plurality of decorative members 750 disposed on the left and right sides of the main body member 710, It includes a pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 by fastening screws inserted from the outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape with open bottom and front sides, and includes a plurality of fastening portions 711 into which fastening screws inserted into the lower plate member 730 from below can be screwed, and a front side of the top plate. A front edge portion 712 extending downward from the side edge, a plurality of holding portions 713 arranged opposite to the front edge portion 712 and having dimensions that allow the intermediate plate member 740 to be held between the front edge portions 712; A pair of left and right fixed plate portions 720 are provided to connect the top plate and the back side wall portion on both the left and right sides.

The plate portion 720 to be fixed is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right axis so as to be able to support the intermediate connecting member 760 on its surface. It includes a plurality of fastening parts 721 that are formed so that the intermediate member 760 can be inserted and used for fastening and fixing the intermediate member 760, and a recessed part 722 that is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end on the back side.

The recessed portion 722 is formed so that the central axis of the semicircular shape is aligned with the central axis of the wiring hole 762 drilled in the intermediate connecting member 760. This allows the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring hole 762 to be aligned in a straight line from side to side, making it easier to pass electrical wiring through the wiring hole 762.

The lower plate member 730 has a number of insertion holes 731 for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portions 711 of the main body member 710, and a number of protrusions 732 that are arranged facing each other in the front and rear directions near the front edge.

The lower plate member 730 has a light diffusion process applied to the left and right outer portions of the lower surface, and is formed so as to reduce visibility when looking at the back side through the member. As a result, even when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is viewed from the lower plate member 730 side when looking upward (see FIG. 53), it is difficult to see the electric wiring, drive device, etc. arranged inside the light emitting operation production unit 700. be able to.

In addition, patterns, figures, etc. may be drawn on the left and right inner parts of the underside of the lower plate member 730 (the roughly circular white parts in Figure 53). In this way, even when the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is positioned in front of and above the third pattern display device 81 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 (see Figure 36), and the player can see the underside, the player can see the patterns and figures on the light-emitting action presentation unit 700, thereby maintaining the presentation effect.

The protrusions 732 are formed to perform the same function as the front edge 712 and the clamping portion 713 of the main body member 710. In other words, they are arranged side by side in a front-to-back manner with dimensions that allow them to clamp the intermediate plate member 740.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed in a thin plate shape that curves so that the left and right central parts protrude toward the front side in accordance with the shape of the front edge of the lower plate member 730, and multiple illumination boards 741 are fastened and fixed to the back side.

The intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. That is, the upper edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the front edge portion 712 and the sandwiching portion 713 of the main body member 710, and the lower edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the protrusion portion 732 of the lower plate member 730. Therefore, the number of fastening screws for assembly can be reduced compared to when the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened to the main body member 710 or the lower plate member 730.

The illumination board 741 is arranged in the center on the left and right, and on both the left and right sides, and is configured to be able to irradiate light to the front side from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side. This allows for the creation of a lighting effect that makes the decorative member 750 glow.

The light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 741 only emits light toward the front side, and there is no light emitting means disposed downward (on the lower plate member 730 side), but the lower plate member 730, the light emitting action production unit 700 is placed diagonally above and in front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 36), so that the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is directed toward the lower board. The member 730 will be irradiated. That is, since the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be ensured by the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the presentation effect of the lower plate member 730 will be reduced can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 is a decorative member disposed at the left-right center position of the intermediate plate member 740, and includes a central decorative member 751 having a three-dimensional shape made of a thin resin material, and a central decorative member 751 disposed on both left and right sides of the central decorative member 751. A pair of left and right fastened members 755 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the intermediate plate member 740 from the back side.

The fastened member 755 has multiple fastening portions 756 into which fastening screws are screwed, and the central decorative member 751 has multiple position-retaining holes 752 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portions 756, drilled at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 756.

The central decorative member 751 is fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751, but by inserting the fastening portion 756 for fastening the fastened member 755 to the intermediate plate member 740. This reduces the number of steps required to assemble the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740, and also reduces the number of fastening screws.

In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple fastening portions 756 are connected by plate-shaped portions 757 with a curved cross-sectional shape. The plate-shaped portions 757 are shaped to correspond to the base-end abutment surface portions 753, which are the edge portions of the central decorative member 751 and abut the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740.

As a result, when the fastening member 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 756, the base end abutment surface portion 753 can be supported by being sandwiched between the plate portion 757 and the intermediate plate member 740, thereby stabilizing the positioning of the central decorative member 751.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d). In addition, in the description of FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d), FIGS. 51 to 53 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 54(a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member 760, Figure 54(b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in Figure 54(a), Figure 54(c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVc in Figure 54(a), and Figure 54(d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 along the line LIVd-LIVd in Figure 54(a).

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a portion of the main body member 710 that is disposed opposite to the fixed plate portion 720, and includes a plate-like portion 761 having a plurality of insertion holes 761a through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 721 are inserted. , a wiring through hole 762 bored in the left-right direction at the lower part of the back side of the plate-like part 761, an extension plate part 763 extending in the left-right direction from the plate-like part 761 in the form of a flat plate, and the extension plate part 763. A connected hole 764 bored at the outer side in the width direction of the plate portion 763, and a pair of connecting plate portions 765 extended to connect with the plate portion 761 at the center portion in the width direction of the extended plate portion 763. , a shielding extension plate 766 extending from one end in the width direction (end on the lower plate member 730 side) of the extension plate portion 763 toward the front side (on the intermediate plate member 740 side).

The angle between the straight line connecting the two insertion holes 761a arranged in the front and rear at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the horizontal straight line HL71 facing horizontally is designed as the inclination angle θ71. The angle of the inclination angle θ71 is not limited in any way, but in this embodiment, the inclination angle θ71 is set to approximately 5 degrees.

The plane on which the extended plate portion 763 is formed is arranged on the vertical line VL71 (facing in the direction perpendicular to the horizontal line HL71) facing the direction of gravity (the angle is 0). By arranging the extension plate portion 763 on the vertical straight line VL71, it is possible to facilitate the work when assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700 to the displacement member 680 from the front side, as described above.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 when the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is attached to the displacement member 680. Therefore, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 55) in which the initial position of the rotation performance device 800 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is inclined while maintaining the ease of assembling the intermediate connecting member 760 to the displacement member 680.

In this case, even when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted or intermediate state, the optical axis of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 can be directed diagonally forward. This allows the light emitted from the rotating member 810 to illuminate areas near the periphery of the game board 13 (for example, areas where the light from the third pattern display device 81 has difficulty reaching), making the entire game board 13 brighter and easier to see.

The connected holes 764 are formed in two locations in the extension plate portion 763, and are formed to have different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, in the left intermediate connecting member 760, elongated holes 764a are formed on both sides of the extension plate portion 763 in the width direction. On the other hand, in the right intermediate connecting member 760, an elongated hole 764a is formed on one side in the width direction (upper side in FIG. 36) of the extension plate portion 763, and a substantially circular hole is formed in the opposite side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 36). A support hole 764b is formed (see FIG. 36).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing the plate portion 761 and the extended plate portion 763 so that the angular relationship (positional relationship) can be maintained. In the posture shown in FIG. 53, the width direction of the extended plate part 763 supporting the plate part 761 is along the vertical direction (direction of gravity), so the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700 causes the extended plate part 763 to move against the plate part 761. The portion 763 is hard to break.

On the other hand, as described below, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be tiltable, and when it is tilted forward by approximately 90 degrees, the width direction of the extended plate portion 763 is aligned with the front-to-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity), so the weight of the light-emitting performance unit 700 makes it easy for the extended plate portion 763 to break relative to the plate portion 761.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the connecting plate part 765 is used for reinforcement, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate part 763 from breaking with respect to the plate part 761. That is, it is possible to easily avoid problems (occurrence of breakage) caused by the change in the posture of the intermediate connecting member 760.

The shielding extension plate 766 has the function of blocking the view to the connected hole 764 when viewed in the upward direction (see FIG. 53), and has a decorative pattern formed on the outer surface (lower surface of FIG. 53) to reduce the area for decoration. Equipped with the ability to expand.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the same way that a decorative pattern is formed on the lower side of the shielding extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760, a striped pattern is also formed on the lower side of the box-shaped main body 681 of the displacement member 680. It is formed. Therefore, the lower surface of the shielding extension plate 766 and the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 can be easily seen as one unit, so the area where the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed can be easily seen. You can spread it out and make it visible.

Thereby, in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36), it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 when viewed in the direction looking up at the light emitting operation presentation unit 700.

Therefore, when looking upward, the production effect using the light emitting action production unit 700 can be improved not only when the left and right center portions of the light emitting action production unit 700 are viewed, but also when the left and right ends are visible. Can be done.

The rotation performance device 800 includes a rotating member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotating and displacing the rotating member 810, and a posture detection means 830 that rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810 and detects the posture of the rotating member 810.

The rotating member 810 is rotatably supported by the main body member 710 of the light emitting action production unit 700, and a low-friction bearing is used for the support. As a result, even when the rotating member 810 is rotationally driven, the amount of the load accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 810 that is transmitted to the light emitting operation producing unit 700 can be reduced.

The rotating member 810 includes a decorative plate 811 on which a decoration is formed, a heat sink 812 formed with an external shape corresponding to the decorative plate 811 and disposed opposite the decorative plate 811, and a decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 fastened and fixed. A rotary base member 813 formed with a circular cross-section and supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross-section, and a decorative plate 811 and a heat sink 812. an arch-shaped transparent member 814.

The decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 are members of similar shapes made of colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and the decorative plate 811 mainly has decorations such as figures and patterns formed thereon. The heat dissipation plate 812 is provided with air intake openings 812a arranged in a row from the rotating base member 813 side as the rotating base end toward the rotating tip side (the longitudinal end side of the rotating member 810).

The arch-shaped transparent member 814 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and has an arch shape that follows the curved surfaces of the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812, and is fixed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812. Light emitted from a light-emitting means such as an LED arranged on an illumination board (not shown) disposed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 passes through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 and travels in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating member 810.

The light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board are arranged in rows along the curved shape of the rotating member 810 similarly to the intake opening 812a, and the interval between the rows is set narrower than that of the intake opening 812a. Ru. By turning on and off the plurality of LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotational light emitting effect), it is possible to perform an afterimage display (afterimage display using an afterimage effect) that makes a specific display visible through an afterimage of light. Become.

The light emitted from each LED is configured to travel through each passage that is partitioned so that the passages are adjacent to each other in the direction of the rotational diameter inside the rotating member 810 and extend in a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and is configured so as not to enter other passages. This makes it possible to clearly identify the path of travel of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement trajectory of the LED light in the rotating light-emitting performance), and therefore allows the afterimage display to be visually recognized as a clear display.

The concave side of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is roughened (diffused). This allows the LED light to be diffused by irregular reflection, reducing glare compared to when the LED light is viewed directly.

The following describes the intake opening 812a of the heat sink 812. The intake opening 812a is drilled in the tangential direction of the rotational circumference of the rotating member 810, and acts to draw air between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotated and displaced.

In the configuration of the position between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, the opposite side of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 (the lower side in Fig. 51) is open, making it possible to exhaust air. In addition, between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, a recess that extends continuously along the arch shape extending in the radial direction of rotation is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotating member 810 rotates, the air taken in from the intake opening 812a flows outward in the rotational radial direction through the concave portion along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814, and is discharged to the back side. , the air can be exhausted to the atmosphere. Due to this air flow, the heat inside the rotating member 810 can be dissipated (radiated) to the outside, so that problems caused by the illumination board becoming high temperature can be easily avoided.

The arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 allows air to be sent smoothly to the rear side, preventing the generation of vortexes. This allows air to be smoothly taken in from the rear side of the rotating base member 813, allowing cooling to be performed near the rotating shaft.

In other words, when air is made to flow radially outward, the air pressure on the radially inner side drops, allowing air to be taken in from the rear side, and the air flow can be circulated during rotation. This allows for a sustained heat dissipation effect.

The cooling effect of the air flow is not only expected when the rotating light-emitting performance is being performed, but various other modes are exemplified. For example, when the rotating member 810 is swiveled back and forth while the internal operating unit 600 is in a retracted or intermediate state, air circulates through the intake opening 812a, and the illumination board can be cooled.

In this embodiment, an intake opening 812a is not formed in the decorative plate 811 in consideration of decorativeness (see FIG. 37). The intake of air through the intake opening 812a acts to take in air in the direction of movement of the intake opening 812a, so if the rotational direction is fixed in one direction, the side that takes in the air is the rotating member. 810 will be biased toward one side in the longitudinal direction, and there is a possibility that the cooling effect of the illumination board will be halved.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 is not fixed in one direction, but rotates in one rotation direction in the first presentation mode, and rotates in another rotation direction in a different second presentation mode. controlled to do so. Thereby, it is possible to avoid biasing the side where air is taken in to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect of the illumination board can be expected.

The attitude detection means 830 includes a detection gear 831 that rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810 by meshing with a gear portion supported by the rotation shaft of the rotation member 810, and a detection gear 831 that rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810, and a detection gear 831 that rotates in the axial direction from the radially outer side of the detection gear 831. A detection groove is disposed at a position where an extending portion extending in parallel can enter, and a detection sensor 832 is capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extending portion has entered the detection groove. , is provided.

The attitude detection means 830 can be designed to detect which attitude the rotating member 810 is in, but in this embodiment, the rotating member 810 has a decorative plate 811 on the decorative member 750 side. At least detecting that in the arranged state, the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is in a posture along the left-right direction, and the decorative plate 811 is placed on the front side (appropriate posture, see FIG. 51). The position at which the extending portion of the detection gear 831 is formed is designed so that the detection gear 831 can be formed at a position where the extension portion of the detection gear 831 is formed.

55 to 57 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 36. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 55 to 57 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled state. 55 to 57, the state in which the internal operation unit 600 changes from the retracted state to the extended state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 55, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the retracted state, in FIG. 56, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the intermediate state, and in FIG. 57, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the internal operation unit 600 is configured such that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are displaced during the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the extended state. The displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 is configured such that the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction occur in stages, the details of which will be described later.

In the configuration of this embodiment, the arrangement of the rotating performance device 800, which attracts particularly high attention, will be described. Since the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 change their postures in the forward rotation direction, the rotation production device 800 is placed in the front and rear directions in the extended state compared to the front and rear arrangement of the rotation production device 800 in the retracted state and the intermediate state. The directional arrangement is located on the front side.

As a result, in the retracted state, by positioning the rotating effect device 800 on the back side, space can be secured on the front side of the rotating effect device 800, so that the decoration part 247 and the illumination board 251 can be placed closer to the front to create an effect. While the effect can be improved, the position of the rotating effect device 800 can be brought closer to the player when executing the rotating light emitting effect in which the rotating effect device 800 rotates in the extended state, so the rotating light emitting effect can be improved. can increase the power of Therefore, both the performance effect in the retracted state and the performance effect in the extended state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation direction LD81 from the rotational performance device 800 is set to the front side in the extended state. On the other hand, considering that it can also be used for light effects in the intermediate state and the retracted state, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set to a direction facing diagonally forward rather than straight up. This makes it possible to avoid an extreme decrease in the utility value of the rotational performance device 800 as a light effect means in the intermediate state and the retracted state. Details of the light effects will be described later.

With the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 set diagonally forward when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the extended state. The posture change angle in the forward roll direction required for this is smaller than 90 degrees. As a result, the time and space required for changing the posture can be shortened compared to the case where the posture changing angle is 90 degrees.

In the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation production unit 700 supporting the rotation production device 800 is in a posture inclined in the forward rotation direction, so that the longitudinal width increases slightly. Therefore, normally, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is placed closer to the back side, or the light emitting action producing unit 700 is designed so that its displacement is suppressed inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. , a collision between the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the base plate 60 is avoided.

However, if the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is positioned toward the back, the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 will be farther away from the player, and the impact of the presentation may be halved. Also, if the displacement of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is restricted to the inside of the central opening 60b, the movements tend to be smaller, and the impact of the presentation may be halved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, space is secured on the rear side by using a central structural unit 240 that is thinner than the base plate 60. Furthermore, the front-to-rear arrangement of the illumination board 251 to improve the presentation effect is contained within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and a recess 252a is formed in the board holding plate 252 to form a gap between the light-emitting action presentation unit 700. This allows for greater freedom in the position and placement of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700, while preventing the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 from colliding with the structure of the game board 13.

The posture change in the forward rotation direction of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 does not start in the retracted state, but rather they descend in the same posture until they reach an intermediate state, at which point the posture change starts. The starting position of this posture change is determined by the shapes of the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674, as described below, and is configured not to be changed by the control mode of the drive device (drive motor 648, solenoid 651).

In the intermediate state, as can be seen from the fact that the rotation effect device 800 is located below the vertical position H1 (see FIG. 56) of the lower edge of the decorative portion 247 in the horizontal center cross section, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 The central opening 60b is located in front of the rotating performance device 800, and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not provided, so there is no possibility of collision.

By starting the change in posture of the light-emitting action production unit 700 in the forward rolling direction from this state where there is no possibility of collision, the possibility of the light-emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 colliding with the game board 13 can be reduced.

Thereby, the space for arranging the illumination board 251 and the decoration part 247 can be avoided from being limited by overlapping with the displacement trajectory of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement positions of the illumination board 251 and the decorative portion 247 can be improved.

Next, we will explain the configuration for gradually dividing the displacement modes of the light-emitting action production unit 700 and the rotational performance device 800. In this embodiment, the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is configured to be guided by two long holes of different shapes.

Figures 58(a) to 58(c) are schematic side views of the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674, which are schematic views of the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674.

58(a) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state, FIG. 58(b) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the intermediate state, and FIG. 58(c) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state. , the arrangement of the components in the extended state of the internal working unit 600 is illustrated.

In FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), for ease of understanding, the external shapes of the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the box-shaped main body portion 681 of the displacement member 680, and the extending portion 683 are shown as imaginary lines. The outlines of the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 and the metal rod member 686 (the outlines of the portions surrounded by the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674) are shown as solid lines. Illustrated.

As shown in Figures 58(a) to 58(c), in this embodiment, the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674 are formed in different shapes, and the way in which the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod member 686 are guided, which correspond to the vertical position and posture of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, changes depending on the arrangement, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is configured to displace in stages. This is described in detail below.

The driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 680 that holds the light-emitting performance unit 700 via the lift plate member 630. That is, in Figures 58(a) to 58(c), the front-rear long hole 636 is the most upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 (see Figure 47).

In other words, as the lift plate member 630 moves up and down, the metal rod member 686 arranged inside the front-rear long hole 636 moves in the permitted direction, and other parts move in response to the displacement of the metal rod member 686.

First, the first elongated hole 672 and the second elongated hole 673 are arranged so that their elongated directions match the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673 and the cylindrical part 684 is guided to the first elongated hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the metal rod member 686 is connected to the displacement member 680. The forward displacement of the light emitting production unit 700 is suppressed, and the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in parallel in the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod member 686 is guided into the curved long hole 674, which is formed along an arc with the center axis J1 being the center of the cylindrical portion 684 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600 (the state in which the cylindrical portion 684 is in contact with the lower end of the first long hole 672), and is connected to the lower end of the second long hole 673.

Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided through the curved long hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the extended state), the vertical position of the tubular portion 684 is maintained, and the metal rod member 686 rotates and displaces around the central axis J1, causing the light-emitting performance unit 700 to displace in the forward direction around the central axis J1.

When moving the elevating plate member 630 upward from the state shown in FIG. No direct drive force transmission from 630 occurs.

Therefore, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state (see FIG. 58(b)). When the internal operation unit 600 moves from the intermediate state to the retracted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the cylindrical part 684 is moved through the box-shaped main body part 681 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fixed. The cylindrical portion 684 moves upward while being lifted up by the elevating plate member 630.

In other words, the displacement of the displacement member 680 caused by the lifting plate member 630 descending is designed as a displacement from the state in FIG. 58(a) through the state in FIG. 58(b) to the state in FIG. 58(c), and the displacement of the displacement member 680 caused by the lifting plate member 630 ascending is designed as a displacement from the state in FIG. 58(c) through the state in FIG. 58(b) to the state in FIG. 58(a).

The driving force of these displacements is transmitted by the front-rear long hole 636, whose displacement direction is specified as the up-down direction (linear direction), and whose front-rear length is set to a length sufficient to allow the metal rod member 686 to pass through the curved long hole 674. In other words, since there is no need to switch the displacement direction of the front-rear long hole 636 in accordance with changes in the displacement mode of the light-emitting performance unit 700, the design of the lifting plate member 630 can be simplified.

In addition, the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotating performance device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotating performance device 800 in the extended state is set forward, so the displacement angle of the light-emitting performance unit 700 in the forward rotation direction is designed to be slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the first elongated hole 672 is formed wide at the irregularly shaped opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 50(a)). One purpose is to form a gap large enough to pass the electrical wiring, since it functions as a wiring through-hole for the electrical wiring to pass through.

Moreover, as another purpose, if the shaft supported when the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction has a larger diameter, the support area (area of the circumferential surface) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load (frictional force) generated per unit area of the support portion (first elongated hole 672) during displacement accompanied by a change in posture, so local wear can be avoided and the cylinder The durability of the shaped portion 684 and the first elongated hole 672 can be improved. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the material of the member can be improved, and for example, even if the cylindrical portion 684 is formed of a resin material, sufficient durability can be provided.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are elongated holes for guiding the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686, and are narrower than the first elongated hole 672. The driving force generated by the drive motor 648 is transmitted to the metal rod member 686 via the elevating plate member 630. Although the metal rod-shaped member 686 has a small diameter, it is made of metal, and it is not necessary to run electrical wiring therein, and since the inside is filled, it can exhibit sufficient strength.

By forming the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 to have narrow widths, the clearance between them and the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be reduced, so that the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be stabilized. can.

Therefore, the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which displacement in the vertical direction and displacement in the forward rotation direction are switched) can be reduced. Thereby, stepwise switching of the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be smoothly performed.

We will explain in what direction the weight of the light-emitting action production unit 700 acts during the displacement process. Figures 58(a) to 58(c) show the center of gravity position G1 of the light-emitting action production unit 700.

Although the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680 is restricted by the elevating plate member 630, the cylindrical portion 684 is not directly supported by the elevating plate member 630. Therefore, the cylindrical portion 684 is suspended from the elevating plate member 630 via the box-like main body portion 681, the extension portion 683, and the metal rod member 686, and its displacement is restricted by the first elongated hole 672. Placement is maintained.

Therefore, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state to the intermediate state, the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 generates a load that displaces the cylindrical portion 684 downward along the direction of the metal rod-shaped member 686 as the axis of rotation (a load in the backward rotation direction centered on the metal rod-shaped member 686), so that the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 urges the cylindrical portion 684 in a downward forward diagonal direction.

This allows the cylindrical portion 684 to abut against the front side of the first long hole 672 and the large diameter ring member 688 (see FIG. 50(a)) to roll in one direction, which reduces wear on the cylindrical portion 684, the large diameter ring member 688, and the first long hole 672 compared to when they slide without a fixed rotational direction.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the cylindrical portion 684 is supported from below by the first long hole 672 (downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 maintains the position of the cylindrical portion 684 at the lower end of the first long hole 672, and generates a load that displaces the metal rod member 686 downward along the direction of the cylindrical portion 684 as the axis of rotation (load in the forward rotation direction centered on the cylindrical portion 684), so that the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 urges the metal rod member 686 in a direction along an arc centered on the central axis J1.

Therefore, when the internal operation unit 600 starts changing its state from the intermediate state to the extended state, the load is generated by its own weight, so that displacement can occur smoothly. In addition, in this embodiment, since the center of gravity position G1 is arranged between the metal bar-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical part 684 in the front-back direction, from the metal bar-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical part 684 serving as the shaft to the center of gravity position G1 It is possible to avoid the distance from becoming excessively long.

Thereby, the load in the rotational direction around the metal rod member 686 and the load in the rotational direction around the cylindrical part 684 can be prevented from being excessive, and can be generated at appropriate magnitudes.

The metal bar-shaped member 686 is configured to overtake the cylindrical portion 684 while the displacement member 680 is displaced in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the cylindrical portion 684 can be stopped and only the metal bar-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the vertical direction.

The driving force required to start the upward displacement of the displacement member 680 is greater than that in the case where the cylindrical part 684 is also upwardly displaced when the metal rod member 686 starts upward displacement from the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. can be reduced. Thereby, the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

Moreover, by shortening the vertical displacement width of the cylindrical portion 684, the vertical displacement width of the electrical wiring inserted through the cylindrical portion 684 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of disconnection of the electrical wiring.

The appearance of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 when viewed from the front will be explained. This embodiment is configured to perform different types of light emitting effects by displacing the light emitting action effect unit 700 in the forward rotation direction.

Figures 59 to 61 are front views of the operating unit 500. For ease of explanation, Figures 59 to 61 show the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central structural unit 240, and the external shapes of the decorative board 251, and show the insides of the decorative part 247 and the decorative board 251 painted white.

In Figures 59 to 61, the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illuminated board 251 are painted white to express their low light transmittance. In reality, the illuminated board 251 is made of an opaque material and blocks the player's view, but the decorative part 247 is made of a light-transmitting material, so the player can see through it even though it has low light transmittance (it is possible to see the configuration on the back side through the decorative part 247).

Figure 59 illustrates the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, Figure 60 illustrates the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, and Figure 61 illustrates the extended state of the internal operation unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged behind the decoration part 247 and the illumination board 251, and most of it is hidden when viewed from the front. Therefore, the visibility of the rotation performance device 800 itself becomes low. In this state, the detected portion 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown) and is detected by the detection device, thereby indicating that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed at the upper end of the vertical displacement. This is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

Furthermore, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are visually recognized as being separated by the decorative portion 247. Therefore, the light emitting operation unit 700 executes a front-facing light effect performed by applying light emitted from the illumination board 741 (see FIG. 51) to the decorative member 750, and the rotation effect device 800 When performing an upward light effect in which light is radiated toward the user, each light effect can be viewed separately, so each light effect can be highlighted.

In this embodiment, the bow-shaped surface that is the part that emits light from the rotating performance device 800 (the surface that is arranged opposite the outer rail 62 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front) and the outer rail 62 are designed to have a similar shape as an upwardly convex curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotation performance device 800 is in a position different from the position for performing the rotation light-emitting performance described below, the rotation performance device 800 can be visually recognized as if it were a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. This increases the utility value of the rotation performance device 800 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, and improves the appearance of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state.

As an effective effect of the light irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 to the outer rail 62, a right-hit suggestion effect is envisioned, in which the light is visually perceived as moving along the path of the ball. For example, the order of irradiating light from the rotation effect device 800 can be changed so that the leftmost LED irradiates range E1 of the outer rail 62 located above, and the next LED to the right irradiates range E2 of the outer rail 62, and then ranges E3, E4, and so on. At the same time, the LED that irradiated the light can be set to a first light emission control mode in which it is turned off a certain time (for example, one second) after the irradiation timing, making it appear as if the light is moving to the right along the outer rail 62, thereby informing the player that it is time to make a right hit.

In this case, it is possible to save the effort of dotting the game board 13 (see Figure 18) with illuminated boards or designing figures or pictures to suggest a right hit to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to produce a right hit suggestion effect.

The right-hit suggestion effect is not limited to being performed only by the light-emitting effect of the rotation effect device 800, and various forms are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light-emitting effect of the rotation effect device 800, light-emitting means arranged on the illumination boards scattered around the game board 13 may be made to emit light, or in addition to the light-emitting effect of the rotation effect device 800, a figure or picture suggesting a right hit may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the position of the rotation presentation device 800 is set on the rear side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, so no nails are placed in front of the rotation presentation device 800. This makes it easier for players to see the light emitted from the rotation presentation device 800, as it is not affected by reflections from the nails.

In addition, as will be described later, although the rotating effect device 800 is capable of performing a rotating light emitting effect when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the rotating effect device 800 is capable of performing a rotational light emitting effect when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state. In this state, it is used as a device that can perform a right-handed hitting suggestion effect by shining light on the outer rail 62. That is, the rotation performance device 800 can be used for performances for different purposes.

Note that the light effect executed by the rotation effect device 800 is not limited to the right-handed hitting suggestion effect. For example, as a preview performance in which the central light emitting means 251b of the illumination board 251 as a performance device executes a light emission performance, a light performance such as making an upward arrow visible to the player may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged below the decoration part 247. As a result, compared to the retracted state, the visibility of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 is increased by the amount that is not covered by the decorative portion 247.

Furthermore, compared to the retracted state, it becomes easier to understand that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are integrated, and the vertical distance between the outer rail 62 and the rotation production device 800 becomes wider.

Therefore, the role of the rotating effect device 800 can be easily recognized not as a member for illuminating the outer rail 62, but as a member that performs light effects integrally with the decorative member 750 of the light emitting action effect unit 700.

This gives the player the illusion that what was a small presentation object in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, where the central decorative member 751 was just barely visible, has transformed into a large presentation object that includes not only the central decorative member 751 but also the rotating presentation device 800 in the intermediate state.

As shown in FIG. 61, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the rotation effect device 800 is in a position where the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side. In this state, when light is irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 in the above-mentioned first light emission control mode, the light can be visually perceived as moving to the right along the left-right direction. This method can also be used to allow the player to understand this as a right hit suggestion effect.

Note that, unlike the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a in the game area in this embodiment (see FIG. 31), if the specific winning opening 65a is arranged on the lower right side of the game area, the attitude of the rotation presentation device 800 may be changed so that the longitudinal direction of the rotation presentation device 800 is inclined downward to the right, and light may be emitted in this attitude in the first light emission control mode described above. In this case, since the specific winning opening 65a is located at the destination of the light, it is easy for the player to understand that the ball should be launched toward the specific winning opening 65a.

The rotation performance device 800 is arranged so as to be able to perform a rotation operation of one rotation or more when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. There is no particular limitation on the operating speed of the rotation operation, but for example, when rotating at high speed, by finely controlling the blinking of the light irradiated from the rotation production device 800 for each arrangement, figures and patterns can be displayed while rotating. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized (it may be configured as a so-called versatile writer device).

In FIG. 61, it is detected by the detection device that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed at the lower end of the vertical displacement when the detected portion 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown), and the rotation is detected by the detection device. The sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the rotation axis RJ1 of the member 810 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

This detection may be used as a flag to control the rotating member 810 so that a rotational light emitting effect can be executed. That is, the detection device that detects the end of movement of the elevating plate member 630 can also be used as a detection device that detects the timing at which the rotational light emission effect of the rotation member 810 can be started.

FIG. 62 is a front view of the operating unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the illumination board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 are painted white. Illustrated in the state shown below. In FIG. 62, the outline of the afterimage in a state where the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state and the rotary member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is rotating at high speed is illustrated by imaginary lines.

Note that the high-speed rotation speed of the rotating member 810 is not limited in any way, and various modes may be exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side becomes difficult to visually recognize due to an afterimage, or the rotation speed may be such that although an afterimage occurs, the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized through a position where the rotating member 810 is not arranged.

Figure 62 shows the light effect (rotating light emission effect) of the rotation effect device 800, in which the rotating member 810 rotates at a rotational speed that makes it difficult to see the structure on the rear side due to an afterimage, and an example of a figure (a large arrow pointing to the right) that is controlled to be visible during rotation is shown.

In FIG. 62, the possible positions of the rotating member 810 are shown shifted by 45 degrees for easy understanding, but in reality, only an afterimage is visible, and the outer shape of the rotating member 810 is not clearly shown. It rotates at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize it. By making the graphics visible as shown in FIG. 62, it is possible to notify the player (it is possible to make the player understand that it is the timing to play right).

A specific method for implementing the rotational light emission effect will be described below. Inside the rotating member 810, multiple LEDs are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and are arranged so that light travels toward the front side through an arch-shaped transparent member 814. Therefore, the diameter of the trajectory (circular path) that the LEDs move along when the rotating member 810 is rotated around the rotation axis RJ1 varies depending on the distance from the rotation axis RJ1.

In FIG. 62, each LED is moved according to the high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810, depending on whether it is inside or outside the figure to be displayed (the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 62). When the LED is turned on and off, the afterimage of the light seen through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is seen as an integral part, allowing the player to see a specific figure (the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 62). .

The displayed figures can be varied in a variety of ways by switching the timing of on/off control of each LED in response to the rotation of the rotating member 810, which improves the degree of freedom in producing light emitting effects using the rotating member 810. be able to.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the rotation effect device 800 can be used to perform a notification effect (right hit suggestion effect) for the same purpose in various ways. That is, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, it can be performed in a manner in which light is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, and when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, it can be performed in both a manner in which the rotation effect device 800 does not rotate and a manner in which it rotates.

As a result, it is possible to make the presentation less predictable compared to when there is a limited number of variations in the notification presentation (for example, only one). This can increase the player's interest.

In addition, although the present embodiment has been described as an example of a notification effect suggesting a right-handed hit, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and various effects may be exemplified. For example, it may be possible to create a notification that suggests switching the direction of the light or the direction of the arrow alternately between left and right, or to switch the direction of the ball to the left or right. It is also possible to perform a notification effect suggesting a return.

Further, for example, by performing a light emitting effect so as to display an arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during high speed rotation in the rotating light emitting effect in the extended state, the outer rail 62 can be The light emitting effect that matches the shape of the can be continued even in the extended state. This makes it possible to provide consistency in the light emission effect.

As shown in FIG. 62, the rotational performance device 800 can rotate at high speed when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, but the rotational light-emitting performance is designed on the assumption that the rotational axis of the rotational performance device 800 is maintained, so this embodiment employs a structure that supports the rotational performance device 800 so that it does not become displaced by the load generated perpendicular to the rotational axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, regulation of displacement of the rotation performance device 800 in the left-right direction will be explained. The light emitting action producing unit 700 is held by connecting the connecting holes 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680. Among the pairs of connecting holes 764 on the left and right, the lower right Only one is formed as a substantially circular support hole 764b rather than a long hole, and the others are formed as long holes 764a.

Here, by making the connected hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected an elongated hole 764a, it is possible to allow vertical displacement of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides when displacing the light emitting operation producing unit 700 in the vertical direction. (See Figure 39). On the other hand, if it is configured with only the elongated hole 764a, there is a possibility that the rotation effect device 800 will be displaced in the left-right direction when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by making at least one hole a support hole 764b, the support hole 764b can restrict the left-right movement of the fastening portion 682, so that even if the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed during a rotational light-emitting performance, the positional deviation in the left-right direction of the rotation performance device 800 can be suppressed.

Figures 63(a) to 63(c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680 and the long hole 764a and support hole 764b of the connected hole 764. In Figures 63(a) to 63(c), the longitudinal direction (left-right width direction) of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is illustrated as a schematic straight line 700L.

In other words, in FIG. 63(a), the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the left-right direction, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is kept in a horizontal position, in FIG. 63(b), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted upward to the left, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is tilted at the maximum allowable tilt angle, and in FIG. 63(c), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted upward to the right, so that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is tilted at the maximum allowable tilt angle. Note that the state shown in FIG. 63(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, and the state shown in FIG. 63(c) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 39.

As shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(c), the inclination of the schematic straight line 700L is caused by a rotational displacement with the support hole 764b as the fulcrum. Figure 63(b) shows the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the left end of the long hole 764a located in the upper left of the drawing, and up to this state, rotation (clockwise rotation when viewed from the front) of the schematic straight line 700L (corresponding to the light-emitting action production unit 700) is permitted.

Figure 63 (c) shows the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the right end of the long hole 764a located at the top right of the drawing, and up to this state, rotation (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front) of the schematic straight line 700L (corresponding to the light-emitting action production unit 700) is permitted.

In this way, unlike the case where support holes 764b are used in multiple positions, this embodiment can tolerate misalignment in the direction of the straight line UD71 along the vertical direction of the fastening parts 682 arranged on the left and right. Therefore, in a configuration in which the raising and lowering operation of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is performed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right, it is possible to tolerate misalignment in the operation timing of the drive motors 648 and variations in rotation speed.

The rotation of the schematic straight line 700L with the support hole 764b as the starting point is limited to the vertical movement when the opening direction of the support hole 764b is in the front-back direction (in the retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600) as shown in FIG. Displacement in the moving direction of the plate member 630 (direction along the straight line UD71, vertical direction) is allowed.

On the other hand, when the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted and displaced so that the opening direction of the support hole 764b is approximately vertical (in this embodiment, when the angle with respect to the vertical direction is 5 degrees, i.e., when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, see Figure 62), the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the straight line UD71 (in this embodiment, a direction along a plane that is at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the front-to-back direction), and intersects with the straight line UD71 at approximately a right angle.

The lift plate member 630 is guided by the long hole 612 (see FIG. 49) to displace in the direction of the straight line UD71, while the forward/backward displacement is restricted, so that the forward/backward displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is suppressed. Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is along a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the straight line UD71, the allowable range of rotation of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

That is, even under the condition that the elongated hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the light emitting operation production unit 700 with respect to the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operation unit 600 is extended.

In this case, as described above, by controlling the rotating member 810 to perform the rotating light emitting effect in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed while the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the arrangement of the rotating shaft RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is changed to the rotating light emitting effect. It is possible to prevent it from shifting during the performance. Thereby, it is possible to omit the provision of a separate member for fixing the arrangement of the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810.

In addition, in this embodiment, the support hole 764b is positioned on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (the rear side in the state shown in Figure 62), which makes it easier to limit misalignment caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (misalignment occurring on the front side of the light-emitting action production unit 700) compared to when the support hole 764b is positioned closer to the rotating member 810.

When the light-emitting motion production unit 700 is tilted and displaced, a load in the rotational direction is generated on the intermediate connecting member 760 in a direction away from the displacement member 680 (the direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 50) protrudes) (see FIG. 53). Therefore, without countermeasures, the fastening portion 682 may be overloaded and damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by setting the light emitting operation production unit 700 to a slightly tilted position (see FIG. 55) as the initial position, the intermediate connecting member 760 is moved to the lower edge side of the displacement member 680 before the tilting displacement. It is urged in the direction of approaching. That is, since the intermediate connecting member 760 is disposed close to the displacement member 680 on the side closer to the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 50(a)) serving as the rotation axis of the displacement member 680, the displacement member A load generated in a direction away from 680 can be easily generated as a load in the rotational direction of displacement member 680, and the load applied to fastening portion 682 can be reduced.

Next, regulation of displacement of the rotation performance device 800 in the vertical direction will be explained. In this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generating device 650, and the regulation can be executed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. be done.

64 to 66 are cross-sectional views of the operating unit 500 taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. The LXIV-LXIV line is set as a line passing through the center of the plate thickness of the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating plate member 630. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 64 to 66 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled state.

64 shows a retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 65 shows an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 66 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 66, the solenoid 651 is not energized, and the state in which the solenoid 651 is de-energized is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 65, a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and excited is partially cut out and illustrated for reference.

As shown in Figures 64 and 66, when the solenoid 651 is in a non-energized state, the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650 is positioned on the front side and enters the movement path of the abutment plate 638 of the lift plate member 630.

Both upper and lower side surfaces of the abutted plate 638 and both upper and lower side surfaces of the longitudinal displacement member 653 are formed into a planar shape orthogonal to the up-down direction. Thereby, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the abutted plate 638 can be matched with the direction of the load that the abutted plate 638 receives from both the upper and lower side surfaces of the longitudinal displacement member 653 in the moving direction.

As a result, the load applied from the abutment plate 638 to the front-rear displacement member 653 does not have a rearward component, so the front-rear displacement member 653 is prevented from being pushed out toward the rear side. Therefore, the front-rear displacement member 653 is maintained in a state in which it is positioned on the front side.

In the state shown in FIG. 64, the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutment plate 638 in the up-down direction, and functions to prevent the abutment plate 638 from being displaced downward. In other words, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the front-rear displacement member 653 can prevent the lift plate member 630 from being displaced downward under its own weight, so the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

Note that in this embodiment, since an upward biasing force is generated against the lifting plate member 630 from the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 47), the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is applied when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. By designing the internal operation unit 600 to be large enough to maintain the internal operation unit 600, it is possible to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state without making the longitudinal displacement member 653 function.

In this case, however, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 becomes large, and the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 to displace the lift plate member 630 downward becomes large, so it may be necessary to enlarge the drive motor 648. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which the front-rear displacement member 653 maintains the internal operation unit 600 in a retracted state as in this embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as a purely auxiliary force, and the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the longitudinal displacement member 653 abuts the abutted plate 638 in the vertical direction and functions to prevent upward displacement of the abutted plate 638. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, it is possible to prevent the vertical displacement member 653 from upwardly displacing the elevating plate member 630, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the extended state.

The load that causes the elevating plate member 630 to move upward is assumed to be a load due to the inertia of the rotating effect device 800 (see FIG. 62) during the rotating light emission effect. That is, when the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed, there is a possibility that the rotation performance device 800 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but displacement in the vertical direction can be prevented by the longitudinal displacement member 653.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the longitudinal displacement member 653 not only allows the downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, but also the upward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state. can also be prevented.

The state shown in FIG. 65 corresponds to a non-excited state in which the lift plate member 630 is displaced downward when the solenoid 651 is energized and excited (see the cut-out area in FIG. 65), and then the solenoid 651 is de-energized.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 retreats from the displacement locus of the abutted plate 638, allowing the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630; Even if the solenoid 651 becomes de-energized during the vertical displacement of the plate member 630, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is not immediately regulated, and the abutted plate 638 is moved in front of the longitudinally displacing member 653. Vertical displacement can be continued while sliding on the side.

In other words, the modes of the load that the elevating plate member 630 receives during vertical displacement include two modes in which the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the abutted plate 638, so it does not receive any load from the front-rear displacement member 653, and a front-rear displacement member 630 that receives no load from the front-rear displacement member 653. It is possible to configure a mode in which the solenoid 653 receives a frictional force by contacting the solenoid 653, and these modes can be switched depending on whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

Although the shape of the front side surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 that contacts the abutted plate 638 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, it has a planar shape that is perpendicular to the front-rear direction across the pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614. It has a curved surface shape that curves away from the abutted plate 638 at upper and lower outer sides than the guide protrusion 614 .

This makes it possible to widen the vertical width of the contact surface with the abutted plate 638, whose back side surface is in a planar shape orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and to secure the contact area. The frictional force that the elevating plate member 630 receives can be increased, and the degree to which the elevating plate member 630 is braked can be increased in both the up and down directions.

In this way, in this embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 can brake (or stop) the lifting plate member 630 during up-down displacement. In other words, the front-rear displacement member 653 can be used both as a member for maintaining the position of the lifting plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (the retracted state and the extended state of the internal operation unit 600) and as a member for braking the lifting plate member 630 during displacement.

The driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 via the transmission gear 649 that meshes with the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630, and as described above, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 is urged rearward by its own weight. As a result, the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is optimized, and the transmission efficiency of driving force is improved.

On the other hand, when braking the elevating plate member 630, the load applied from the longitudinal displacement member 653 to the abutted plate 638 is a load directed toward the front side, and acts to separate the rack gear 634 from the transmission gear 649.

Therefore, when the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutted plate 638, not only is there a deceleration effect due to braking caused by the frictional force generated at the abutment position, but there is also a deceleration effect due to worsening the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 (reducing the degree of meshing and reducing the efficiency of transmission of the driving force). This allows the lifting plate member 630 to be braked (slowed down) efficiently.

An example of switching control of energization of the solenoid 651 will be described. The description will be made based on the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. First, before starting to drive the drive motor 648, the solenoid 651 is energized to retreat the longitudinal displacement member 653 from the displacement locus of the abutted plate 638.

As a result, the elevating plate member 630 becomes movable in the vertical direction, so the drive motor 648 is started to be driven, and the internal operation unit 600 is moved downward toward the extended state. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 in a state before the extended state (for example, an intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the longitudinal displacement member 653 is pressed against the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 65). ), the lifting plate member 630 can be braked by frictional force.

When the internal operation unit 600 reaches the extended state in this state, the abutted plate 638 is placed below the displacement locus of the longitudinal displacement member 653, so that the longitudinal displacement member 653 is moved forward by the return spring of the solenoid 651. (See Figure 66).

Therefore, the action applied from the longitudinal displacement member 653 to the abutted plate 638 can be smoothly changed from braking to position regulation without switching between energization and non-energization of the solenoid 651.

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced upward from the extended state, the solenoid 651 is kept energized while the lift plate member 630 is displaced in the up and down direction, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 can be kept out of contact with the abutment plate 638. This prevents frictional resistance from being generated between the front-rear displacement member 653 and the abutment plate 638, so the driving force required for the lift plate member 630 to be displaced upward can be reduced, and the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

The following describes how the manner of rotational motion of the rotational performance device 800 changes in response to a change in the state of the internal operation unit 600. In this embodiment, the posture of the rotational performance device 800 also changes when the posture of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 changes to a forward or backward rotation direction, and the rotational motion (rotation angle) allowed for each posture changes.

Figures 67 to 69 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 36. Line LXVII-LXVII corresponds to a line passing through the center of the width of the cylindrical member 695 (see Figure 37) of the rotational posture assist member 690. The game board 13 is not shown in Figure 36, but Figures 67 to 69 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled position.

67 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600, FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b) show an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b) ), the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated. That is, FIGS. 67 to 69 illustrate in chronological order how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state and then to the retracted state.

Note that in FIGS. 68(a) and 69(a), the rotating member 810 is shown in a proper posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the left-right direction, and in FIGS. 68(b) and 69(b), the rotating member 810 is The state in which the near end of the member 810 in the figure has reached the end of the permissible movement toward the rear side is shown.

That is, FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 (although it is shown in non-contact in FIG. 68(b)). In FIG. 69(b), the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the cylindrical member 695 of the rotating posture auxiliary member 690. A state in which they are in contact is illustrated (although they are shown in non-contact in FIG. 69(b), they are in contact on the right side of the illustrated cross section (the front side of the paper in FIG. 69(b)) .

In the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in FIG. 67, the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 rotates more than once (360 degrees or more) in the rotational direction RD1 about the rotation axis RJ1, for example, a rotating light emission effect. The rotational movement is possible. That is, the decorative portion 247 and the like disposed on the center frame 86 are disposed at a position that does not enter the movement locus of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800.

In FIG. 68, the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 810 of the rotational performance device 800, so that the rotational angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotational performance device 800 is limited to the angle at which the rotating member 810 is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and comes into contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 68(b)).

Basically, before the state of the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state, the attitude of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is controlled so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the left-right direction. Since the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 are unlikely to collide with each other because the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 are controlled to have a proper posture and then change the state toward an intermediate state.

In the present embodiment, even if the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 collides with the bottom wall 511 due to erroneous control, the rotating member 810 will not be able to reach the bottom of the bottom wall 511 above the upper edge of the opening 511a. Since it is arranged so as to collide with the wall portion 511, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 810 collides with the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 69, the cylindrical member 695 of the rotation posture assisting member 690 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800, so that the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is limited to the angle at which the rotating member 810 is displaced in the rotation direction RD1 and comes into contact with the cylindrical member 695. In other words, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is smaller in the retracted state (see FIG. 69(b)) than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 68(b)).

In this embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced until it comes into contact with the bottom wall part 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, the state change continues until the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state. However, in the process of the state change (ascending displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700), the rotating member 810 comes into contact with the cylindrical member 695 and is pushed forward, thereby reducing the attitude difference between the rotating member 810 and its proper attitude. The attitude of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the rotating member 810 becomes smaller.

Since the rotating member 810 has a symmetrical shape in its proper posture (see FIG. 61), and the cylindrical member 695 is arranged in a symmetrical position, it is possible to determine whether a difference in posture of the rotating member 810 occurs on the left or right side. The attitude of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the attitude difference from the proper attitude of the rotating member 810 becomes small (regardless of which direction of rotation about the rotation axis RJ1 occurs).

Since the rotating member 810 rotates around the rotation axis RJ1, the rotating member 810 is displaced to the back side and contacts the cylindrical member 695 (left and right sides, see FIG. 69) and the opposite side (left and right sides, see FIG. 69). side), the rotating member 810 will be close to the base plate 60. If the posture deviation from the proper posture is large, the rotating member 810 may be worn out due to rubbing between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60, or may be damaged due to a collision.

On the other hand, as the cylindrical member 695 functions as described above, the attitude of the rotating member 810 changes to return to the proper attitude in the process of the state change of the internal operation unit 600 toward the retracted state. The rotation members 810 on the other left and right sides can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60. Thereby, contact between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 can be avoided.

As described above, the cylindrical member 695 is a member that functions to come into contact with the rotating member 810 and push the rotating member 810 to the front side, and has a perfect circular shape that can roll to avoid wear of the rotating member 810. It is formed into a cylindrical shape. That is, the cylindrical member 695 rotates when it comes into contact with the rotating member 810, so that no scratches are left on the rotating member 810.

To maintain this functionality, it is preferable to eliminate decorative shapes as much as possible, but when the tubular member 695 is viewed by the player, its shape may be too simple when viewed together with other decorative parts, creating a sense of incongruity.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 is positioned closer to the retracted position (upper and rearward) than the position of the rotating member 810 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, so that attention to the cylindrical member 695 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be positioned on the rear side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 36), so that the visibility of the cylindrical member 695 can be reduced by the rotating member 810.

The shape of the cylindrical member 695 is therefore designed to be optimal for avoiding wear on the rotating member 810, while the visibility of the cylindrical member 695 is reduced, reducing the likelihood that the player will see the cylindrical member 695, allowing the player to continue playing without feeling uncomfortable.

The following describes the light effects that are possible due to the positional changes allowed for the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. As described above, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, light is irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 onto the outer rail 62, making it possible to produce an effect in which the outer rail 62 is illuminated.

In addition, by changing the position of the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1, one of the rotating tips of the rotating member 810 can be displaced forward. For example, in FIG. 69(b), the rotating tip at the rear of the page (left side) can be moved toward the front, so that the left side of the outer rail 62 can be made to emit light more brightly and the right side can be made to emit light slightly darker. Furthermore, by reversing the direction of the positional change of the rotating member 810, the difference in light and dark between the left and right sides can be reversed.

This allows for the implementation of effects in which the light emission intensity of the outer rail 62 is changed for each part. For example, by repeatedly changing the position of the rotating member 810 so that it moves back and forth in the direction of rotation about the rotation axis RJ1 without changing the light emission intensity of the light emitted from the rotating member 810, the apparent brightness of the light emitted to the left and right of the outer rail 62 can be switched alternately between the left and right.

The following describes the light effects that are possible due to the positional changes permitted for the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state. As described above, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state, the rotating member 810 can change position at an angle that is greater than the positional change angle when in the retracted state. Therefore, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, and the arrival position of the light in the effect of illuminating the outer rail 62 can be positioned closer to the front.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 equipped with a light emitting device such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the position where the light is reflected on the outer rail 62 is changed to the front side (the player's side). Changes in the intensity of irradiated and reflected light can be made unnoticeable to the player.

Furthermore, the reachable range of the light is not limited to the outer rail 62, and the light can also be applied to portions located away from the outer rail 62, such as the sixth projecting portion 277 of the upper connecting member 270 (see FIG. 26). can be reached.

The rotating member 810 can swivel around the rotation axis RJ1 located in the center of the left and right, allowing the longitudinal ends located on the outer left and right sides to be moved forward one by one, thereby assisting in the lighting effects in areas (outer left and right positions) that are difficult to cover with the illumination board 251, which is designed to be located in the center of the left and right due to the strength of the base plate 60.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is limited, the performance of the light performance in areas where the illumination board 251 is not arranged can be improved by the rotation performance device 800 disposed in the operation unit 500. This can be improved by lighting effects.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the first embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the sorting unit 3980 of the third embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed in front of the bulge 3982 that forms the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 70(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 3980 in the third embodiment, and Figure 70(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 3980. As shown in Figures 70(a) and 70(b), the sorting unit 3980 is configured to be able to discharge balls to the front side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3981 of the sorting unit 3980 has a pair of openings 3982k formed through the bulging part 982, and the balls passed through the openings 3982k and discharged to the front side of the bulging part 982, to the left. It is equipped with a discharge gutter 3982l for discharging water to the rear side.

The opening 3982k is disposed on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed as a rectangular through hole large enough to allow the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through.

The long horizontal section of the discharge gutter 3982l slopes downward toward the left, and the long front-to-back section formed at its left end slopes downward toward the rear. Therefore, a ball that passes through the opening 3982k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and enters the discharge gutter 3982l is swept leftward along the discharge gutter 3982l, and at the left end position the flow direction switches to the rear side, and the ball is swept backward.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive the balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3982k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing component cost. A gutter 3982l may be provided. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l disposed on the front side of the left opening 3982k slopes downward toward the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l disposed on the front side of the right opening 3982k descends toward the right. By configuring it to be inclined, the length of the discharge gutter 3982l alone can be shortened.

The appearance of the ball that has passed through the inlet 982d will be explained. The front base 3981 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and allows the ball passing through the inlet 982d and flowing down the back side of the bulge 982 to be visually recognized through the bulge 982. can do.

On the other hand, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the balls flow are formed to extend to the rear of the electric prop 140a, so in the area behind the electric prop 140a, the electric prop 140a acts as a shield, reducing the visibility of the balls.

If the difference between whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 is due to the direction in which the ball flows in the area behind the electric device 140a, the player will need to pay attention to the ball in an area with poor visibility, which may cause fatigue to the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, balls that deviate from the path toward detection device SE3 flow toward the front through opening 3982k, so not only do they appear to approach the player at eye level, but the flow toward the front occurs above the area hidden by electric device 140a, ensuring visibility of balls that pass through inlet 982d and flow in a direction that deviates from detection device SE3.

As a result, if a ball passes through the inlet 982d but no special symbol is drawn, it can be easily understood that this is the result of the ball missing the detection device SE3.

Other improvements to the shape of the distribution unit 3980 will be explained. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 3982k to ensure a ball ejection path, in the rear base 3985, the formation of openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) from the rear base 985 in the first embodiment is omitted. Correspondingly, the lateral width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left and right width of the distribution unit 3980 can be shortened, and the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be made smaller. It is possible to secure a sufficient area for planting. Thereby, the degree of freedom in nail arrangement can be improved.

Moreover, since the nail can be placed near the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nail for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the distribution unit 4980 of the fourth embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed on the rear side of the back base 4985 that forms the back side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 71 (a) is a front view of the sorting unit 4980 in the fourth embodiment, and Figure 71 (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 4980. As shown in Figures 71 (a) and 71 (b), the sorting unit 4980 is configured to be able to discharge balls to the rear side upstream of the openings 985e and 985f.

In other words, the rear base 4985 of the sorting unit 4980 has a pair of left and right openings 4985k formed through it, and the balls that have passed through the openings 4985k and are discharged to the rear side of the rear base 4985 flow down to the left to the rear side. It is equipped with a discharge gutter of 4985 liters.

The opening 4985k is disposed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed as a rectangular through hole large enough to allow the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through.

In the discharge gutter 4985l, the long left and right portions slope downwardly toward the left, and the long portion formed at the left end of the drain gutter 4985l slopes downwardly toward the rear. Therefore, the ball that passes through the opening 4985k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and rides on the discharge gutter 4985l is flown to the left along the discharge gutter 4985l, and at the left end position, the flowing direction is switched to the rear side, being swept backwards.

The discharge gutter 4985l is located on the rear side of the rear base 4985, away from the player, but the front base 981 and rear base 4985, which are located in front of it, are made of a translucent resin material, so the player can see the discharge gutter 4985l and the balls rolling in the discharge gutter 4985l through the front base 981 and rear base 4985.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive balls on both sides of a pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing component costs, but each opening 4985k may be provided with a discharge gutter 4985l. In this case, the balls can be discharged by flowing them at least to the rear side from each opening 4985l, so it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985l long on both sides. This allows the shape of the discharge gutter 4985l to be simplified.

According to the configuration of this embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985l is formed on the back side, the discharge gutter 4985l can be avoided from being conspicuous, so that the design of the base plate 60 near the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) can be improved. It is possible to avoid the influence of the discharge gutter 4985L on the Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Other improvements to the shape of the distribution unit 4980 will be explained. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 4985k to ensure a ball ejection path, in the rear base 4985, the formation of openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) from the rear base 985 in the first embodiment is omitted. Correspondingly, the lateral width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left and right width of the distribution unit 4980 can be shortened, and the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be made smaller. It is possible to secure a sufficient area for planting. Thereby, the degree of freedom in nail arrangement can be improved.

In addition, since it is now possible to place nails near the electric device 140a, it is possible to improve the freedom of placement of nails for guiding the ball to the electric device 140a.

In a configuration in which the opening 4985k is formed on the rear side, compared to a configuration in which the opening is formed on the front side (see FIG. 70), the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k can be arbitrarily designed regardless of the arrangement of the electric device 140a. Therefore, the probability that the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will be detected by the detection device SE3 (pass through the detection hole SE1a) without deviation can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be equal to the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will not pass through the opening 4985k and will be detected by the detection device SE3. It will pass through hole SE1a.

On the other hand, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will pass through the opening 4985k, and the remaining About 80% of the amount of light passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. That is, by arbitrarily designing the vertical width of the opening 4985k, the probability of detection by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that reaches the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided left and right, but in the upper connecting member 5270 of the fifth embodiment, smooth guidance of the ball in the left and right direction is suppressed. Various improvements have been made. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a partial sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper component 5241 constituting the center frame 86 has left and right protrusions 5246 that protrude from the band-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second protrusion 5273. The second protrusion 5273 has deceleration protrusions 5273a that protrude from the lower end toward the left and right positions of the deceleration protrusions 5246.

According to this embodiment, when a ball that flows down between the pair of left and right first protrusions 272 or between the first protrusion 272 and the second protrusion 5273 reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 and rolls left and right, it flows down as if being ejected outward from the left and right protrusions 5246 and collides with the deceleration protrusions 5273a, causing it to decelerate.

In other words, the momentum of the ball is so great that it reaches between the pair of left and right first projecting parts 272 or between the first projecting part 272 and the second projecting part 5273, and the ball has a large kinetic energy. The speed can be reduced by collision with the reduction protrusion 5273a.

The overlap width (vertical dimension) of the ball contacting the deceleration protrusion 5273a varies depending on the speed of the ball when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246. That is, a ball passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 at high speed contacts the deceleration protrusion 5273a over a wide area at a higher position, whereas a ball passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 at a slower speed is displaced to a lower position before contacting the deceleration protrusion 5273a, and is limited to abutment with the deceleration protrusion 5273a to the extent that it rubs against the deceleration protrusion 5273a.

Therefore, when the speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 is high, a large deceleration effect can be expected, while when the speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 is slow, the deceleration effect is suppressed. It is possible to avoid the ball from stopping.

According to this embodiment, a ball launched with a strong launch force along launch path HL51 and reaching strip-shaped frame portion 245 upstream (inner left and right) of left and right protrusions 5246 is decelerated by contacting deceleration protrusion 5273a during the rolling process, whereas a ball launched with a weaker launch force along launch path HL52 and reaching strip-shaped frame portion 245 downstream (outer left and right) of left and right protrusions 5246 is not decelerated by deceleration protrusion 5273a.

In other words, a ball launched with a strong launching force that reaches the left and right center of the play area is slowed down by the deceleration protrusion 5273a, while a ball launched with a weak launching force that reaches the outside left and right (left side) of the play area is not slowed down by the deceleration protrusion 5273a. This makes it possible to reduce the difference in speed of the ball flowing down (flowing down as it passes the lower end of the band-shaped frame portion 245) depending on the magnitude of the launching force (the magnitude of kinetic energy).

As shown in FIG. 73, an opening 5274a is formed through the upper surface of the third protrusion 5274, large enough for a ball to pass through. The opening 5274a is formed with a width on the left and right sides that is approximately the diameter of the ball, and forms a passage for the ball together with the recessed portion 5271a that is formed by cutting out the plate-shaped portion 271. The recessed portion 5271a makes it easier to guide the ball toward the opening 5274a.

A through passage 5060d is formed through the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction as a passage for the ball that has entered the opening 5274a. A flow path forming member 5295 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the base plate 60, and includes a guide flow path 5295a that receives the ball that has passed through the through path 5060d and guides the ball toward the right and left outer sides and downward.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear structure portion 266 (see FIG. 25), which serves as a member for sending the ball to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, so that the inner path is communicated with the guide flow path 5295a. Thereby, the path of the ball can be configured so that the ball that has flowed toward the back side of the base plate 60 appears again on the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

When a ball rolling on the band-shaped extension 263 (see FIG. 24) passes through the central rear inclined portion 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, it falls toward the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 18). Due to this arrangement, the ball rolling on the band-shaped extension 263 is highly likely to enter the first winning hole 64.

Therefore, attention to the ball that has passed through the opening 5274a and flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 can be improved. In addition, the player's motivation to adjust the firing force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a can be increased.

Note that the subsequent path of the ball flowing toward the back side is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, through-holes may be formed in the base plate 60 so as to return to the front side of the base plate 60 at the left and right outer positions of the channel front component 265 (see FIG. 18), or the left component 450 and the right A flow path may extend downward so as to flow behind the component member 470.

When the flow path is extended downward so as to flow down behind the left component 450 or the right component 470, the flow path can be arranged so as to at least partially overlap with the outer drop path FL2 (see FIG. 31) in a front view, so that the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 appears as if it is flowing down toward the first ball guide section 457. This can increase the attention to the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 and 75. In the second embodiment, the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 13, but in the sixth embodiment, the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional views of a pachinko machine 6010 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in Figure 36. Figure 74 shows the state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is positioned at the upper end position, and Figure 75 shows the state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is positioned at the lower end position.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the pachinko machine 6010 has a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13, and is configured so that when the front frame 6014 is locked to the outer frame 11, the first glass unit 6016a blocks the front side of the game area.

The front frame 6014 comprises the first glass unit 6016a described above and the second glass unit 6016b, which is positioned closer to the front and has an inclined posture that inclines upward as it approaches the front.

The first glass unit 6016a has a sheet glass portion formed on the game area side with the center frame 86 as a reference, and an opening 6016c formed therethrough on the opposite side. That is, since the front of the center frame 86 is open in the first glass unit 6016a, the glass unit 6016a does not block the field of view when viewed from the front, so that the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device disposed inside the center frame 86 can be easily viewed from the front. The visibility of the display of 81 can be improved.

The second glass unit 6016b is fixed by being fitted inside the support part 6014a that forms the periphery of the front frame 6014. Since the second glass unit 6016b separates the player from the operating unit 500, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the operating unit 500 even if an opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a.

The support portion 6014a is formed from an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide the configuration arranged on the back side thereof.

The light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is the same as the light-emitting action performance unit 700 described in the second embodiment, except for the different arrangement. That is, the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 has a rotation performance device 800 rotatably arranged therein.

On the inside of the front frame 6014, a first long hole 6672, a second long hole 6673, and a curved long hole 6674 having the same shapes as the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674 described in the second embodiment are formed in a state inclined at about 25 degrees in the forward rolling direction with respect to the posture in the second embodiment.

We will now explain how the appearance of the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 changes as the positioning is changed. As shown in Figure 74, when the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is positioned at the top end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the entirety of the rotating member 810 is hidden by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. In other words, when the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 is positioned at the top end position, the visibility of the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 decreases.

On the other hand, when the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is displaced diagonally downward toward the rear, the portion hidden by the support portion 6014a is positioned behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the entire rotating member 810 becomes visible. Also, even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotation axis RJ1 to perform a rotational light-emitting presentation, the player can see all the way up to the tip of the rotation of the rotating member 810. In other words, when the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is positioned at the bottom end position, the visibility of the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is improved.

Note that, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 75, the rotation locus of the rotating member 810 enters into the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, and an opening 6016c is formed at the position where it enters. , contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810 is avoided. That is, the opening 6016c functions to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rotating member 810 by avoiding contact with the rotating member 810.

In this embodiment, a light emitting action producing unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, while a light emitting action producing unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The operation mode of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is as described above in the second embodiment.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light emission operation production unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position as a production motion in which the movable unit protrudes to the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, or the light emission operation production unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position. The motion production unit 700 may be in an extended state of the internal motion unit 600.

The rotational light-emitting performance of the rotational performance device 800 may be performed by the rotating member 810 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, or by the rotating member 810 of the light-emitting action performance unit 6700. This improves the freedom of setting the execution position of the rotational light-emitting performance, and improves the design freedom of the execution variations (variations such as performing the rotational light-emitting performance with either the light-emitting action performance unit 700 or the light-emitting action performance unit 6700, performing the rotational light-emitting performance alternately, performing the rotational light-emitting performance simultaneously, etc.).

Note that, although the case where the light-emitting action production unit 700 is also arranged inside the rear case 510 has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting action production unit 700 may be configured not to be arranged inside the rear case 510.

In this case, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the field of view is not obstructed by the light-emitting operation production unit 700, so the upper edge of the third symbol display device 81 is pulled upward to display the third symbol display device 81. The area of the region can be increased. In addition, since the front and back width of the back case 510 that was necessary to accommodate the light emitting action production unit 700 can be shortened, the front and back distance between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 can be shortened. The visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the second embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the linear second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674, so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 moves in parallel; Although the case has been described in which the state in which the light emitting operation producing unit 700 rotates around the central axis J1 of the cylindrical part 684 is switched, the guide part 7673 of the seventh embodiment extends linearly along the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape of a protrusion. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

76(a) to 76(c) are schematic side views of the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674, schematically showing the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 in the seventh embodiment. 76(a) illustrates the arrangement of the configuration at the height in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, and FIG. 76(b) illustrates the arrangement of the configuration at the height in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, In FIG. 76(c), the arrangement of the structures at the height in the extended state of the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated.

Note that the arrangement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the extended state is different from the arrangement of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment, as can be seen from the fact that the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is shifted backward. The light emitting operation production unit 700 is shifted rearward from the arrangement in the state.

The guide portion 7673 is formed along the extension direction of the second long hole 673 described in the second embodiment, and is formed on the left and right inner surfaces of the outer member 610 as a plate-like portion extending further downward, and is arranged to regulate the forward and backward displacement of the metal rod member 686. The L-shaped long hole 7674 has a recessed portion 7674a formed rearward from the lower end of the curved long hole 674 described in the second embodiment, with a width that can receive the cylindrical portion 684.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will be explained. The displacement from FIG. 76(a) to FIG. 76(b) is a parallel movement performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. In the displacement from FIG. 76(b) to FIG. 76(c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction.

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction by entering and retracting from the recessed portion 7674a, since the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. In other words, while the position of the displacement member 680 is changing, the position of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 can be tilted and displaced while the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the second elongated hole 673 for guiding the metal rod member 686 extends in the vertical direction, but the second elongated hole 8673 in the eighth embodiment extends in the vertical direction. It extends along an inclined direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

77(a) to 77(c) schematically show a second elongated hole 8673, a curved elongated hole 8674, a third elongated hole 8675, a first elongated hole upper part 8672a, and a first elongated hole lower part 8672b in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of a second elongated hole 8673, a curved elongated hole 8674, a third elongated hole 8675, a first elongated hole upper part 8672a, and a first elongated hole lower part 8672b shown in FIG.

77(a) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 are arranged at the upper end position of the displacement range, and in FIG. 77(b), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is curved with the second elongated hole 8673. 77(c) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at a connecting position with the curved long hole 8674 and the third long hole 8675. Ru.

The first elongated hole upper part 8672a and the second elongated hole 8673 extend in a downwardly inclined direction toward the rear at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. A curved elongated hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 8673.

The curved elongated hole 8674 is curved along an arc centered on the central axis J81 of the cylindrical portion 684 in a state where the cylindrical portion 684 is arranged at a connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. Extended in shape.

The upper end of the third long hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved long hole 8674. The first long hole lower part 8672b, which is connected to the lower end of the first long hole upper part 8672a, and the third long hole 8675 are extended forward in a direction that is inclined downward at an inclination angle of approximately 70 degrees relative to the front-to-rear direction.

The metal rod member 686 is inserted through the front and rear long holes 636 of the lift plate member 630, and its vertical position changes as the lift plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction. The displacement of the displacement member 680 associated with the change in position of the metal rod member 686 will now be described.

The displacement from FIG. 77(a) to FIG. 77(b) is a parallel movement performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not a vertical direction, but a direction having a longitudinal component. From the perspective of the player, the displacement member 680 appears to be retreating backwards while being lowered, so as the light emitting action producing unit 700 descends and appears, the size of the light emitting action producing unit 700 becomes smaller. You can make it look like you are (far away).

When displacing from FIG. 77(b) to FIG. 77(c), the metal rod member 686 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 684, causing the displacement member 680 to tilt in the forward direction. As a result, the visible side of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 can be switched. In this embodiment, the tilt angle is larger than in the second embodiment, so the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 51) can be made visible to the player.

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction by entering and retracting from the recessed portion 7674a, since the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. In other words, while the position of the displacement member 680 is changing, the position of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 can be tilted and displaced while the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

When the metal rod member 686 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 77(c), the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third long hole 8675. Therefore, it is possible to make the player see the displacement member 680 protruding forward as it descends. At this time, the fact that it has been displaced backward once along the second long hole 8673 makes the protrusion forward more prominent.

In this embodiment, the displacement resistance of the cylindrical portion 684 is increased when the cylindrical portion 684 is disposed at the connecting position between the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b. That is, the inner surface of the first long hole lower portion 8672b that abuts against the rear side of the cylindrical portion 684 in FIG. 77(b) is formed from a material with a larger friction coefficient than the other portions of the first long hole lower portion 8672b and the inner surface of the first long hole upper portion 8672a.

This makes it easier to maintain the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the upper portion 8672a of the first long hole and the lower portion 8672b of the first long hole until the metal rod member 686 reaches the end position of the curved long hole 8674.

Note that the method for maintaining the cylindrical portion 684 at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b is not limited to using a material with a large coefficient of friction, and various methods may be used. Illustrated. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a or the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape with a large friction coefficient (for example, a textured shape).

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the second embodiment, the long hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the left-right direction and short in the up-down direction, but the large diameter hole 9764a in the ninth embodiment is a circular hole with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the flanged ring member 9689b. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 78(a) and 78(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member 9680 and the light-emitting action production unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa line in Figure 37.

Figure 78(a) shows the state in which the fastening portion 682 faces approximately in the front-to-rear direction (a direction inclining upward by 3 degrees toward the front) and the upper edge of the large diameter hole 9764a is supported by abutting the cylindrical portion 689b1. Figure 78(b) shows the state in which the position of the displacement member 9680 is switched to a position in which the fastening portion 682 faces downward, and the brim ring member 9689b and the light emitting action production unit 9700 are supported from below by the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped ring member 689a, which sandwiches the large diameter hole 9764a from both sides, and the flanged ring member 9689b contact the light-emitting action production unit 9700 in a different manner. That is, the plate-shaped ring member 689a contacts the light-emitting action production unit 9700 at the plate flat surface. On the other hand, the flanged ring member 9689b has an inclined surface portion 9689b2 that is formed over 360 degrees from the tip of the flange toward the cylindrical portion 689b1, which contacts the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 that is formed over 360 degrees at the end of the large diameter hole 9764a.

In the state shown in FIG. 78(a) (corresponding to the retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is tilted backward, so the light emitting operation production unit 9700 cannot move toward the rear. and comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Since this contact is on a plane, the sliding frictional force against rotational displacement of the light emitting action production unit 9700 about the fastening portion 682 is reduced, and at least between the large diameter hole 9764a and the cylindrical portion 689b1. The light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be displaced by the gap. Therefore, rotational displacement of the light emitting operation producing unit 9700 can be allowed.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 78(b) (corresponding to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 is directed downward, so that the light emitting operation production unit 9700 sinks downward, and the flange is attached. It comes into contact with the ring member 9689b.

This contact is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2, which is formed over 360 degrees, and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1, which is formed over 360 degrees, so that the light-emitting action production unit 9700 is positioned so that the center of the large diameter hole 9764a is aligned with the center of the fastening portion 682, and the gap between the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 of the large diameter hole 9764a and the inclined surface portion 9689b2 of the flanged ring member 9689b in the direction perpendicular to the central axis of the fastening portion 682 is filled, thereby limiting (restricting) the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 9700.

The weight of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 acts in a direction such that the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is pressed against the inclined surface portion 9689b2, so gravity can be used to increase the degree of restriction on the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 9700.

In this way, in this embodiment, the degree of tolerance (restriction) of the displacement of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 can be switched in accordance with the change in the posture of the displacement member 9680. Therefore, even if the large diameter hole 9764a, which is a through hole with a simple circular cross section, is used, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting action production unit 9700 from shifting in position in the front-back and left-right directions when the displacement member 9680 is tilted and displaced (see FIG. 78(b)).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the position of the light emitting action production unit 9700 from shifting when the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 62) rotates at high speed, so that afterimage display by the rotating member 810 can be advantageously performed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the second embodiment, the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotating member 810 has reached the correct posture, which facilitates tilting of the rotation performance device 800 in the forward and backward directions. However, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 810 is biased to the correct posture by the posture detection means 10830. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the posture detection means 10830 in the tenth embodiment. In 79(a) and 79(b), the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated in a protruding state, the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the fixed gear 10815 fixed to the rotating member 810 is illustrated by a solid line. Also, in 79(b), the correct posture of the rotating member 810 is illustrated, and in 79(a), the state in which the rotating member 810 is angularly deviated from the correct posture (displaced in the rotational direction by about 15 degrees around the rotation axis RJ1) is illustrated, and the rotation direction of each gear 10815, 10821, 10831 toward the state shown in 79(b) is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), in the rotating member 810, the driving force of a drive gear 10821 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 820 is transmitted to a fixed gear 10815 through meshing of the gears. The fixed gear 10815 is in mesh with the detection gear 10831 of the attitude detection means 10830.

The detection gear 10831 has a weight portion 10831a formed by pressing over an angular range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis. In this embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is a metal member that is fitted to the detection gear 10831, but it may also be formed integrally from a resin material.

With this configuration, the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is located toward the center of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc). Therefore, even if the rotation of the rotating member 810 stops in a position different from the correct position (see FIG. 79(a)), the detection gear 10831 is biased by gravity, so that the rotating member 810 can rotate and return to the correct position.

Therefore, even if it is not possible to accurately stop the rotating member 810 in the proper posture as the stopping posture of the drive motor 820 after performing the rotational light emitting effect in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 61), Since the rotating member 810 can then be returned to its proper attitude, the accuracy of detecting the attitude of the rotating member 810 can be reduced. Thereby, product costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state and the extended state does not face in the vertical direction but in the forward tilting direction (see FIGS. 68 and 69). Therefore, the force due to gravity using the weight portion 10831a can be generated regardless of the posture of the rotating member 810 in the forward tilt direction.

This makes it possible to realize not only a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is placed in the correct position when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, and then the position of the rotating performance device 800 is changed in the rising direction, but also a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while being returned to the correct position during the rising operation of the rotating performance device 800 or during vertical displacement.

In addition, when the rotation performance device 800 performs a rising motion from the position shown in FIG. 79(a) (see the time series in FIG. 67 to FIG. 69), the rotating member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and can be returned to the correct position. That is, in this embodiment, the rotating member 810 is shaped so that it is susceptible to air resistance from the short side surfaces, which makes it easier to return the rotating member 810 to the correct position when performing a rising motion.

The short side surface of the rotating member 810 may be formed from a narrow shape that is less susceptible to air resistance. In this case, the motion resistance of the rotating member 810's rotational light emission performance can be reduced. The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the correct position can be generated by the weight portion 10831a.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the upper connecting member 270 that connects the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is provided with the protruding portions 272-277 that distribute the balls' flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the portion that distributes the flow paths of the balls may be formed as a recessed portion instead of protruding. Further, a channel for guiding the ball may be formed through the recess so that the ball can be guided to another location in the gaming area.

For example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be arranged on the underside of the center frame 86, and configured to have a receiving portion that guides balls to any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140. Also, for example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured to have a through gate 67 arranged thereon.

In addition, the upper connecting member 270 is extended along the front side of the base plate 60, and a play area is formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the glass unit 16, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the upper connecting member 270 may be extended along the rear side of the glass unit 16 when the front frame 14 is closed, and a play area may be formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the base plate 60. In this case, a protruding portion may be formed that protrudes toward the base plate 60, and the flow path of the balls may be distributed.

In this case, the fastening position to the base plate 60 is important, but for example, if the fastening position is located near the inner rail 61 in a location that is unlikely to affect the flow of the balls downward (such as the lower left of the return ball prevention member 68), a sufficient playing area can be secured.

In the second embodiment above, the upper connecting member 270 is formed from a symmetrical shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the shape of the center frame 86 is designed so that the left side is away from the inner rail 61 to ensure a path for the ball to flow down, forming a large space between the inner rail 61, while the right side is designed to leave a space between the outer rail 62 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball (as in the case of a typical right-handed machine), it is fully conceivable that the upper connecting member 270 will be formed only on the left side of the play area. It is also possible to design it so that the left and right sides are reversed.

In addition, the upper connecting member 270 is not limited to a configuration in which at least one of the base plate 60 and the center frame 86 is disposed on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270. If the upper connecting member 270 is provided with sufficient rigidity, it is fully conceivable that the upper connecting member 270 will have a portion on the back surface side where neither the base plate 60 nor the center frame 86 is disposed.

Further, the position where the center frame 86 constitutes the thin plate portion 242 and extends does not need to be at the center of the left and right sides. For example, they may be formed on both the left and right sides, or may be configured to protrude as thin plate portions 242 at multiple positions and engage with the base plate 60 (enter alternately with gaps).

Further, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed in a size that occupies most of the left and right width of the upper connecting member 270. In this case, the horizontal width in which the illumination board 251 can be arranged can be expanded.

In addition, regarding the configuration in which the illumination board 251 is placed on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, the placement of the illumination board 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86. For example, if a thin plate member that is connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 and forms one side of the play area is formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, such as the upper connecting member 270, it becomes possible to place the illumination board 251 on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, or the illumination board 251 may be incorporated into the distribution unit 300 or the winning port component 400 disposed below the base plate 60, and configured to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 251 is disposed on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in a manner fixed to the base plate 60, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a structure similar to that of the light emitting unit 518 disposed in the back case 510 (a structure in which a logo corresponding to the model is formed and a light emitting effect is produced using the LEDs of the illumination board disposed inside) is provided on the upper part. It may be arranged behind the connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the illumination board 251 may be omitted so that the light from the rotation effect device 800 passes through the upper connecting member 270. It may be possible to make it easier for players to pass through.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the light from the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c is irradiated onto the lower edge 272a of the first projecting portion 272, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the LED may be placed inside the first projecting portion 272 when viewed from the front. In this case, by providing a light diffusion process on the concave side of the first protruding part 272 or by providing a concave shape that tapers as it gets deeper in the concave direction, the inside of the first protruding part 272 is irradiated. It is possible to diffuse the light, reduce the visibility of the external shape of the LED, and improve the visibility of the light emitted from the LED.

In the second embodiment, the thin plate member 290 has been described as having colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters painted on the front surface of the plate, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least a portion of the thin plate member 290 may be light-diffusing or embossed, or the surface of the thin plate member 290 may be formed in a shape that fits into the recesses of the first protruding portion 272 and the second protruding portion 273 (for example, a convex lens shape or a three-dimensional shape).

In the second embodiment, the holes 291a, 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 receive the protrusion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side and the protrusion 279 protruding from the upper connecting member 270, thereby suppressing misalignment of the thin plate member 290. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the protruding portions inserted into the holes 291a and 291b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to protrude from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270. Further, the protruding portion 244b and the protruding portion 279 may not be inserted into different holes 291a and 291b, but may be inserted into a single hole formed in the thin plate member 290. This allows the thin plate member 290 to be positioned, and can also be used to connect the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270.

In the second embodiment, the protruding portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the back side of the second projecting portion 273, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion 244b may be provided on the back side of the plate-like portion 271 (so as to be opposed to the plate-like portion 271 in the front-rear direction). Note that when the protrusion 244b is formed inside the recess on the back side of the second protrusion 273, the second protrusion 273 functions as a cover for the protrusion 244b.

In the second embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that flows down between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a flows into the first ball guiding portion 457 with some probability, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a gap may be provided between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a and the ball guiding portion 457, and a distribution portion 983 may be disposed between them to ensure that one of the two balls flows into the ball guiding portion 457. In other words, the proportion of balls that enter the ball guiding portion 457 may be changed depending on which of the two positions the distribution portion 983 is in when guiding the ball.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined guide part 458 is inclined in one direction (lower right direction) and guides the ball directly to the second ball guide part 459, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the inclined guide part 458 may extend from both the right and left sides of the ball guide part 457 in the opposite left and right directions, or, for example, the inclined guide part 458 may be configured to guide the ball in a meandering manner to the left and right. The ball may be configured to deviate from the second ball guide portion 459 with a certain probability at the turning position.

Furthermore, for example, the slope guide section 458 may be configured to change the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 depending on whether it guides a single ball or when it guides a plurality of balls at the same time. good. For example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide part 459 in a direction closer to the inclined guide part 458 in the left-right direction than the current position, the ball that has reached the second ball guide part 459 first may be able to catch the following ball before the ball reaches the second ball guide part 459 first. When the ball reaches the second ball guide section 459, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the ball is blocked by the previous ball and easily deviates from the second ball guide section 459.

Conversely, for example, by displacing the second ball guide section 459 in a direction that is slightly farther away from the inclined guide section 458 in the left-right direction than the current position, the ball is likely to reach the second ball guide section 459 first. If a trailing ball reaches the second ball guide section 459 before the ball that is about to fall from between it and the inclined guide section 458 has completely fallen, it becomes easier for the ball to roll on top of the previous ball and reach the second ball guide section 459. This configuration can be realized.

If the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 is lower when a single ball is guided, multiple balls will enter the second ball guide section 459 and the number of prize balls paid out at once will be excessive. This situation can be avoided. On the other hand, if the probability of the balls reaching the second ball guide section 459 is higher when guiding a plurality of balls, then the attention paid to the vicinity of the inclined guide section 458 when a plurality of balls reach the inclined guide section 458 increases. can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the inclined guide portion 458 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to protrude and retract forward and backward. In this case, in the protruding state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide portion 459 as in the second embodiment, while in the retracted state, the rate at which balls that flow to the right upstream of the first ball guide portion 457 reach the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. In addition, the inclined guide portion 458 is not limited to being displaced in and out, and may be configured to be tiltable at regular intervals around a rotation axis extending in the forward and backward directions so that the angle of inclination changes.

In the second embodiment described above, the number of prize balls that land in the second ball guiding section 459 is greater than the number of prize balls that land in the first ball guiding section 457, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of the profit that the player can obtain depending on the balls that land may be different.

For example, the benefit may be obtained not by the payment of prize balls but by the benefit of a lottery for a pattern, or by the benefit of being able to select (vary) the number of rounds of the jackpot game by landing a ball before the start of the jackpot game, or by the benefit of changing (increasing) the probability of a winning pattern after the jackpot game by landing a ball during the jackpot game. These benefits can be set arbitrarily in the first ball guiding unit 457 and the second ball guiding unit 459.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the slope of the ceiling plate portion 455 is substantially constant, but the slope is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be a large angle with respect to the horizontal on the upstream side from an intermediate position, and may be a small angle with respect to the horizontal on the downstream side from the same intermediate position. In this case, the rolling speed of the ball tends to change depending on whether the ball lands on the ceiling plate section 455 upstream of the intermediate position or on the downstream side of the intermediate position. It is easy to predict the trajectory of the ball. That is, it is possible to improve attention to the midway position of the ceiling plate portion 455.

In addition, multiple ridges may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 to slow down the rolling speed of the ball. In this case, the ridges do not need to be formed across the entire left-right width of the ceiling plate portion 455, and may be formed in a partial range, similar to the change in inclination.

Further, the plurality of deceleration protrusions are not limited to the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. For example, it may be provided protruding from the resin wall forming the guide channel that guides the ball downward toward the first ball guide section 457 toward the guide channel side, or it may be provided on the lower surface side of the bulge section 456 or from the inclined guide section 458. It may be provided so as to protrude from the upper surface side of the ball toward the downward flow path of the ball.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are formed is not limited to the direction intersecting the front-rear direction. For example, a protrusion may be provided protruding from the main body plate part 451 to the front side, or a front plate member formed in a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate part 451 is disposed on the front side of the main body plate part 451. When the ball is provided to form a downward flow path for the ball between the front plate member and the main body plate portion 451, a protrusion may be provided to protrude from the front plate member to the back side.

In the above second embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that falls into the first ball guiding section 457 is smoothly guided to the general winning opening 63, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the internal shape of the first ball guiding section 457 is formed in a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, the time it takes for the ball to pass through the first ball guiding section 457 can be extended.

In this case, if a trailing ball reaches the first ball guide part 457 while the ball remains in the first ball guide part 457, the ball can be easily guided toward the inclined guide part 458, and the second ball guide part 457 The probability of the ball hitting the ball can be increased. Therefore, the configuration can be such that a situation in which a ball is guided to the second guide part 459 side occurs without waiting for the rare situation in which a plurality of balls reach the first ball guide part 457 in a row.

Moreover, as a method other than devising the shape of the first ball guide portion 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the ball may be provided. The movable member is configured to block the ball from entering the first ball guide section 457 for a predetermined period after the ball enters the first ball guide section 457, and moves the ball that has reached the movable member to the inclined guide section 458 side. configured to guide you. Thereby, it is possible to improve the probability that the ball will reach the second ball guide section 459 within a predetermined period after the previous ball passes through the first ball guide section 457.

In the second embodiment, the left component 450 is formed from a fixed resin member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path of the ball may be changed by an electrically operated movable part. In this case, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to move forward and backward. That is, when it protrudes forward, it guides the ball toward the second ball guide portion 459, but when it retracts backward, the ball is not guided toward the second ball guide portion 459 and falls.

Further, for example, a plate-like member disposed so as to close the first ball guide portion 457 may be disposed so as to be retractable in the front and back directions. In other words, when the plate-shaped member protrudes forward, the ball that reaches the plate-shaped member is guided toward the inclined guide part 458 and easily enters the second ball guide part 459, but if the plate-shaped member is pushed backward. In the retracted state, the ball can be configured to easily fall into the first ball guide section 457.

For example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate so that the inclination direction is reversed left and right in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b. When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, the inclination direction of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to be a downward inclination toward the inside left and right, so that balls that have deviated toward the inside left and right of the second ball guide portion 459 or balls that have fallen between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414 can be configured to flow toward the opening and closing plate 65b side. This allows the balls to be guided toward the opening and closing plate 65b side from a wide range.

The inclination of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to incline downwards to the left or right, regardless of whether it is electrically powered or not. Even in this case, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 434 still ends up at the outlet 71, so playability can be maintained.

In the second embodiment described above, the balls can be discharged from the play area through the outlet 415, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted, and the outlet 415 may be omitted, so that the balls that pass through the left component 450 flow down toward the opening and closing plate 65b. This can increase the variety of paths that the balls can take to flow down toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the opening/closing plate 65b is formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and rotationally displaced by a rotation axis extending left and right along the lower edge, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, it may be configured to have a pentagonal shape (similar to a home base) when viewed from the front by forming the upper edge portion to be inclined upward toward the left and right center portions when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the ball contacts the upper edge, the ball can easily flow outward to the left and right along the shape of the upper edge.

In addition, an adjustment means may be provided to adjust the flow pattern of the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the upper edge of the opening and closing plate 65b. For example, an extension plate may be provided that extends downward from the left and right inner ends of the inclined plate portion 434 in parallel with the vertical plate portion 433, and a ball passage hole formed in the extension plate in the left and right direction and large enough to allow the balls to pass through may be provided.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage hole may be set at a position that is shifted from the position of the ball that has flown to the left and right outside on the upper edge 65b of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is open (shifted upward), and the opening and closing plate 65b may be designed at a position that allows the passage of a ball that has flown to the left and right outside of the upper edge 65b of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in a state between the open state and the closed state.

In this case, the extension plate and ball passage hole can be configured to keep the balls on the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, preventing leakage to the left and right, while allowing the opening/closing plate 65b to allow the balls to flow (spill) to the left and right when in the process of closing.

In addition, a protruding portion that protrudes from the rear side of the main plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 toward the rear side at a position where it can be supported from below to maintain the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state may be formed on the covering member 430. Furthermore, the protruding portion may abut the opening/closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both left and right width ends of the opening/closing plate 65b. In this case, it becomes easier to maintain the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state.

In the second embodiment described above, when the distribution unit 300 passes through the discharge opening 325 after the ball guided forward by the direction switching unit 317 is switched in the left-right direction above the detection device SE3. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as an ejection opening to eject the ball. In this case, a through-hole large enough to allow a ball to fall may be formed in the lower surface of the direction switching unit 317, and the configuration may be such that the ball that falls into the through-hole is detected by the detection device SE3. Moreover, as a similar configuration, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed.

Alternatively, a similar configuration may be adopted in which the flow path switching direction by the direction switching unit 317 is set to the rear side instead of the front side, or the ball passes forward from above the winning opening 323 to the base board. It may also be configured such that it is discharged to the front side of the device 60.

In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the discharge opening 325 on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3, it is possible to narrow the distance between the left and right pair of detection devices SE3, and to reduce the space on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3. It can be effectively used for planting space, etc.

In addition, these configurations do not need to be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and different configurations may be used for the left and right. For example, a configuration may be used on either the left or right side during a jackpot game in which a ball passing forward from above the winning opening 323 can be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b. In this case, the probability that a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will return to the front side of the base plate 60 and be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b changes depending on whether the ball is guided to the side of the configuration through which the ball passes forward from above the winning opening 323 or the opposite. This can improve attention to the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64.

In the second embodiment described above, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is retracted above the center frame 86, and in the extended state, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 may be configured vertically and retracted to the left or right side of the center frame 86.

Furthermore, following the configuration in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 is configured to protrude forward from the upper edge of the front frame 14, it may be configured to protrude forward from the left and right edges of the front frame 14, and the light-emitting action production unit 700 may be configured to retract to the protruding portion. In this case, the light-emitting action production unit 700 may be configured to retract to the front side of both the left and right edges, and in the protruding state, the light-emitting action production unit 700 may be configured to retract and be positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81.

In the second embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 is described as the member that contacts the rotating member 810, but the material of the cylindrical member 695 is not limited in any way. For example, the cylindrical member 695 may be made of a hard resin material that does not deform under the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, excessive displacement of the rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

Also, the cylindrical member 695 may be made of a soft resin material that can deform (deform in the radial direction) even with the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, the cylindrical member 695 functions as a buffer material, making it easier to prevent damage to the rotating member 810.

In the second embodiment described above, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are designed to be viewed as one with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 when the internal operation unit 600 is in an intermediate state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 may be designed to be viewed as one with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 when the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is in a tilted position tilted to the left or right in a specific up-down arrangement. In this case, the performance effect of the bottom wall portion 511 and the decorative plate 811 can be improved by designing the content that is viewed as one unit to be different when the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is tilted to the left and when it is tilted to the right.

In the second embodiment, by tilting the light emitting action producing unit 700 while moving up and down, the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes when viewed from the front, and the vertical position of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes. Although the case where the two occur simultaneously has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the vertical arrangement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 may be maintained while the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed from the front may be changed. Also in the second embodiment, for example, when the light-emitting operation producing unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 is rotated by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, so that the projection direction of the rotating member 810 changes. Therefore, the outer shape of the rotating member 810 when viewed from the front can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the forward/backward displacement member 653 that generates resistance to the upward/downward displacement of the lift plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the forward/backward direction by the solenoid 651, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be displaced in a direction toward or away from the abutted plate 638, and a frictional force can be generated between the abutted plate 638 and the abutted plate 638, or the direction of movement can be blocked, thereby generating displacement resistance of the lift plate member 630.

In the second embodiment, the case is explained in which the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed in a direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630 (a direction on a plane perpendicular to the moving direction of the elevating plate member 630). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the elevating plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, if the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to incline upward as it moves forward, when the front-rear displacement member 653 moves forward, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward, the time until the lifting plate member 630 stops can be shortened by applying an upward load in addition to sliding friction if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward. On the other hand, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced upward, the kinetic energy of the lifting plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the lifting plate member 630 by applying an upward load in addition to sliding friction.

In addition, if the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed to be inclined downward toward the front, when the longitudinal displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced upward, the sliding In addition to dynamic friction, applying a downward load can shorten the time until the lifting plate member 630 stops. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced downward, in addition to the sliding friction, by applying a downward load, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630. Can be done.

In the second embodiment described above, the overlap width between the abutment plate 638 and the front-to-rear displacement member 653 when viewed in the up-down direction is configured to be approximately the same whether the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state or in the extended state, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed with an inclined surface that slopes more rearward as it approaches the top. In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 displaces forward as the abutment plate 638 is displaced downward, a load can be generated on the abutment plate 638 in a direction such that it is lifted up from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653, thereby strengthening the braking effect of the lifting plate member 630.

In addition, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed with an inclined surface that slopes more rearward as it approaches downward. In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 displaces forward as the abutment plate 638 is displaced upward, a load can be generated in a direction that presses the abutment plate 638 downward from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653, thereby strengthening the braking effect of the lifting plate member 630.

In addition, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed so that an inclined surface that slopes rearward as it moves upward from the lower end position and an inclined surface that slopes rearward as it moves downward from the upper end position join together at a predetermined intermediate position, and correspondingly, a protruding portion that protrudes rearward may be formed at an intermediate position on the rear end surface of the abutment plate 638.

In this case, when the abutment plate 638 is positioned on the front side of the front-rear displacement member 653 and the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, the vertical position of the lift plate member 630 can be stabilized in such a manner that the protruding portion of the abutment plate 638 is accommodated in a predetermined intermediate position on the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653.

In this case, the number of portions where the downwardly inclined backwardly inclined surface and the upwardly inclined backwardly inclined surface are combined is not limited in the front end surface of the longitudinal displacement member 653. For example, the shape may include a plurality of parts to be combined (for example, a saw blade shape or a jagged shape). In this case, the vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 are configured to be able to be vertically shifted, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the left and right elevating plate members 630 are fastened and fixed to the light emitting operation production unit 700, and vertical positional deviation of the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 is not allowed. In this case, it is sufficient to configure the resistance generating device 650 for generating displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 only on the left and right sides.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since vertical positional displacement of the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 is allowed, it is preferable to arrange the resistance generating devices 650 on both the left and right sides. Using this configuration, control may be performed to shift the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651.

For example, when displacing the internal operation unit 600 downward from the retracted state to the intermediate state, the drive control of the drive motor 648 is performed with the pair of left and right solenoids 651 energized and the longitudinal displacement member 653 disposed at the rear. When the same drive control as above is executed with the left solenoid 651 energized and the right solenoid 651 de-energized, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is placed in an inclined position with the left side facing downward relative to the right side. It is possible to perform a performance movement like this.

This performance operation can be executed without applying a load to the internal operation unit 600 until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the operational error limit state. Furthermore, instead of increasing the number of drive patterns of the drive motor 648 for this production operation, the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used for the downward displacement of the internal operation unit 600 is used, and the excitation of the solenoid 651 is changed to a different excitation pattern. By executing this, the performance action is executed. Therefore, the drive pattern required of the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

Further, the timing at which the right solenoid 651 is de-energized is not limited to when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. For example, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the left and right solenoids 651 may be energized, and the right solenoid 651 may be de-energized while the internal operating unit 600 is in the intermediate state from the retracted state. In this case, the downward displacement of the right-side lifting plate member 630 can be delayed by the frictional force, and a performance operation is performed in which the light-emitting operation production unit 700 takes an inclined posture with the left side disposed downward relative to the right side. Can be done.

Note that, although an example of the performance operation has been described in which the internal operation unit 600 is in a retracted state, it is naturally conceivable that the up-down direction may be reversed. In other words, the excitation pattern of the pair of left and right solenoids 651 described above may be executed in accordance with the displacement of the internal operation unit 600 from the extended state.

In the second embodiment, in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation of the rotation effect device 800 is controlled while the upward displacement of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 is regulated by the longitudinal displacement member 653. Although the case where the light emitting effect is executed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as a type of rotating light emitting effect executed with the internal operation unit 600 in an extended state, there is a lottery losing effect on both the left and right sides, which is different from the effect for announcing a jackpot that is executed with the rotating shaft RJ1 fixed. Alternatively, the rotational light emitting effect of the rotational effect device 800 may be executed while the left and right solenoids 651 are energized.

In this case, on the side where the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-to-rear displacement member 653 is retracted from the movement path of the abutment plate 638, so even if the light-emitting action production unit 700 or the lifting plate member 630 is displaced upward by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810, the front-to-rear displacement member 653 does not act to suppress the upward displacement.

As a result, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 can easily shift position. This allows for a motion performance in which the rotational light-emitting performance of the rotating member 810 is performed with the rotation axis RJ1 not fixed, so that while the rotation speed of the rotating member 810 and the light-emitting pattern of the light irradiated from the rotating member 810 during the rotational light-emitting performance are the same, the figures that are visible due to the afterimage display of the rotating member 810 can be made different.

Note that in order to create a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be energized, or the solenoids 651 on one side of the left and right sides may be energized; By de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the other side, it is possible to restrict vertical displacement of the ascending plate member 630 on the de-energized side. It is possible to suppress upward displacement, and damage to the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 can be avoided.

In the second embodiment described above, a case was described in which the transmission efficiency changes as the rack gear portion 634 approaches and moves away from the transmission gear 649, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be displaceable back and forth, and the transmission gear 649 may be displaceable back and forth relative to the rack gear portion 634.

Further, the transmission gear 649 may be formed such that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 changes in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the elevating plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of the rack gear part 634 in a state where the meshing between the rack gear part 634 and the transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described, the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be separated from the transmission gear 649 to the extent that it disengages from the transmission gear 649. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 runs out of control, the rack gear part 634 is configured to separate from the transmission gear 649 before an overload occurs on the rack gear part 634, thereby causing damage to the rack gear part 634 and the transmission gear 649. can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the rack gear section 634 is pressed against the transmission gear 649 by the weight of the elevating plate member 630, and the meshing state of the gears is optimized. Although the case where the user is pushed away from 649 has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the direction of displacement of the rack gear portion 634, it may be configured to be displaced in both directions by the driving force of the solenoid 651. Further, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Further, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the drive shaft.

In the second embodiment described above, the thickness of the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 guided into the long holes 672-674 was described as being thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686 because electrical wiring is inserted inside the tubular portion 684, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the inside is not hollow but closed, the tubular portion 684 may be formed thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686, or the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed thicker than the tubular portion 684.

By forming the metal rod-shaped member 686 (front member) thick, a large area can withstand the load generated at a position far from the central axis J1 when the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted. As a result, the durability of the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be improved, so that, for example, the durability when the same member is formed from a resin material can be improved.

Moreover, the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed with the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set for the long holes 672 to 674 can be designed with similar values, and the degree of wear of the long holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 are designed to have the same clearance in the front and rear direction with the fastening parts 632 and 633 of the elevating plate member 630, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevating plate member 630 is formed to be larger than the clearance between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevating plate member 630. It's okay. In this case, since the permissible width in which the lower part of the elevating plate member 630 is displaced in the longitudinal direction can be increased, the meshing state between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 can be changed by the longitudinal displacement of the elevating plate member 630. can be made easier.

In the second embodiment, the second elongated hole 673 is formed as a vertically extending elongated hole, but the second elongated hole 673 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be configured to extend downwardly and inclined toward the front so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is disposed further forward. good. In this case, while the metal rod member 686 is guided in the second elongated hole 673, the metal rod member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction.

In other words, before the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state from the retracted state, it is possible to realize an operation that gradually changes the attitude of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 in the tilting direction.

The second long hole 673 does not need to be inclined from the upper end, but may be formed as a long hole in the vertical direction from the upper end to the middle, and then extended in a downward sloping direction from the middle. In this case, when the lift plate member 630 starts moving from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the position of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 can be maintained, so that collision between the base plate 60 and the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the center of gravity G1 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is disposed between the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod member 686, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity G1 may be located on the opposite side of the cylindrical portion 684 with respect to the metal bar-shaped member 686, or may be located on the opposite side of the metal bar-shaped member 686 with respect to the cylindrical portion 684.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the shaped portion supporting the cylindrical portion 684 is formed of a long hole, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 684 may be configured to be rotatable about a fixed axis.

In the above second embodiment, the displacement members 680 supporting the light-emitting action performance unit 700 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, and are displaced in the up and down direction, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 may be configured to displace in the front-to-back direction or a direction that combines the front-to-back and up-to-down directions, the displacement members 680 may be arranged on either the left or right side of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, or the displacement members 680 may be arranged above and below the light-emitting action performance unit 700, and be displaced in the left-to-right direction or the front-to-back direction.

In the second embodiment, a rotating performance device 800 that rotates is used as the movable member disposed in the light-emitting performance unit 700, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that moves back and forth in a linear direction may be used, or a movable member that vibrates may be used.

In the second embodiment, the support hole 764b is located on the lower side of the two upper and lower connecting holes 764, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support hole 764b may be located on the upper side, or both the upper and lower support holes 764b may be located on the upper side.

In the case where the upper and lower connected holes 764 on the right side are both support holes 764b and the upper and lower connected holes 764 on the left side are both elongated holes 764a, only the displacement in the horizontal direction of the light emitting operation production unit 700 with respect to the displacement member 680 is caused. This is allowed, and it is possible to suppress a change in posture in the direction of rotation of the light emitting operation production unit 700 about the fastening portion 682.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the elongated hole 764a, and a through hole having a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be formed as a perfectly circular through hole having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684. Further, for example, as the support hole 764b, an elongated hole whose length in the longitudinal direction is shorter than the elongated hole 764a may be adopted. In this case, the light emitting action producing unit 700 can perform horizontal movements in the left and right directions.

When the left and right connecting holes 764 are shaped such that the diagonally opposite connecting holes 764 are both support holes 764b, the left-right misalignment of the light-emitting action production unit 700 and changes in its posture in the rotational direction around the fastening part 682 are suppressed. Therefore, it is good to form it with sufficient strength to prevent misalignment and to precisely control the operation, but if this is not the case, even a slight malfunction can lead to damage to the light-emitting action production unit 700, so care must be taken.

In the third embodiment, an opening 3982k is formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening 4985k is formed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Although the case in which a is formed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that both openings 3982k and 4985k are formed. In this case, resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Also, for example, an opening may be formed in front of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed in the rear of the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a confluence flow path may be formed that allows the balls discharged from these openings to merge downstream. In this case, the appearance of the balls flowing down to the left and right can be changed, improving the presentation effect of the performance using the balls.

Also, for example, an opening may be formed on at least one of the front and rear sides of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed on at least one of the left and right sides of the second passage TR2, so that balls are discharged from the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the respective openings.

In the third and fourth embodiments, the case where the opening 985d is provided is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the opening 985d may be omitted, and the distance between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 may be narrowed, thereby narrowing the left-right distance of the detection device SE3 and narrowing the left-right distance of the openings 985e and 985f. In this case, the left-right width at the lower end of the bulge portion 982 can be further shortened.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a space is formed between the standing wall 982a arranged between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a 7-segment display device may be arranged and used as a 7-segment presentation range, or a small liquid crystal display device may be arranged.

In the fifth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a passage for guiding a game ball to the back side of the game area is formed in the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the passage for guiding the game ball may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86, in the center frame 86 and the base plate 60, or in the base plate 60. , may be formed to pass through the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270, or may be formed on any of the base plate 60, the center frame 86, and the upper connecting member 5270.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the opening 5274a is formed in the third projecting portion 5274, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed on any of the other overhangs 272, 5273, and 275 to 277. Further, the destination of the ball after falling may be made different for each opening.

For example, a ball that passes through the first opening may reach the upper surface of the band-shaped extension 263, a ball that passes through the second opening may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the nail KG2, and a ball that passes through the third opening may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the curved protrusion 414. In this case, if the ball is aimed at the first opening, it is easier to get the ball to enter the first winning hole 64, while if the ball is aimed at the second or third opening, it is harder for the ball to go to the first winning hole 64 and it is easier to guide the ball to the ball guides 457, 459 or the specific winning hole 65a.

In the sixth embodiment, the light-emitting operation presentation unit 6700 moves back and forth on the front side of the game board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting operation presentation unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to the position (position on the rear side of the game board 13) when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state described in the second embodiment.

In this case, the state where it is difficult to be seen by the player can be configured in two positions: a position in the retracted state disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and a position at the upper end of the light emitting operation production unit 6700. Therefore, a shutter, a light guide plate, etc. to block the player's view are arranged on the second glass unit 6016b, and the light emitting operation production unit 6700 is moved while blocking the player's view, making it difficult to see. This makes it possible to make it impossible to know which of the two positions the light emitting action production unit 6700 is placed. This makes it difficult to predict the action performance by the light emitting action performance unit 6700.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the L-shaped long hole 7674 is formed as a long hole that extends halfway in the vertical direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be inclined or curved not in the vertical direction but in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, during the period in which the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced downward, it is also displaced rearward at the same time, so that the displacement member 680 can be configured to change its posture in the forward rotation direction at the same time as the displacement member 680 is displaced downward.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed in an L-shape extending rearward at the lower end, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed to extend further downward from the upper and lower positions of the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, by entering the recessed portion 7674a, vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 can be restricted at a midway position within the vertical displacement range of the cylindrical portion 684. Even if a load is generated due to regulations, the cylindrical portion 684 is formed thick, so that damage can be easily avoided.

In the eighth embodiment, when the metal rod member 686 is positioned midway through the curved long hole 8674, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is aligned with the front-to-rear direction. In this state, the rotating member 810 may be rotated at high speed to perform a rotational light-emitting performance. Even if the metal rod member 686 is positioned midway through the curved long hole 8674, the resistance generating device 650 can regulate the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 630 to maintain the posture of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and prevent the rotation axis RJ1 from shifting out of position.

In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rolling direction before tilting, so after the tilting displacement, the back side (heat sink 812 side) of the rotary member 810 is directed toward the player. It is a posture. Even in this case, the back side of the rotating member 810 is covered with a heat sink 812, and the illumination board is also housed inside so that it is not exposed.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while descending. It may be designed so that the position is the same after that. Thereby, for example, it is possible to reduce the difficulty in designing when a plurality of sets of the displacement member 680, the light emitting action production unit 700, and the rotation production device 800 are arranged in a stacked manner in the front-rear direction.

Note that the shapes of the long holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, and 8675 are not limited at all. For example, a wave shape may be used, or a combination of a straight hole and a wave (curved) hole may be used.

In the above ninth embodiment, a case was described in which the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 changes depending on the position of the displacement member 9680, thereby changing the ease with which the light-emitting action production unit 9700 shifts position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the design of the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1, a high-friction resin material may be placed at the point where they are pressed against each other, a high-viscosity sheet material may be placed at the point where they are pressed against each other, or a single or multiple recesses and protrusions that fit into each other may be formed at the point where they are pressed against each other.

The shape of the concave and convex parts may be unevenly formed with a point as the center, or may be a protrusion or groove formed with a straight line or curve as the center. In the case of a protrusion or groove, it is easy to tolerate misalignment of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 in the direction along the extension direction, while it is easy to limit misalignment of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 in the direction intersecting the extension direction.

In the tenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the effect of setting the rotating member 810 in the proper posture is caused by the biasing force due to the detection gear 10831's own weight, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the attitude of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

Alternatively, the rotating member 810 may be prevented from rising and operating in the backward rotation direction until the rotating member 810 assumes a proper posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, the engaging portion is retracted to the left and right inwards, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion protrudes to the left and right outward. can be fitted (inserted) into the inner member 670, and when fitted, the movement of the rotating member 810 in the rising direction may be restricted. In this case, since it is possible to mechanically prevent the rotating member 810 from rising and operating without being in the proper posture, it is possible to avoid unexpected damage to the rotating member 810.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the detection device SE3 disposed on the downstream side of the first winning a prize opening 64 is arranged on the left and right so that the front and back positions are the same, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the arrangement of the detection device SE3 may be shifted forward or backward.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Resin components that can replace nails>
In a game machine that includes a game board main body, a fixed member whose arrangement is fixed to the game board main body, and a connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member, the connecting member is A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to guide a ball.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, randomly configure the flow path of game balls using nails driven into the game board (see, for example, JP 2007-325743 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the flow path of game balls is configured only by nails, so nails need to be driven into almost the entire area of the game board. In order to ensure the strength of the areas where the nails are driven, the game board needs to be thick, which reduces the design freedom of the game board shape, especially in the thickness direction.

In contrast, the gaming machine A1 is configured so that the gaming ball can be guided by a connecting member that connects the gaming board body and the fixed member, so there is no need to drive nails into the gaming board body in the area where the connecting member is arranged. Therefore, in the area where the connecting member is arranged, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the shape of the gaming board body, especially in the thickness direction.

For example, by making parts that can be designed to be any thickness thin, the volume of parts required for the entire game board can be reduced, thereby cutting material costs, and the space freed up by making the parts thin can be used to place parts for effects (such as illumination boards) to create a variety of lighting effects.

Note that the arrangement of the connecting members is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board so as to form the part that first collides with a game ball introduced into the game area, or the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board so as to constitute the part that first collides with the game ball introduced into the game area, or the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board as a member that holds the through gate inside. It may be arranged on the left and right sides of the frame, or it may be arranged on the lower side of the center frame as a member for guiding the game ball to the winning hole.

The connecting member may be configured to be symmetrical or asymmetrical. Basically, if the play area is symmetrical, it is preferable that the connecting member is also configured to be symmetrical, and if the play area is asymmetrical (for example, in the case of a right-handed machine), it is preferable that the connecting member is also configured to be asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine A1, the connecting member has a guide portion configured to be able to guide the gaming ball, and the guide portion is configured to protrude toward the gaming area. In the gaming machine A2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can provide the same effect as a nail that protrudes into the gaming area, and when the connecting member is made of a light-transmitting resin material, it can transmit light more easily than a nail. Therefore, even in the area where the guide is located, it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the light irradiated from behind the guide to the player.

The shape of the guide portion may mimic the shape of a nail, but since the strength of a thin nail formed from a resin material is lower than that of a nail made from metal, the guide portion may be formed in a shape that surrounds the area in which multiple nails are placed. This makes it possible to eliminate the lack of strength even when the guide portion is formed from a resin material.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the guide portion of gaming machine A2 has a recessed portion on the opposite side to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to reduce the weight of the connecting member. Furthermore, by making the wall thickness of the guide part thinner, the guide part can be easily bent, and when the game ball collides with the guide part, the guide part is deflected, which causes the difference between the game ball and the guide part. Since the generated load can be alleviated, it is possible to easily avoid damage to the guide section due to the load at the time of impact.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide section includes a first guide section arranged adjacent to the gaming board body and a second guide section arranged adjacent to the fixed member, and the first guide section is narrower than the second guide section. Gaming machine A4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A2 and A3, gaming machine A4 has a narrow first guide section, which means that the guide section itself is easily flexible and can release the load without the game board itself beingndable. On the other hand, the second guide section can release the load by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate, even if the guide section itself does not bend.

Note that the aspect of the narrow width may be set such that the maximum width is small, or may be specified by the presence of a narrow portion such as when the shape is a triangle.

A gaming machine A5 is one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, characterized in that the guide section is arranged such that the part where the sides that make up the frame shape intersect at the maximum angle when viewed from the projection direction is located lower than the upper end position.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible to allow bending deformation around the part where the angle is maximum, thereby making it easier to withstand the collision of the gaming ball. can.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the member to be fixed is formed in an annular shape and is fixed inside the gaming board main body.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the shape of the fixed member can be easily held by the rigidity of the game board main body.

A gaming machine A7 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, and is configured so that the connecting member and the game board body or the fixed member overlap, and the overlapping object changes depending on the location.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machine A7 omits the formation of the gaming board body and uses the fixed member instead, which reduces the material costs required for the gaming board body compared to forming the gaming board body without omitting the formation of the gaming board body.

In addition, in the area where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap, it is possible to make it easier for light emitted from the back to pass through, and by forming the fixed member with a thin wall, it is possible to secure space on the back side. , the degree of freedom in arranging the presentation device can be improved.

A gaming machine A8 in which a light emitting means is arranged behind a location where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap in the gaming machine A7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, gaming machine A8 makes it easier to secure space for arranging the light-emitting means by forming the fixed member with a thin wall compared to arranging the light-emitting means behind the gaming board body.

A gaming machine A9 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, and is characterized in that it is provided with a thin decorative member disposed between the fixed member and the connecting member, and the thin decorative member is aligned with a first positioning portion formed on the fixed member and a second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, gaming machine A9 allows for the alignment of thin decorative members without being restricted by the shapes of the fixed members and connecting members.

A gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the first positioning part and the second positioning part engage with each other in the gaming machine A9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can align the fixed member and the connecting member using the first positioning unit and the second positioning unit.

＜Sorting without nails＞
A gaming machine B1 comprising a passing area through which gaming balls can pass, a guiding means configured to be capable of guiding gaming balls into the passing area, and a flow-down area through which gaming balls that have passed through the passing area flow down, wherein the guiding means is configured to be capable of changing the rate at which gaming balls are guided into the passing area, and the flow-down area comprises a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet configured to allow gaming balls to enter, and is configured to be capable of maintaining the rate at which gaming balls enter the first ball inlet and the rate at which gaming balls enter the second ball inlet.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, use nails hammered into the game board to distribute game balls to winning holes (see, for example, JP 2007-325743 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the state of the nails used to distribute the flow path of the game balls can change relative to the base plate when they collide with the game balls, and this change in state can create conditions that make it easier or harder for the ball to enter the winning hole, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the perspective of fairness in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in a situation where the rate at which the guiding means guides the game ball to the passing area can be changed, the downstream area is determined by the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entrance and the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entrance. Since it is configured such that the ratio of game balls entering the second ball entry port can be maintained, it becomes easier or difficult for game balls to enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. This can be avoided and the game can be improved from the viewpoint of fairness.

In gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the downstream region is formed of a resin material.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, since the flowing area is formed from a resin material, if a part of the resin member forming the flowing area is damaged, the resin member itself can be replaced. can be easily restored to its original state. Therefore, compared to the case where game balls are sorted using nails, improvements can be made in terms of ease of maintenance and extension of the operating period of the game machine.

In addition, in the case of nails, even if they are bent, it is difficult to visually determine, and the ball may be operated in a state where the distribution state (balance) of the game balls has changed from the time of shipment. If a bend is formed, it can be made difficult to create a state different from the state at the time of shipment by making the shape difficult to bend or by designing the product to be easily damaged if bend occurs. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game balls as they were at the time of shipment.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first ball entry port is arranged upstream of the second ball entry port, and the profit that the player obtains when a game ball enters the second ball entry port is , a gaming machine B3 characterized in that the profit is larger than the profit obtained by the player when a game ball enters the first ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can draw attention to whether the gaming balls will flow down toward the second ball entrance.

The type of benefit that a player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the presence or absence of prize balls or the number of prize balls, the presence or absence of a lottery for a design, a benefit in which the probability of a lottery change depending on the passage of the game ball, or a combination of these.

Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 is provided with upstream means arranged upstream of the passing area and capable of guiding the game ball in a third direction different from the passing area, and the upstream means includes the above-mentioned upstream means. The game balls are configured to prevent the game balls from flowing down into the second ball entrance, and the game balls sorted in the third direction pass through a profit passage means by which the player can earn profits when the balls enter. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to flow down a path.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming balls that do not go to the passing area side do not obstruct the flow of the balls heading toward the second ball entrance, and furthermore, , since there is a possibility that the ball may pass through the profit passing means, it is possible to improve attention to the game ball that has deviated from the passing area side.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B4, a gaming ball guided in the third direction by the upstream means is configured such that the more upstream the point at which guidance begins, the more likely the ball will enter the profit passing means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the attention of the upstream means can be improved not only on the downstream side disposed on the profit passing means side but also on the upstream side. In other words, the game area can be configured so that even if the player is dissatisfied with the normal game, he will be comfortable with the jackpot game.

A gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a first member constituting the general winning opening side and a second member constituting the profit passing means side are positioned by engagement of resin component members in the gaming machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, the fastening screws can be omitted compared to the case where the first member and the second member are fixed with metal fastening screws, so the first Visibility at the overlapping position of the member and the second member can be improved.

A gaming machine B7, which is a gaming machine B6, is characterized in that the positioning method is sandwiching between the gaming board and the gaming board.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B6, gaming machine B7 makes it easier to determine the positional relationship between the first and second members in the portion that faces the play area. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of game balls that flow down while contacting the first and second members from becoming irregularly disturbed. In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the front-to-back positions of the first and second members being reversed, which is likely to occur when members are fixed to the game board body with fastening screws.

Among any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, gaming machine B8 is characterized by having a deceleration protrusion that maintains the momentum of the gaming machine until it is directly above the profit passing means, and then decelerates it after it is directly above it.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, damage to the profit passing means due to the game ball colliding with the profit passing means at high speed can be avoided.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B8, the profits are collected from a wide area on both the left and right, and the profit passing means beyond that is configured to be wide on both the left and right.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B8, even when game balls reach the profit passing means consecutively, the game balls that arrived first are allowed to flow left and right, making it easier to accept the following game balls. can do. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid defective ball entry when the game balls reach the profit passing means successively.

A gaming machine B10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B8 or B9, an auxiliary means for assisting the falling of the gaming balls in a predetermined manner is disposed behind the falling path of the gaming balls to the profit passage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B8 and B9, gaming machine B10 can assist the flow of gaming balls to the profit passing means in a predetermined manner using an auxiliary means, thereby improving problems related to the flow of gaming balls in a predetermined manner.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a game ball that enters a predetermined prize opening and flows down, and a flowing path of the game ball, a game machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B10, it is possible to make the game ball that enters a predetermined winning hole and flows down appear as if it is flowing down toward the profit passing means. As a result, the game balls that enter the predetermined prize opening during the execution of the jackpot game can be added up as the number of game balls that appear to enter the profit passing means, so that most of the game balls fired are profitable. It is possible to create the illusion that the ball is entering the means of passage.

Gaming machine B12 is characterized in that in gaming machine B10, the auxiliary means is a decorative means that decorates the flow path to the profit passing means from behind.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B10, gaming machine B12 can increase the player's interest by using decoration means when the player's attention is focused on the flow path to the profit passing means, compared to when no decoration is applied.

Gaming machine B13 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B12, the rate at which gaming balls enter the first ball entry port and the rate at which gaming balls enter the second ball entry port in the flow-down area can be maintained in multiple states with different rates.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B12, the state maintained in the downstream area can be changed in a plurality of states. For example, a device that appears and disappears at regular intervals in the downstream area may be provided, or a device that changes the angle of inclination of a slope plate provided between the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port may be used. It may be controlled.

<Make the device for distributing game balls left and right more compact>
In a game machine comprising a game board main body and a flowing means configured to allow game balls to flow down in a manner that distributes them to a plurality of ball entrances behind the front end surface of the game board main body, the game board main body includes: The flow means includes an arrangement area in which nails can be arranged to distribute the flow path of the game balls, and a non-arrangement area in which nails cannot be arranged, and the flow means is arranged so that the flow path of the game balls is arranged in the non-arrangement area. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is arranged in a range including the rear of the installation area.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet that are arranged on the left and right sides, and a distribution flow path that allows game balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is made of a resin material and is formed so that game balls can flow down inside it, but in order to make it easier to take measures in case of ball clogging, etc., a gap large enough to allow game balls to pass through is formed upstream of the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet (just before the balls enter).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are configured to protrude toward the front side of the game board, so it is not possible to configure the gaming area on the front side of the distribution channel. The problem was that it was difficult. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ensuring a large range in which the game area can be formed.

In other words, the area required for locating the first and second ball inlets partially extends out toward the front side of the game board, narrowing the other areas in which game balls can flow down, potentially reducing the design freedom for the areas in which game balls can flow down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine C1, the flow-down means is disposed behind the front end face of the gaming board body, so other components that guide the gaming balls can be disposed in front of the front end face of the gaming board body, ensuring a large range for the formation of the gaming area.

A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the multiple ball entrances in the gaming machine C1 include a first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is positioned so as not to overlap with a movable device disposed in the gaming area when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the gaming ball entering the first ball entrance from being reduced due to the movable accessory.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines C1 or C2, at least a portion of the path along which the gaming balls that deviate from the first ball entrance flow downward is positioned in a position that overlaps, in a front view, with a movable device disposed in the gaming area.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the game ball that deviates from the first ball entrance and flows down can be hidden with a movable accessory.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the flow-down means in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3 includes a direction switching unit configured to cause gaming balls to flow down toward the player on the upstream side of the multiple ball entrances.

Gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C3, improves the visibility of the gaming balls by using a direction switching unit to direct the gaming balls flowing down the flow means toward the player just before the multiple ball entrances, and also increases the attention to the gaming balls flowing down toward the multiple ball entrances.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the gaming machine C4 is provided with a distributing means for distributing the downward direction of the game balls at a front position of the direction switching section on the front side of the gaming board main body.

In addition to the effects of game machine C4, game machine C5 can distribute game balls by the distribution means even at the front position of the game board body where it is difficult to drive nails. This improves the design freedom of the game area.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a ball entry means configured to allow at least some of the gaming balls sorted by the sorting means to enter the game machine C5, the gaming balls that flow down the flow means and the direction switching section are discharged to the rear side, and the gaming balls that flow down the flow means are configured to be visible through the game board body.

According to the game machine C6, the subsequent visibility of the game ball that has flown down the direction switching section is reduced, making it possible to create an illusion that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. As a result, the number of game balls flowing down the falling means can be added to the number of game balls flowing down toward the ball entering means, making it appear as if a large number of game balls are flowing down toward the ball entering means. Can be done.

In this case, the game balls flowing down the flow means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the game board body are separated by the game board body and cannot collide, so it is possible to prevent the flow of game balls actually flowing down towards the ball entry means from being impeded by game balls flowing down the flow means. In other words, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it appear to the player that even more game balls are flowing down towards the ball entry means, while ensuring the ball entry efficiency of the game balls actually flowing down towards the ball entry means.

Gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C1, it has a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet, and a first flow path configured to allow gaming balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet, and the first flow path has a branched flow path upstream of the first ball inlet through which gaming balls flow in a direction deviating from the first ball inlet.

According to the gaming machine C7, even if ball clogging occurs on the first ball entrance side in the first channel, the game ball can be discharged from the branched channel, so that the ball clogging can be easily resolved. Can be done.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7, the first flow path is configured to move the gaming ball upstream of the first ball inlet in a direction that intersects with a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet, thereby deflecting the gaming ball away from the first ball inlet.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port installed on the left and right sides, and a swing system configured to allow the game ball to flow down toward the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. There is a gaming machine that includes a branch channel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741, especially FIG. 4). The distribution channel is made of a resin material, and is formed so that the game balls can flow down inside it.In order to facilitate measures in the event of ball clogging, etc., the first ball entry port and On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (the position immediately before the ball enters), a gap portion large enough to allow the game ball to pass through is formed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gap formed in the upstream side of the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port is large enough to allow the game ball to be ejected, and the game ball is ejected in the left-right direction. In order to ensure a passage area for the game balls, there is a flow path for the game balls to flow down toward the first ball entry port, and a flow path for the game balls to flow down toward the second ball entry port. Since it is necessary to leave a space between the flow path for the ball and the left and right sides of the arrangement at least equal to the diameter of the game ball, the width of the first ball entrance hole and the second ball entrance hole must be There was a problem in that the horizontal width for arranging the mouth and the second ball entry hole was excessive.

In other words, the horizontal width (area) required for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port is excessive, making it possible to form a falling path for the game ball on the front or rear side of the game board. There was a problem in that the range narrowed, and the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game balls were made to fall could be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C8, since the structure for deflecting the game ball from the first ball entrance is configured to advance the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line, the first ball entrance Since it is not necessary to make the distance between the second ball entry port and the ball entry port larger than the diameter of the game ball, the left and right width (area) for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball falls.

The design of the area in which the game balls are allowed to flow down is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the design of the area between the game board and the glass panel of the door frame (the so-called game area), or it may be the design of the area behind the front end face of the game board (for example, an internal flow path made of resin). In the former case, it also includes the design of the arrangement of nails that are driven into the game board as members for guiding the game balls.

The gaming machine C8 is provided with a second flow path configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the second ball entry port, and the second flow path is connected to the second ball entry port on the upstream side of the second ball entry port. A game machine characterized in that the game ball is configured to advance in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, thereby deflecting the game ball from the second ball entry port. C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8, the horizontal width (area) for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, a second flow path configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the second ball entry port, and a game ball that flows down the first flow path and the first ball entry port. and a receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls that have deviated from the second ball entrance and game balls that have flowed down the second flow path and that have deviated from the second ball entry port. C10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C8 and C9, gaming machine C10 can combine the means for receiving gaming balls that have deviated from the first ball inlet and the means for receiving gaming balls that have deviated from the second ball inlet into a single means, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing component costs.

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that in gaming machine C10, the receiving means is located on the front side of the specified straight line.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C10, gaming machine C11 can improve the visibility of the gaming ball received by the receiving means, making it easier to determine whether the gaming ball that entered the flow-down means passed through the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet, or whether it deviated from the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet and was received by the receiving means.

Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that in gaming machine C10, the receiving means is arranged on the rear side of the specified straight line.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C10, the visibility of the downstream means can be improved compared to the case where the flow path for the game ball is formed on the front side of the downstream means. It is possible to easily determine that the game ball is passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port provided on the downstream side of the flowing down means.

<Production is performed on the side that is easy to see, and evacuation is performed by moving to the side that is difficult to see>
A moving means is provided that can move between a first position where action is performed and a second position different from the first position, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than the first position. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a rotating member that is supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, JP 2010-200914 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the rotating member is always visible inside the opening, which means that there is a problem that the position of the rotating member may shift due to poor control, or the rotating member may be easily visible to the player after over-rotation, which may reduce the presentation effect.

In response to this, gaming machine D1 makes the movement means less visible in the second position compared to the first position where the action presentation is performed, so that even if a position shift or over-rotation occurs in the second position, this condition is less noticeable to the player, and a reduction in the presentation effect can be prevented.

Note that the mode of reducing the visibility of the transportation means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, regardless of whether it is a transparent member or an opaque member, a member that obstructs the player's view may be placed between the moving means and the player, or the moving means may be displayed on a liquid crystal display that easily attracts the attention of the player. It may also be a mode in which it is displaced (evacuated) outward from the area on the front side of the device.

Gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1, the first position is located closer to the front of the gaming machine than the second position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can increase the visible size of the moving means itself by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the moving means in gaming machine D2 is capable of rotating about a predetermined rotation axis, and the front-to-rear arrangement changes depending on the rotation.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, it is possible to change the front-rear arrangement of the moving means while eliminating the need to translate the moving means back and forth. Therefore, the structure for changing the front and back arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

Gaming machine D4 is one of gaming machines D1 to D3, and is characterized by having an auxiliary means for assisting in maintaining the state of the moving means arranged in the second position on the appropriate side.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machine D4 can appropriately perform the effects of the moving means at the first position by adjusting the state of the moving means at the second position using the auxiliary means.

The manner of assistance is not limited in any way. For example, the attitude of the moving means may be corrected to the appropriate side by contact, or the moving means may be maintained on the appropriate side by a biasing force.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that in gaming machine D4, the auxiliary means is positioned on the second position side with respect to the first position.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, by placing the auxiliary means on an inconspicuous side, the auxiliary means can be easily hidden. Therefore, a separate member for hiding the auxiliary means is not required, and the space in front of the auxiliary means can be secured as a performance space.

The arrangement of the second position side is not limited in any way, and various arrangements are exemplified. For example, it may simply be on an inconspicuous side, on the rear side in the front-to-rear direction, or on the outer side of the central opening of the game board facing the liquid crystal device.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that in gaming machine D5, the second position is set closer to the rear side of the gaming machine than the first position, and the auxiliary means is arranged so that the movement means blocks the player's line of sight when the movement means is placed at the second position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6 can hide the auxiliary means using the moving means, making it easier to prevent the auxiliary means from being discovered, and the appearance is good when the moving means is retracted. This allows for greater freedom in designing the auxiliary means.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, the movement of the moving means is composed of a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible, and is configured to bring the state of the moving means closer to the appropriate side during the second movement.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

A gaming machine D8 in the gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the moving means is brought closer to a proper state by a biasing force.

According to the game machine D8, the moving means can be brought closer to the appropriate side without relying on the control.

Gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the second movement in gaming machine D7 or D8 is a rotational movement around a predetermined rotation axis.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D7 and D8, gaming machine D9 can change the state of the moving means so that it approaches the appropriate side while the moving means is in the middle of changing its attitude.

A gaming machine D10, which is any one of the gaming machines D7 to D9, wherein the front side and the back side of the moving means are formed in different manners during the first movement.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D7 to D9, gaming machine D10 allows the front side visible to the player to be shaped in a decorative manner, while the back side can be shaped in a functional manner.

<Performance that changes the surface of the stage equipment>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with a first means capable of executing a predetermined performance, the first means being changeable between a first posture for performing a first performance and a second posture for performing a second performance as the predetermined performance, and the side facing forward changes between the first posture and the second posture.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a position-changing member that is pivoted on a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, JP 2010-200914 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the position-changing member always faces the same side toward the front, and there is no change in appearance beyond the change in position, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the presentation effect that utilizes the position-changing member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the front-facing side of the first means is configured to change between the first attitude and the second attitude, each of the single movable means called the first means By designing the side surfaces in different ways, it is possible to change the viewed side (front side), so that the first means can be seen by the player as being completely different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance of the first means.

Note that the mode of the predetermined performance is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be an action effect in which at least a part of the first means operates, or a light emission effect using light emitted from a light emitting means included in the first means.

In the gaming machine E1, the first means includes predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figures can be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the figures visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means are A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is configured to be changeable between a first attitude and the second attitude.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved by changing the graphic visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means.

Note that the mode of change in the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the visible figure may be changed by controlling the light emitting pattern of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means in a stopped state, or the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means may be fixed and the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means is fixed. It may be possible to change the visible figure (such as an afterimage) by operating the light emitting means, or it may be a combination of these.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and the outer shape of the first means is visible at the first position and the outer shape is visible at the second position. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the outer shape of the first means that is possible is different from that of the first means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, since the first means is configured so that the visible external shape changes while moving, it can produce effects that are difficult to achieve with a single member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the performance effect of the first means can be improved.

A gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E3, the area in which the first means can perform a presentation is set in accordance with the presentation mode.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E3, gaming machine E4 is configured so that the area required for the presentation operation executed by the first means changes in size depending on the presentation mode. This makes it possible to operate the first means in a presentation mode that matches the area, even if the area in which the first means can perform the presentation operation changes depending on the arrangement of the first means, thereby improving the design freedom of the presentation of the operation of the first means.

A gaming machine E5, which is the gaming machine E3 or E4, further comprising a dividing means arranged to divide the first means arranged at the first position in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the dividing means allows the first means to be seen in the first position and the first means to be seen in the second position (non-divided). can be made different.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E3 to E5, the predetermined light-emitting means is configured so that the figure visible in the first position and in the first attitude corresponds to the shape of a progress assistance means that assists the progress of a gaming ball in the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the traveling direction of the gaming ball to the player by emitting light in the first posture. In addition to a stand-alone performance, it can also be used as a performance related to the direction of movement of the game ball.

Note that the mode of the advancement aid means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the ball to the game area, or it may be a guide means that is placed in the game area and guides the game ball to flow down, or it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the ball to the game area, or it may be a guide device that is placed in the game area and guides the game ball to flow down, or it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the game ball to the game area. It is also possible to use a ball passing state switching means that can be switched by.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the figure that is visible in the second position and in the second attitude in gaming machine E6 is a figure that draws attention to a predetermined ball entry area where the gaming ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, another type of light production can be performed by a single first means as a light production executed for the same purpose. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the player from getting bored with the performance.

In any of the gaming machines E3 to E7, the movement of the first means includes a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state where the first movement is possible. A gaming machine E8, characterized in that it is configured to bring the state of the first means closer to a proper side during the second movement.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E3 to E7, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

In gaming machine E8, the first means is characterized in that the state is brought closer to the appropriate side by a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E8, the first means can be brought closer to the proper side without relying on the control.

A gaming machine E10, in the gaming machine E8 or E9, wherein the second movement is a rotational movement about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8 or E9, the state can be changed so that the moving means approaches the proper side while the attitude of the displacement means is changing.

A gaming machine E11 is any one of gaming machines E8 to E10, characterized in that during the first movement, the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different configurations.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E8 to E10, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for functionality. be able to.

<Support structure for operated member>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable and a support means supporting the displacement means, the support means comprising an allowance portion capable of allowing the displacement of the displacement means and a limiting portion capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a movable unit that moves up and down when driven by a pair of left and right drive devices is equipped with a rotating member that is rotated and driven by an individual drive device (see, for example, JP 2013-000482 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the movable unit is supported on plate portions extending up and down on both the left and right sides in a manner that allows it to move linearly in the vertical direction. Therefore, if there is a mismatch in the drive timing of the pair of left and right drive devices and a load is generated in a direction that causes the movable unit to lose its posture (tilt), the smoothness of the movement of the movable unit is lost and the increased operating resistance increases the possibility of damage to the power transmission system. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of performance and durability.

In contrast, according to gaming machine F1, the support means that supports the displacement means is provided with a limiting section that limits the displacement of the displacement means, as well as a allowing section that allows the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy in the drive timing for driving the displacement means, the displacement of the displacement means relative to the support means is allowed in advance, so that the smooth operation of the displacement means can be maintained within that allowable range, and the load applied to the displacement means between the support means and the displacement means can be reduced. This allows for improvements in terms of presentation and durability.

In addition, by configuring the support mode of the displacement means so that it is possible to appropriately select whether to increase the proportion of influence of the permissive portion or the proportion of influence of the restrictive portion, two support modes can be configured.

Although the conventional gaming machine has been described as having a movable unit that is displaced in the vertical direction, the direction of displacement of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be in an up-down direction, a left-right direction, a front-back direction, a rotation direction around a predetermined rotation axis, or a combination thereof.

The configuration of the permissive portion and the restrictive portion can be set to any shape, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the permissive portion may be formed as a long hole extending in the first direction, and the restrictive portion may be formed as a perfect circle with a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the permissive portion.

A gaming machine F2, in which the allowing section is configured to allow the displacement of the displacement means when the displacement of the restricted section of the displacement means is restricted by the restricting section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 can allow the displacement of the displacement means with the limiting portion as its base end. This makes it easier to ensure smooth displacement of the displacement means since no control is required, compared to when the presence or absence of displacement limit is switched on and off by electrical control.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the permissible section has a first permissible state in which displacement of the displacement means is permitted within a first permissible width, and a second permissible state in which the displacement means is permitted to be displaced within a second permissible width smaller than the first permissible width. A gaming machine F3 is configured to be able to change its state between a second permissible state and a second permissible state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can accommodate different displacement widths using a single tolerance section, even when the displacement widths differ depending on the type of displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the state change is caused by a change in the attitude of the displacement means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F3, the change in the attitude of the displacement means causes a change in the allowable width allowed by the allowable section, so that the attitude of the displacement means subject to the allowable and restricted displacement and the displacement Since the size of the permissible width can be directly linked to the size of the allowable width, malfunctions of the displacement means can be avoided in advance. Furthermore, the number of structural members can be reduced compared to the case where a separate limiting member is used to hold down the displacement means and limit displacement.

In the game machine F4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along a first direction, and the first permissible state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permissible portion is the same as the first direction. The gaming machine F5 is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, and the second permissible state is characterized in that a direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permissible portion intersects with the predetermined plane.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4, by switching the direction that the allowing section allows as the direction of displacement of the displacement means with respect to the first direction, the allowable range of displacement by the allowing section can be changed. can.

As a result, in relation to the control of the drive device that drives the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means is maintained in a first permissible state in a range in which positional deviation in the first direction between the displacement means and the support means is likely to occur, while the attitude of the displacement means is set to a second permissible state in a range in which positional deviation can be prevented or where positional deviation should be prevented, thereby making it possible to achieve a well-defined displacement mode in the displacement means that is neither too soft nor too hard.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines F3 to F5, the displacement means supports a movement means configured to be operable, the movement means is configured to be operable at high speed, and the high speed movement is executable when the permissive section is in the second permissive state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, gaming machine F6 makes it easier to prevent the displacement means from being displaced by the inertial load caused by the high-speed operation of the operating means.

Gaming machine F7 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F6, characterized in that the support means is composed of a pair of members that support the displacement means from both sides.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F1 to F6, the displacement means can be stably supported.

A gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the pair of members in the gaming machine F7 are configured to be rotatably displaceable around a first axis, and the allowable width of the allowable portion is formed to extend along the first axial direction.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, it is possible to cause the displacement means to be displaced within the allowable width allowed by the allowing portion on the tangential plane of the cylinder centered on the first axis. can. In other words, the displacement permitted by the permissible portion can be caused as a displacement in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

This makes it possible to three-dimensionally deal with difficult-to-avoid deviations in the amount of displacement, such as backlash, that can occur when using gears in the drive transmission mechanisms on both the left and right sides, and allows for smooth rotational displacement of the displacement means around the first axis.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F8, wherein one of the supporting means includes the limiting section.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F8, it is possible to tolerate misalignment when assembling the other supporting means and the moving means, and it is possible to facilitate the assembling.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the permissible part is formed as a long hole, and the restricting part is formed as a long hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the permissible part. F10.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the gaming machine F10 can slide the moving means in the longitudinal direction of the restricting section and the allowing section. This can relieve the load on the moving means or can be used to improve the movement of the moving means.

<Technical concept of setting multiple types of fixing force for moving means>
The gaming machine G1 is provided with a movable moving means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means, and the load applying means is capable of switching the load to be applied in response to the state of the moving means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a regulating means (load applying means) that is configured to be able to move the moving means, which is displaced up and down, to a position where it can be regulated (see, for example, JP 2016-54856 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, although the regulating means can regulate the movement of the moving means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost-effectiveness of the volume occupied by the regulating means is low. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making effective use of the regulating means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be switched according to the state of the moving means, so that the load applied to the moving means can be changed by using a single load applying means. Multiple types of effects can be applied to movement. That is, the load applying means can be effectively utilized.

The state of the moving means that is used as a criterion for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited in any way, and various states are exemplified. For example, the difference in the state of the moving means may be a difference in the arrangement of the moving means, or a difference in the operating state.

Examples of states with different operating modes include a state in which the moving means operates actively and a state in which the moving means operates passively in response to the operation of other moving means held by the moving means or other moving means arranged outside the moving means.

Note that the mode of switching the load to be applied is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (it may be switched between a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means). (b) The mode of the load applied by the load applying means may be switched depending on the elapsed time from the start of movement of the moving means.

The load switching mode may be a change in the magnitude of the load, or a change in the mode of load generation. The mode of load generation may be, for example, a frictional force (brake) caused by friction with the moving means, or a restricting force (stopper) that occurs when the limit of the allowable range of the load is reached.

A gaming machine G2, characterized in that the load applying means in the gaming machine G1 can switch between an opposing state in which the load is applied in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the moving means, and an intersecting state in which the load is applied in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the moving means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 can switch the load applied to the moving means by changing the position of the load applying means relative to the movement path of the moving means, eliminating the need for a complex shape for switching the load and allowing the load applying means to be configured simply.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the load applying means includes a load applying moving means movable in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means, and the load applying moving means is configured to be able to come into contact with the moving means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, gaming machine G3 can be configured so that the load-applying moving means moves in and out of the movement path of the moving means by linear movement (direct motion), so that the movement range (movement range taking into account the variation in movement) required of the load-applying moving means to switch the type of load applied from the load-applying means to the moving means can be reduced.

This makes it possible to reduce the space required to place the load-applying moving means. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the space required to place the moving means and load-applying means is usually limited to an internal size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard, so by reducing the space required to place the load-applying moving means, the degree of freedom in the placement of the moving means and load-applying means can be improved.

A gaming machine G4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine G3, the load applying means is configured so that its moving direction intersects the moving direction of the moving means at a right angle, and the movement in the moving direction of the moving means is restricted.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to increase the difference in the aspect of the load applied to the moving means with the minimum movement width of the load applying means.

A gaming machine G5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, switching of the load applied by the load applying means is performed in accordance with the position of the moving means.

The gaming machine G5 can accommodate cases where the performance action of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4.

For example, in a case where the moving means is equipped with a predetermined operating means, the operating means may operate at high speed when the moving means is stationary, but the operating means may stop or operate at low speed when the moving means is moving. When a performance is performed, there may be a demand for the moving means to be securely fixed when the moving means is at rest, while a demand is required for the moving means to be gently fixed (braked) when the moving means is moving. may occur.

By switching the load applied by the load application means in accordance with the position of the moving means, different requirements due to different placements of the moving means can be met.

A gaming machine G6, which is one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, is characterized in that the load applying means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, and releases the load when the moving means moves in the reverse direction.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, it is possible to respond to the difference in the forward and reverse directions of movement by depending on the presence or absence (size) of the load from the load applying means.

A gaming machine G7 is any one of gaming machines G1 to G6, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the moving means, and a separation load is generated in a direction that separates the moving means and the driving means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the gaming machine G7 generates a separation load, which allows the moving means to be separated from the driving means, thereby reducing the transmission efficiency of the driving force.

In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the separation load is generated from the load applying means.

Gaming machine G8 provides the same effects as gaming machine G7, and the load application means can be configured to be multifunctional.

In gaming machine G7, gaming machine G9 is characterized in that the separation load is generated in the driving means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G7, gaming machine G9 can reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force upstream of the transmission path of the driving force.

A gaming machine G10 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G1 to G9, it can be configured to have a case where a frictional force is applied from the load application means to the moving means, and a case where the load application means restricts the movement of the moving means.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, variations in the movement mode of the moving means are increased even when the moving means is moved by generating the same driving force. be able to.

<Multiple guidance means for guiding the movement of a transportation means have different modes>
A gaming machine H1 comprising: a movable moving means; a first guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means; and a second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means in a manner different from that of the first guiding means.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, movement of the moving means is guided by a pair of guide means having the same aspect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the mode of load applied to the pair of parts of the moving means that are guided by the guide means is common, and in order to improve durability, the load applied to the pair of parts that are guided by the guide means is the same. Since it is necessary to increase the strength of the moving means, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the moving means (the part of the moving means guided by the pair of guide means) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the first guide means and the second guide means for guiding the movement of the moving means are different in the guidance manner, so the manner of the applied load and the necessary for improving durability are different. The intensity values can be different. Therefore, since the portion of the transportation means that is guided by multiple guide means can be configured to have different shapes and strengths, the portion of the transportation means that is guided by multiple guide means ) can improve the degree of freedom in design.

Note that the difference in aspect between the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the first guide means may be configured as a guide rail, while the second guide means may be configured as a guide hole, or the first guide means may be a rotation guide means supported by a predetermined rotation axis. The second guide means may be configured as a guide groove, or may be configured by changing the combination of each structure.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the extending direction of the grooves in the first guide means and the second guide means may be parallel, but the widths of the grooves may be different; An embodiment may also be adopted in which the extending directions of the grooves in the first guide means and the second guide means are non-parallel, but the grooves have a common width.

Gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H1, the second guide means is arranged so that at least a portion of it is aligned along the first guide means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 has the advantage that the second guiding means is at least partially aligned with the first guiding means, allowing the moving means to operate in two stages.

In the gaming machine H2, the second guide means includes a part that is parallel to the first guide means, and an auxiliary part that guides the moving means in a direction different from that when guided by the part that is parallel to the first guide means. Features of gaming machine H3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H2, gaming machine H3 can change the direction in which the moving means is guided at the boundary between the annex section and the auxiliary section. This makes it possible to complicate the movement of the moving means.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H3 includes a transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means, and the displacement direction of the transmitting means is one direction regardless of the moving direction of the moving means. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that it is fixed to.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the design of the driving force transmission system is made easier compared to the case where the displacement direction of the transmission means is changed while the moving means is moving. be able to.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that in gaming machine H4, the transmission means is configured to transmit driving force via a guided portion guided by the second guiding means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H4, the driving force is transmitted via the guided part guided by the narrow second guide means, so that the guided part is not affected when the driving force is transmitted. Misalignment can be suppressed.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H5, the guided portion is configured to overtake the auxiliary guiding portion guided by the first guiding means in the moving direction of the transmission means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H5, gaming machine H6 can reduce the driving force required when the moving means starts to move, compared to when the entire weight of the auxiliary guiding section is applied to the guided section and driven against that entire weight.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, when the moving means is guided by the annexed section, the first direction of the moving means is rotated in a rotational direction with the second guiding means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. When the guide means side is energized and the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part, the second guide means side of the moving means rotates in the rotational direction with the first guide means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. A game machine H7 characterized in that it is energized.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, when a roller guided by the guide means is adopted as a configuration, it becomes easier to rotate the roller, so that the roller as a guided member can be easily rotated. wear can be reduced.

In any of gaming machines H3 to H7, when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part, the moving means is maintained at a predetermined part of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is guided by the auxiliary part. 2. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that the width is wider than that of the two guiding means.

Gaming machine H8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines H3 to H7, but the wide first guiding means can maintain the movement of the moving means guided by the auxiliary section, stabilizing the movement of the moving means. This makes it easier to prevent the part of the moving means that is guided by the second guiding means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the auxiliary section and the auxiliary section. This stabilizes the movement of the moving means, and allows smooth gradual switching when the movement is configured to be switched in stages.

Furthermore, since the support area of the first guide means at a predetermined portion can be increased, local wear between the moving means and the first guide means can be easily avoided.

A gaming machine H9 in the gaming machine H8, wherein the predetermined portion is configured to at least suppress vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H8, it is possible to reduce the load required to move the moving means in the portion guided by the first guide means.

Gaming machine H10 is characterized in that the electrical wiring connected to the moving means in gaming machine H8 or H9 is routed through the first guide means.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effects of the game machine H8 or H9, it is possible to secure a sufficient cross-sectional area for passing the electric wiring, and to prevent the displacement of the electric wiring when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part. Since this can be suppressed, the durability of the electrical wiring can be improved.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the definite identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which launches a ball into a predetermined gaming area in response to the operation of the control handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Game machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes an attitude changing member that is pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200914 ).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the performance effect. The present technical idea was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of improving performance effects.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes a first means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and the first means has a first posture for performing the first effect as the predetermined effect. , and a second posture for performing a second performance, and the side facing the front changes between the first posture and the second posture.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the first means includes predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figures can be visually recognized by the emitted light. The figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is configured to be changeable between the first attitude and the second attitude.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and is visible at the first position. The outer shape of the first means that is visible at the second position is different from the outer shape of the first means that is visible at the second position.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the performance effect.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the presentation effect of the first means is improved by changing the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means. Can be done.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the first means is configured such that the visible external shape changes while moving. , it is possible to make the player visually recognize effects that are difficult to realize with a single member.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base plate (installation area)
60a Through hole (non-placement area)
62 Outer rail (progression aid)
65a Specified winning opening (part of profit passing means)
140a Electric accessory (movable accessory)
241 Upper component member (part of fixed member)
244b Projection part (first positioning part)
247 Decorative part (dividing means)
251b Central light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
251c Ambient light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
251d Distance light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
261 Lower component (part of fixed member)
270 Upper connecting member (connecting member)
272 First projecting part (part of the guide part, first guide part)
274 Third overhang part (part of guide part, second guide part)
279 Projection part (second positioning part)
290 Thin plate member (thin decorative member)
310 First component (part of flow means)
317 Direction switching section
320 Opening forming part (distributing means)
410 Central component (second member)
413a Projection (reduction projection)
450 Left component (part of downstream area, first member)
453a Side wall part (part of passage area)
455 Ceiling board section (upstream means)
455a Extension plate part (part of passage area)
457 First ball guide section (first ball entrance)
459 Second ball guide (second ball entrance)
490 Wide decorative members (decorative means)
630 Lifting plate member (part of moving means, transmission means)
648 Drive motor (drive means)
650 Resistance generator (load applying means)
653 Forward-rearward displacement member (load-applying movement means)
672 First long hole (first guide means)
673 Second long hole (part of the second guide means, attached part)
674 Curved long hole (part of second guide means, auxiliary part)
680 Displacement member (part of support means)
684 Cylindrical part (rotating shaft, auxiliary guide part)
686 Metal rod-shaped member (guided part)
695 Cylindrical member (auxiliary means)
700 Light-emitting motion production unit (part of transportation means)
710 Main body member (part of displacement means)
760 Intermediate connecting member (part of support means)
764a Long hole (permissible part)
764b Support hole (restriction part)
800 Rotating performance device (part of transportation means, part of first means)
810 Rotating member (part of first means, predetermined light emitting means, part of operating means)
3982l discharge gutter (receiving means)
4985l discharge gutter (receiving means)
7674a Recessed part (predetermined part)
10831a Weight part (auxiliary means)
J1 Center axis (first axis, rotation axis)
KG2 nail (part of the guide means)
SE1a Detection hole (first ball entrance, second ball entrance, part of ball entrance means)
TR1 First passage (first flow path)
TR2 Second passage (second flow path)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base plate (installation area)
60a Through hole (non-placement area)
62 Outer rail (progression aid)
65a Specified winning opening (part of profit passing means)
140a Electric accessory (movable accessory)
241 Upper component member (part of fixed member)
244b Projection part (first positioning part)
247 Decorative part (dividing means)
251b Central light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
251c Ambient light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
251d Distance light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
261 Lower component member (part of fixed member)
270 Upper connecting member (connecting member)
272 First projecting part (part of the guide part, first guide part)
274 Third overhang part (part of guide part, second guide part)
279 Projection part (second positioning part)
290 Thin plate member (thin decorative member)
310 First component (part of flow means)
317 Direction switching unit 320 Opening forming unit (distributing means)
410 Central component (second member)
413a Projection (reduction projection)
450 Left component (part of downstream area, first member)
453a Side wall part (part of passage area)
455 Ceiling board section (upstream means)
455a Extension plate part (part of passage area)
457 First ball guide section (first ball entrance)
459 Second ball guide (second ball entrance)
490 Wide decorative members (decorative means)
630 Lifting plate member (part of moving means, transmission means)
648 Drive motor (drive means)
650 Resistance generator (load applying means)
653 Forward-rearward displacement member (load-applying movement means)
672 First long hole (first guide means)
673 Second long hole (part of the second guide means, attached part)
674 Curved long hole (part of second guide means, auxiliary part)
680 Displacement member (part of support means)
684 Cylindrical part (rotating shaft, auxiliary guide part)
686 Metal rod-shaped member (guided part)
695 Cylindrical member (auxiliary means)
700 Light-emitting motion production unit (part of transportation means)
710 Main body member (part of displacement means)
760 Intermediate connecting member (part of support means)
764a Long hole (permissible part)
764b Support hole (restriction part)
800 Rotating performance device (part of transportation means, part of first means)
810 Rotating member (part of first means, predetermined light emitting means, part of operating means)
3982l discharge gutter (receiving means)
4985l discharge gutter (receiving means)
7674a Recessed part (predetermined part)
10831a Weight part (auxiliary means)
J1 Center axis (first axis, rotation axis)
KG2 nail (part of the guide means)
SE1a Detection hole (first ball entrance, second ball entrance, part of ball entrance means)
TR1 First passage (first flow path)
TR2 Second passage (second flow path)

Claims (3)

comprising a first means capable of executing a predetermined performance;
The first means is capable of changing as a predetermined performance into a first posture for performing a first performance and a second posture for performing a second performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that the side facing the front changes between the first posture and the second posture. The first means includes a predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figure can be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is different from the first posture and the first posture. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be changeable between the second and second postures. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and the outer shape of the first means visible at the first position is different from the outer shape of the first means visible at the second position.

Images